OWNER'S HANDBOOK. - BMW… · out by a BMW Service Partner. If you choose to use another specialist...

The UltimateDriving Machine

OWNER'S HANDBOOK.THE BMW 8 SERIES COUPÉ.

LINK:CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. xxx - VI/18

WELCOME TO BMW.Owner's Handbook.BMW 8 Series Coupé.Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you will find it is tooperate. We would therefore like to offer you the following advice:Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW.Also use the Integrated Owner's Handbook in your vehicle. It contains impor‐tant notes on how to operate the vehicle, enabling you to derive maximumbenefit from the technical advantages of your BMW. It also contains informa‐tion which will help you to maintain both the operating and road safety of yourBMW as well as its full resale value.At the time of production in the factory, the printed Owner's Handbook is themost up-to-date medium. After a vehicle software update – for example, aRemote Software Upgrade – the integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehi‐cle will contain updated information.Supplementary information is provided in the other documents of on-boardliterature.We wish you a safe and pleasant journey.

3Online Edition for Part no. xxx - VI/18

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NOTESNotes .................................................................................................................................... 8Owner's Handbook media ........................................................................................... 19

QUICK REFERENCEGetting in .......................................................................................................................... 24Setting and operation ................................................................................................... 28On the move ................................................................................................................... 32

CONTROLSDriving area ...................................................................................................................... 42Vehicle operating state ................................................................................................. 47iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 50BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 63General settings ............................................................................................................. 66Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 79Seats, mirrors and steering wheel .......................................................................... 108Carrying children safely ............................................................................................. 120Driving ............................................................................................................................. 129Displays .......................................................................................................................... 146Lights .............................................................................................................................. 163Safety .............................................................................................................................. 172Driving Stability Control Systems ........................................................................... 215Driver Assistance Systems ....................................................................................... 219Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 262Climate ........................................................................................................................... 264Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 276Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 282Boot ................................................................................................................................. 285

DRIVING HINTSDriving precautions ..................................................................................................... 290Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 295


MOBILITYRefuelling ....................................................................................................................... 304Wheels and tyres ......................................................................................................... 306Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 330Service products .......................................................................................................... 333Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 344Replacing parts ............................................................................................................ 347Breakdown Assist ........................................................................................................ 351General care .................................................................................................................. 360

REFERENCETechnical data .............................................................................................................. 368Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 370Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 374

© 2018 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyNot to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written permission from BMW AG, Munich.English VI/18, 07 18 490Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote SoftwareUpgrade – the integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will

contain updated information.


6


NOTESNotes .............................................................................................................. 8Owner's Handbook media ........................................................................ 19


NotesAbout this Owner'sHandbookOrientationThe quickest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic or feature is to consult the alphabeticalindex.We recommend that you read through the firstchapter to obtain an initial overview of the vehi‐cle.

Validity of Owner's HandbookVehicle productionAt the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐formation. Updates following the copy deadlinecan result in differences between the printedOwner's Handbook and the integrated Owner'sHandbook in the vehicle.You will find notes on any updates in the appen‐dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the ve‐hicle.

After a software update in thevehicleAfter a vehicle software update – for example, aRemote Software Upgrade – the integratedOwner's Handbook for the vehicle will containupdated information.

Owner's Handbook forNavigation, Entertainment,CommunicationThe Owner's Handbook for navigation, entertain‐ment and communication is available as a printedbook from Service.These topics are also covered in the integratedOwner's Handbook in the vehicle.

Additional sources ofinformationService PartnerA Service Partner of the manufacturer will behappy to answer any further questions.

InternetOwner's Handbook and general informationabout BMW, for example on technology, areavailable on the Internet: www.bmw.com.

Integrated Owner's Handbook inthe vehicleThe Integrated Owner's Handbook describes thespecific equipment and functions present in thevehicle. The Integrated Owner's Handbook canbe shown in the Control Display. For further in‐formation, see page 19.

BMW Driver's Guide AppThe BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐scribes the equipment and functions included inthe vehicle. The app can be displayed on smart‐phones and tablets.

BMW Driver’s Guide web versionThe Driver’s Guide web version shows the mostappropriate information for the selected vehicle.Where possible, only the equipment and func‐tions actually installed in the vehicle will be de‐scribed. The Driver’s Guide web version can bedisplayed in any up-to-date browser.

Seite 8

NOTES Notes


Symbols and displaysSymbols in the Owner'sHandbookSymbol Meaning

Precautions that must be followed inorder to avoid the possibility of injuryto yourself and to others as well asserious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to helpprotect the environment.

"..." Texts on a display in the vehicle forselecting functions.

›...‹ Commands for the voice controlsystem.

››...‹‹ Replies by the voice control system.

ActionsThe actions to be carried out are shown as anumbered list. The sequence of steps must befollowed.

1. First action.2. Second action.

ListsAlternative options and lists of items with no im‐plied sequence are shown as bullet point lists:▷ First option.▷ Second option.

Symbol on components andassemblies

This symbol on a vehicle componentindicates that further information on thecomponent is available in the Owner'sHandbook.

Vehicle equipmentThis Owner's Handbook describes all modelsand all the national and special equipment avail‐able for the model series. As a result, this Own‐er's Handbook may also contain descriptions andillustrations of equipment and functions not fea‐tured in a vehicle, for example due to selectedspecial equipment or the country specification.This also applies to safety-relevant functions andsystems.Please comply with the relevant laws and regula‐tions when using the corresponding functionsand systems.If certain equipment and models are not descri‐bed in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Sup‐plementary Owner's Handbooks provided.In right-hand drive vehicles, some controls arearranged differently from those shown in the il‐lustrations.

Production dateThe production date of your vehicle can befound at the bottom of the door pillar on the driv‐er's door.The production date is defined as the calendarmonth and the calendar year in which the vehiclebody and the powertrain assemblies are joinedand the vehicle is driven or moved from the pro‐duction line.

Status of the Owner'sHandbookGeneralContinuous development ensures high levels ofvehicle safety and quality. In rare instances, yourvehicle may therefore differ from the informationsupplied here.

Seite 9

Notes NOTES


For Australia/New Zealand:generalWhen reading this Owner's Handbook, pleasebear the following in mind: to ensure that our ve‐hicles continue to embody the highest qualityand safety standards, we pursue a policy of con‐tinuous, ongoing development. Because modifi‐cations in the design of both vehicles and acces‐sories may be introduced at any time, your ownvehicle's equipment may vary from that descri‐bed in this handbook. For the same reason, it isalso impossible to guarantee that all descriptionswill be completely accurate in all respects.We must therefore request your understandingof the fact that the manufacturer of your vehicleis unable to recognise legal claims based on dis‐crepancies between the data, illustrations anddescriptions in this Owner's Handbook and yourown vehicle's equipment. Please note, too, thatsome of the optional equipment described in thismanual is not available on Australian models dueto restrictions imposed by Australian DesignRules and other requirements.Should you require any further information,please contact your Service centre, who will bepleased to advise you.


After a software update in thevehicleAfter a vehicle software update – for example, aRemote Software Upgrade – the integrated

Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will containupdated information.

Your own safetyIntended usePlease comply with the following when using thevehicle:▷ Owner's Handbook.▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove

stickers.▷ Technical data of the vehicle.▷ The applicable laws and safety standards of

the country in which the vehicle is used.▷ Vehicle papers and legal documents.

WarrantyYour vehicle is technically designed for the oper‐ating conditions and approval requirements prev‐alent in the country to which it was first delivered- homologation. If your vehicle is to be operatedin another country, it may have to be adapted toany prevailing different operating conditions andapproval requirements. If your vehicle does notcomply with the homologation requirements in acertain country you cannot lodge warranty claimsfor your vehicle there. A Service Partner is able toprovide further information.

Maintenance and repairs

WARNINGWork performed incorrectly on the vehiclepaintwork can cause the radar sensors to fail ormalfunction, resulting in a safety risk. There is adanger of accidents or damage to property. Forvehicles with radar sensors, only have paint‐work or paint repairs on the bumpers carriedout by a Service Partner of the manufacturer oranother qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Seite 10

NOTES Notes


The advanced technology used in your vehicle,for example the state-of-the-art materials andhigh-performance electronics, requires appropri‐ate maintenance and repair methods.Consequently, the manufacturer of your vehiclerecommends having corresponding work carriedout by a BMW Service Partner. If you choose touse another specialist workshop, BMW recom‐mends using one that performs work such asmaintenance and repair according to BMW spec‐ifications with properly trained personnel. In thisOwner's Handbook, facilities of this kind are re‐ferred to as "another qualified service centre or aspecialist workshop".If such work, for example maintenance and re‐pair, is performed inexpertly, it could result inconsequential damage and thus constitute asafety risk.

Parts and accessoriesBMW recommends using parts and accessoryproducts that are specifically approved for thispurpose by BMW.You are recommended to consult a BMW Serv‐ice Partner for advice on genuine BMW parts andaccessories, other BMW approved products andexpert advice on all related matters.The safety and compatibility of these products inconjunction with BMW vehicles have beenchecked by BMW.BMW accepts product responsibility for genuineBMW parts and accessories. BMW cannot ac‐cept liability for parts or accessory products ofany kind which it has not approved.BMW is unable to assess each individual productof outside origin as to its suitability for use onBMW vehicles without safety risk. Nor can suita‐bility be assured if an official permit has been is‐sued for it in a specific country. Tests performedfor such permits cannot always cover all operat‐ing conditions for BMW vehicles, and some ofthem therefore are insufficient.

Data memoryGeneralA number of electronic control devices are instal‐led in your vehicle. Electronic control devicesprocess data that they receive from vehicle sen‐sors, generate themselves or exchange with oneanother, for example. Some control devices arenecessary for the vehicle to function safely orprovide assistance during driving, for exampleDriver Assistance Systems. Furthermore, controldevices facilitate comfort or infotainment func‐tions.Information on the data saved or exchanged canbe obtained from the vehicle manufacturer, forexample in a separate brochure.

Personal identificationEvery vehicle has a unique vehicle identificationnumber. Depending on the country, a vehicleowner can be identified by the vehicle identifica‐tion number, the number plate and the relevantauthorities. There are also other ways of tracingdata collected in the vehicle back to the driver orvehicle owner, for example via the Connected‐Drive account used.

Data protection lawsAs per prevailing data protection law, vehicleusers have certain rights they may assert againstthe vehicle manufacturer or companies that col‐lect or process their personal data.Vehicle users have an unrestricted right to obtaininformation free of charge from bodies that savetheir personal data.These bodies could be:▷ Vehicle manufacturer.▷ Qualified Service Partners.▷ Specialist workshops.▷ Service providers.Vehicle users may request information aboutwhat personal data has been saved, what it is

Seite 11

Notes NOTES


used for and where it has come from. Proof ofownership or use is required to obtain this infor‐mation.The right to information also extends to informa‐tion about data that has been transferred to othercompanies or bodies.See the vehicle manufacturer's website for theapplicable data privacy policy. This data privacypolicy contains information about the right tohave data deleted or corrected. The vehiclemanufacturer's website also provides his contactdetails and those of the data protection officer.The vehicle owner can have the data saved inthe vehicle read out by a Service Partner of themanufacturer or another qualified Service Partneror a specialist workshop, on payment of a feewhere applicable.The legally required on-board diagnosis OBDsocket in the vehicle is used to read out the vehi‐cle data.

Legal requirements regardingdata disclosureThe vehicle manufacturer is obligated, in accord‐ance with prevailing law, to provide the authori‐ties with data he has saved. The required data isprovided only for a specific case, for example toinvestigate a criminal offence.State bodies are authorised, in accordance withprevailing law, to read out data from the vehiclethemselves for a specific case. Information couldbe read out from the airbag control device toshed light on the circumstances of an accident,for example.

Operating data in the vehicleControl devices process data to operate the ve‐hicle.This data includes, for example:▷ Status messages of the vehicle and its indi‐

vidual components, for example wheel rota‐tion speed, wheel speed, deceleration, lateralacceleration, fastened seat belt indicator.

▷ Ambient conditions, for example temperature,rain sensor signals.

The data is only processed within the vehicle it‐self and is usually transient. The data is notsaved after the vehicle is switched off.Electronic parts, for example control devices andvehicle keys, contain components for savingtechnical information. Information on vehicle con‐dition, component load, maintenance require‐ments, events or errors can be saved temporarilyor permanently.This information generally documents the condi‐tion of a component, a module, a system or itsenvironment, for example:▷ Operating states of system components,

for example, fill levels, tyre inflation pressure,battery status.

▷ Malfunctions and faults of important systemcomponents, for example, lights and brakes.

▷ Responses of the vehicle to particular drivingsituations, for example triggering of an airbag,activation of the drive stability control sys‐tems.

▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.The data is required so that the control units canperform their functions. It is also used for detect‐ing and rectifying malfunctions, and helps the ve‐hicle manufacturer to optimise vehicle functions.The majority of this data is transient and is onlyprocessed within the vehicle itself. Only a smallproportion of the data is stored in event or errormemories in response to specific circumstances.When service work is being carried out, for ex‐ample repairs, service operations, warranty workand quality assurance measures, this technicalinformation can be read out from the vehicle to‐gether with the vehicle identification number.A Service Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist workshopcan read out the information. The legally requiredon-board diagnostics (OBD) socket in the vehicleis used to read out the data.

Seite 12

NOTES Notes


The data is collected, processed and used by therelevant organisations in the service network.The data documents the technical conditions ofthe vehicle and helps in locating errors, comply‐ing with warranty obligations and improving qual‐ity.Furthermore, the manufacturer has productmonitoring obligations to meet in line with prod‐uct liability law. To fulfil these obligations, the ve‐hicle manufacturer requires technical data fromthe vehicle. Data from the vehicle can also beused to check customer warranty claims.Error and event memories in the vehicle can bereset when a Service Partner of the manufactureror another qualified Service Partner or a special‐ist workshop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer intothe vehicleGeneralDepending on the vehicle equipment, thefollowing comfort and individual settings can besaved in the vehicle and modified or reset at anytime.These include, for example:▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐

tions.▷ Suspension and climate control settings.Data can be imported into the vehicle entertain‐ment and communication system if required, forexample via a smartphone.Depending on the vehicle equipment, this dataincludes:▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐

tos for playback in an integrated multimediasystem.

▷ Address book data for use in conjunction withan integrated hands-free system or anintegrated navigation system.

▷ Entered navigation destinations.▷ Data on the use of Internet services.

This data may be saved locally in the vehicle or isfound on a device that has been connected tothe vehicle, for example a smartphone, USB stickor MP3 player. If this data is saved in the vehicle,it can be deleted at any time.This data is only transmitted to third parties if ex‐pressly requested in the course of using onlineservices. This depends on the settings selectedfor using the services.

Integration of mobile devicesDepending on the equipment, mobile devicesconnected to the vehicle, for example smart‐phones, can be controlled via the vehicle con‐trols.Sound and images from the mobile device canbe played back and displayed through the multi‐media system. Certain information is transferredto the mobile device at the same time. Depend‐ing on the type of integration, this includes posi‐tion data and other general vehicle information,for example. This optimises the way in which se‐lected apps, for example navigation or musicplayback, work.There is no further interaction between the mo‐bile device and the vehicle, for example activeaccess to vehicle data.How the data is processed further is determinedby the provider of the particular app being used.The range of possible settings depends on therespective app and the operating system of themobile device.

ServicesGeneralIf the vehicle has a wireless network connection,this enables data to be exchanged between thevehicle and other systems. The wireless networkconnection is established via an in-vehicle trans‐mitter and receiver unit or via personal mobiledevices brought into the vehicle, for examplesmartphones. This wireless network connectionenables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐

Seite 13

Notes NOTES


clude online services and apps supplied by thevehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehiclemanufacturerWhere online services from the vehicle manufac‐turer are concerned, the relevant functions aredescribed in the appropriate place, for examplethe Owner's Handbook or manufacturer's web‐site. The relevant legal information pertaining todata protection is also provided. Personal datamay be used to perform online services. Data isexchanged over a secure connection, for exam‐ple with the IT systems of the vehicle manufac‐turer intended for this purpose.Any collection, processing and use of personaldata above and beyond that needed to providethe services must always be based on legal per‐mission, a contractual arrangement or consent. Itis also possible to activate or deactivate the dataconnection as a whole. Excluded from this arefunctions and services which are required by law,for example emergency call systems.

Services from other providersWhen using online services from other providers,these services are the responsibility of the rele‐vant provider and subject to their data privacyconditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐facturer has no control over the content ex‐changed when using these services. Informationon the way in which personal data is collectedand used in relation to services from third parties,the scope of such data and its purpose, can beobtained from the relevant service provider.

Statutory emergency call systemPrincipleThe emergency call system required by law ena‐bles manual or automatic emergency calls to beissued in the event of accidents, for example.The emergency calls are answered by the publicrescue coordination centre.

GeneralInformation on the eCall on-board statutoryemergency call system, which is based on a 112emergency call, its operation and its functions,see page 353.The eCall service based on a 112 emergencycall is a public service of general interest and isprovided free of charge.If a serious accident occurs, the eCall statutoryemergency call system is activated automaticallyby on-board sensors as standard. It is also trig‐gered automatically if the vehicle is equippedwith an intelligent emergency call system thatfails to work in the event of a serious accident.The eCall statutory emergency call system canalso be triggered manually if required.If a critical system failure occurs that would putthe eCall statutory emergency call system out ofoperation, the vehicle occupants receive a warn‐ing, see page 354.

Information on data processingThe eCall statutory emergency call system pro‐cesses personal data in accordance with thefollowing regulations:▷ Protection of personal data: Regulation

2016/679/EU of the European Parliamentand of the Council.

▷ Protection of personal data: Directive2002/58/EC of the European Parliament andof the Council.

Personal data is only processed for the purposeof transmitting eCall emergency calls to thestandardised European emergency call number112.

SIM cardThe eCall statutory emergency call system oper‐ates via mobile communications through the SIMcard installed in the vehicle. The SIM card is notpermanently connected to the mobile telephonenetwork; rather, it remains connected only aslong as the emergency call is active.

Seite 14

NOTES Notes


Data types and their recipientsThe eCall statutory emergency call system mayonly collect and process the following data:▷ The vehicle identification number for rapidly

identifying the vehicle, for example the model.▷ Vehicle type, for example car.▷ Type of vehicle drive, for example petrol or

diesel, for assessing the risks involved in arescue, for example the risk of fire caused byfuel.

▷ The vehicle's position at the time of the acci‐dent, its last three locations and the drivingdirection in order to locate the vehicle fasterwhen on very complex route sections, for ex‐ample.

▷ Log file for automatic system activation andits time stamp.

▷ Control information, which tells rescue serv‐ices whether the emergency call was trig‐gered automatically or manually, for example.

▷ A time stamp for determining the time of theaccident in order to optimise rescue servicesdeployment plans.

▷ The driving direction for establishing whichside of the carriageway is concerned, for ex‐ample.

The authorities of the state in whose territory theeCall system emergency call is made determinethe emergency call coordination centres that willreceive and process the statutory emergencycall.

Data processing configurationThe eCall statutory emergency call system en‐sures that the data contained in the systemmemory cannot be accessed outside the systembefore an emergency call is triggered.The data collected for the eCall statutory emer‐gency call system is only saved in the vehicleand sent to the rescue coordination centre whenan emergency call is triggered.

The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐sures that it cannot be traced and there is nopermanent tracking during normal operation.The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐sures that the data in the internal system mem‐ory is deleted automatically and continuously.Data relating to the vehicle's location is overwrit‐ten continuously in the internal system memoryso the last three vehicle locations needed for thesystem to function normally are always availableand no more.The activity data log of the eCall statutory emer‐gency call system is retained for no longer thanis necessary to handle the eCall emergency calland under no circumstances for any longer than13 hours after the eCall emergency call was trig‐gered.

Rights of individuals affected bydata processingThe individual affected by data processing,for example the vehicle owner, has the right toaccess the data and can request that data con‐cerning him or her that is not processed in ac‐cordance with the statutory regulations be cor‐rected, deleted or blocked as applicable. Everytime data is corrected, deleted or blocked in linewith these regulations, the third parties to whomthe data was transmitted must be informed, pro‐vided that this can be done at a reasonable cost.The individual affected by data processing hasthe right to complain to the relevant data protec‐tion body if he or she believes that his or herrights have been violated by having that personaldata processed.For matters relating to access rights, contact aService Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Seite 15

Notes NOTES


Intelligent emergency callsystemPrincipleThe intelligent emergency call system enablesmanual or automatic emergency calls to be is‐sued in the event of accidents, for example.The emergency calls are answered by an emer‐gency call centre appointed by the vehicle manu‐facturer.In addition to the intelligent emergency call sys‐tem, the eCall statutory emergency call system ispresent in the vehicle and is active depending onthe situation.The vehicle owner has the right to use either theintelligent emergency call system or the eCallstatutory emergency call system.Information on operating the intelligent emer‐gency call system and its functions, seepage 353.

Legal basisThe intelligent emergency call system processespersonal data in accordance with the followingregulations:▷ Protection of personal data: Directive

95/46/EC of the European Parliament and ofthe Council.

▷ Protection of personal data: Directive2002/58/EC of the European Parliament andof the Council.

The ConnectedDrive contract concluded for thisfunction, as well as the relevant laws, ordinancesand directives of the European Parliament andthe European Council provide the legal basis forthe activation and function of the statutory emer‐gency call system.The relevant ordinances and directives governthe protection of individuals in terms of process‐ing personal data.The intelligent emergency call system processespersonal data in accordance with European di‐rectives on the protection of personal data.

The intelligent emergency call system processespersonal data only with the vehicle owner's con‐sent.The intelligent emergency call system and otherservices with additional benefits may only proc‐ess personal data with the express consent ofthe individual affected by data processing, for ex‐ample the vehicle owner.

SIM cardThe intelligent emergency call system operatesvia mobile communications through the SIM cardinstalled in the vehicle. The SIM card is perma‐nently logged into the mobile telephone networkso a connection can be established quickly. Thedata is sent to the vehicle manufacturer in theevent of an emergency.

Improving qualityThe vehicle manufacturer also uses the data sentas part of an emergency call to improve productand service quality.

Position determinationOnly the provider of the mobile telephone net‐work is able to determine the position of the ve‐hicle based on mobile telephone mast locations.The network operator is not able to link the vehi‐cle identification number to the telephone num‐ber of the installed SIM card. Only the vehiclemanufacturer is able to link the vehicle identifica‐tion number to the telephone number of the in‐stalled SIM card.

Log data for emergency callsThe log data for emergency calls is saved in avehicle memory. The oldest log data is regularlydeleted. The log data includes information onwhen and where an emergency call was issued,for example.In exceptional cases, the log data can be read outfrom the vehicle memory. It is usually only possi‐ble for log data to be read out with a court order

Seite 16

NOTES Notes


and if the corresponding devices are directlyconnected to the vehicle.

Automatic emergency callThe system has been designed so that an emer‐gency call is triggered automatically following anaccident of a certain severity, which is detectedby the sensors in the vehicle.

Sent informationIf an emergency call is made by the intelligentemergency call system, the same information isconveyed to the appointed emergency call cen‐tre as is normally conveyed to the public rescuecoordination centre by the statutory emergencycall system.Furthermore, the intelligent emergency call sys‐tem also conveys the following additional infor‐mation to an emergency call centre appointed bythe vehicle manufacturer and, where applicable,to the public rescue coordination centre:▷ Accident data, for example the direction of

the collision as detected by the vehicle sen‐sors in order to facilitate the rescue servicesdeployment plans.

▷ Contact data, for example the telephonenumber of the installed SIM card and thedriver's telephone number, if available, so thatthose involved in the accident can be contac‐ted quickly if necessary.

Data storageThe data relating to an emergency call that hasbeen placed is triggered in the vehicle. The datacontains information about the emergency call,for example the place and time it was issued.The emergency call centre saves audio record‐ings of the emergency call.Audio recordings of the customer are saved for24 hours, in case details of the emergency callneed to be analysed. After that, the audio record‐ings are deleted. Audio recordings of the emer‐gency call centre employee are saved for24 hours for quality assurance purposes.

Disclosure of personal dataThe data obtained in the context of an intelligentemergency call is only used to process theemergency call. If legally obliged to do so, the ve‐hicle manufacturer will disclose the data it hasprocessed and, where applicable, still has saved.

Statutory emergency call systemThe owner of a vehicle equipped with an intelli‐gent emergency call system and the eCall statu‐tory emergency call system has the right to usethe on-board eCall system instead of the intelli‐gent emergency call.For deactivation requests, contact a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.The eCall statutory emergency call system is al‐ways on standby in addition to the intelligentemergency call system. The eCall statutoryemergency call system takes over the emer‐gency call function if the intelligent emergencycall system is not functional for technical rea‐sons, for example if the emergency call centreappointed by the vehicle manufacturer cannot bereached.The eCall statutory emergency call system usesthe infrastructure of the 112 public emergencycall number.The system can be configured so that emer‐gency calls are always made via the eCall statu‐tory emergency call system and not via the intel‐ligent emergency call system. Have the settingconfigured by a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

Seite 17

Notes NOTES


Vehicle identificationnumberEngine compartment

The vehicle identification number is in the enginecompartment, on the right-hand side of the vehi‐cle.

Type plate

The vehicle identification number is on the typeplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

iDriveIt is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐tion number via iDrive, see page 72.

Seite 18

NOTES Notes


Owner's Handbook mediaVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

GeneralMedia overviewThe following media can be used to call up con‐tent from the Owner's Handbook:▷ Printed Owner's Handbook, see page 19.▷ Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle,

see page 19.


After a software update in thevehicleAfter a vehicle software update – for example, aRemote Software Upgrade – the integrated

Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will containupdated information.

Printed Owner's HandbookPrincipleThe printed Owner's Handbook describes allstandard, country-specific and special equipmentavailable for the model series.

GeneralThe Owner's Handbook for navigation, entertain‐ment and communication is available as a printedbook from Service.

Supplementary Owner'sHandbooksPlease also follow the supplementary Owner'sHandbooks which are attached in addition to theon-board documentation as needed.

Integrated Owner'sHandbook in the vehiclePrincipleThe Integrated Owner's Handbook describes thespecific equipment and functions present in thevehicle.The Integrated Owner's Handbook can beshown in the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Handbook1. Press the button.2. "CAR"

Seite 19

Owner's Handbook media NOTES


3. "Owner's Handbook"4. Select the required method of accessing the

contents.

Scrolling within the Owner'sHandbookTurn the Controller until the next or previouscontents are displayed.

Context-sensitive helpGeneralThe section of the Owner's Handbook relating tothe function that is currently selected can be dis‐played directly.

Calling up when using iDriveSwitch to the Options menu directly from thefunction on the Control Display:

1. Press the button.2. "Owner's Handbook"

Calling up when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message on theControl Display:

"Owner's Handbook"

Switching between a function andthe Owner's HandbookYou can use the Control Display to switch from afunction, for example the radio, to the Owner'sHandbook, and then back and forth between thetwo displays:

1. Press the button.2. "Owner's Handbook"3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Handbook.

4. Press the button again to switch backto the last displayed function.

5. Press the button again to switch backto the last displayed page of the Owner'sHandbook.

To switch continuously between the last dis‐played function and the last displayed page ofthe Owner's Handbook, repeat steps 4 and 5.New screens are opened each time you do so.

Favourites buttonsGeneralThe shortcuts to the Owner's Handbook can besaved to Favourites buttons, see page 52, andcalled up directly.

Saving1. Select the required jump using iDrive:

▷ "Keyword search"▷ "Picture search"▷ "Quick reference"▷ "User help"▷ "Chapters"▷ "Quicklist"

2. Press and hold the required Favour‐ites button for more than 2 seconds.

Calling upPress the appropriate button.Owner's Handbook is displayed directly

with the selected shortcut.

Seite 20

NOTES Owner's Handbook media


Seite 21

Owner's Handbook media NOTES


22


QUICK REFERENCEGetting in ..................................................................................................... 24Setting and operation ............................................................................... 28On the move ............................................................................................... 32


Getting inOpening and closingButtons on the remote control

1 Unlocking2 Locking3 To open/close boot lid4 Headlight courtesy delay feature

Unlocking the vehiclePress the button on the remote control.

Depending on the settings, only the driver's dooror all vehicle access points are unlocked.If only the driver's door is unlocked, press thebutton on the remote control again to unlock theother vehicle access points.

Keep the button on the remote controlpressed after unlocking.

The windows are opened for as long as the but‐ton on the remote control is pressed.

Locking the vehiclePress the button on the remote control.

All vehicle entrances are locked.Keep the button on the remote controlpressed after locking.

The windows are closed for as long as the but‐ton on the remote control is pressed.

Central locking buttonsOverview

Central locking buttons.

LockingPressing the button locks the vehiclewhen the front doors are closed.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

UnlockingPressing button unlocks vehicle.

Comfort AccessPrincipleThis feature allows you to access the vehiclewithout having to operate the remote control.Simply having the remote control with you, forexample in your trouser pocket, is sufficient.The vehicle automatically recognises the remotecontrol when it is in the immediate vicinity or in‐side the vehicle.

Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE Getting in


Unlocking the vehicle

Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door.

Locking the vehicle

With your finger, touch the grooved area on thehandle of a closed vehicle door for approximately1 second, without gripping the door handle.

Contactless opening and closing ofthe boot lid

PrincipleThe boot lid can be opened and closed contact‐lessly, provided you are carrying the remote con‐trol with you.

Correct foot movement1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap‐

proximately an arm's length away from therear of the vehicle.

2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as farunder the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ately pull it back again. When performing this

movement, the leg must pass through therange of both sensors.

Boot lidOpening

▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button onthe boot lid.

▷ If you are carrying the remote control, pressthe button on the boot lid.

Press the button on the remote controlfor approximately 1 second.

Doors are unlocked if appropriate.

ClosingPress and hold the button on the re‐mote control.

Without Comfort Access:Press the button on the inside of theboot lid.

With Comfort Access:

Seite 25

Getting in QUICK REFERENCE


▷ Press the button on the inside of theboot lid.

▷ Press the button.The vehicle is locked after the boot lid hasbeen closed. To do this, the driver's doormust be closed and the remote control mustbe outside the vehicle in the vicinity of theboot lid.

Displays and controlsAround the steering wheel

1 Light switch element2 Turn indicator, high-beam headlights3 Instrument cluster4 Wipers

Indicator and warning lampsInstrument clusterIndicator and warning lamps can illuminate in avariety of combinations and colours.When the engine starts or the standby state isswitched on, the functionality of some lights isbriefly checked.

Driver's door

1 Seats, comfort functions2 Central locking system3 Power window switches4 Exterior mirrors5 To open/close boot lid

Switch cluster

1 Selector lever2 Controller3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold4 Drive experience switch5 Start/stop button6 Assistance systems

iDrivePrincipleiDrive comprises a wide range of functions.These functions can be operated using the Con‐troller and, depending on the equipment version,

Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE Getting in


the touchscreen, voice control system or Ges‐ture Control.

Buttons on the Controller

Button FunctionTo call up the main menu.

To call up the Apps menu.

To call up the Communication menu.

To call up the Media/Radio menu.

To call up the Destination input menuof the navigation system.

To call up the navigation map.

To call up the previous screen.

To call up the Options menu.

Voice control

Activating the voice control system

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the acoustic signal.3. Say the command.

This symbol on the Control Displayshows that the voice control system isactive.

If no further spoken commands are possible,switch to iDrive to operate the function.

Switching off the voice control systemPress the button on the steering wheelor say ›Cancel‹.

Seite 27

Getting in QUICK REFERENCE


Setting and operationSeats, mirrors and steeringwheelElectrically adjustable seats

1 Backrest width2 Forward/back, height, seat angle3 Backrest tilt, head restraint4 Lumbar support

To adjust the head restraintHeight

Press the switch up or down.

Distance to back of head

▷ Back: press the button and slide the head re‐straint towards the rear.

▷ Forward: pull the head restraint forwards.

To adjust the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting2 Selecting a mirror, automatic parking function3 Folding in and out

Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE Setting and operation


To adjust the steering wheelElectrical steering wheel adjustment

Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel tothe correct fore/aft position and height for yourseating position.

Memory functionPrincipleThe memory function enables the following set‐tings to be stored and retrieved when required:▷ Seat position.▷ Exterior mirror position.▷ Steering wheel position.▷ Height of the Head-Up Display.

Saving1. Set the desired position.

2. Press the button. The lettering in thebutton is illuminated.

3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the doorwhile the lettering is illuminated. A signalsounds.

RecallingPress the desired button 1 or 2.

Entering the rear passengercompartmentFolding down the backrest1. Pull loop.

2. Fold the backrest forwards.To make it easier to get into the back, the seatautomatically moves all the way forwards.

Folding back the backrestFold back and engage the backrest.The seat automatically moves back to the lastseat position saved.

InfotainmentRadio

1 Changing the entertainment source2 Sound output on/off, volume3 Favourites buttons4 Changing station/track5 Traffic information

Seite 29

Setting and operation QUICK REFERENCE


Navigation destination inputEntering the destination using thequick-search function

1. Press the button on the Controller.2. "Quick search"3. Enter at least two letters or characters.

If applicable, the search term will be automati‐cally completed in grey text.Press the Controller or tilt it upwards to ac‐cept the suggested search term.

4. Select symbol as appropriate.The results are shown as a list.

5. "Search location": select search location ifapplicable.

6. Tilt the Controller to the right.7. Select the desired destination.

Connecting mobile telephoneGeneralOnce the mobile telephone has been connectedin the vehicle, it can be operated using the iDrive,the buttons on the steering wheel, by voice con‐trol and gestures.

Connecting the mobile telephone viaBluetoothVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. If applicable, set the following setting:

"Telephone"3. "Connect new telephone"4. To perform other operations on the mobile

telephone; see the user manual of the mobiletelephone: for example finding/connectingBluetooth device or new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shownon the display of the mobile telephone. Se‐lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

5. Depending on the mobile device, either acontrol number is displayed, or you will haveto enter the control number yourself.▷ Compare the control number shown on

the Control Display with the control num‐ber in the device display.Confirm the control number in the deviceand on the Control Display.

▷ Enter the same control number on the de‐vice and via iDrive then confirm.

The device is connected and displayed in thedevice list.

TelephonyAccepting a callIncoming calls can be accepted in different ways.▷ Via iDrive:

"Accept"▷ Press the button on the steering

wheel.▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:

Select using the knurled wheel on the steer‐ing wheel: "Accept"

Dialling a number1. "COM"2. "Dial number"3. Enter the numbers.4. Select the symbol. The call is made using

the mobile telephone assigned to the tele‐phone function.

If the connection is to be made through the addi‐tional telephone:

1. Press the button.2. "Call via"

Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE Setting and operation


Apple CarPlay preparationPrincipleCarPlay makes it possible to operate certainfunctions of a compatible Apple iPhone by Sirivoice operation and using iDrive.

Operating requirements▷ Compatible iPhone.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.▷ Corresponding mobile radio contract.▷ Bluetooth, WiFi and Siri voice operation are

activated on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlayVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. "Settings"4. Set the following setting:

"Apple CarPlay"5. Activate the function.

Registering iPhone with CarPlayRegister iPhone via Bluetooth on the vehicle.Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐played in the device list.

Seite 31

Setting and operation QUICK REFERENCE


On the moveDrivingDrive-ready stateSwitching on drive-ready state

▷ Depress the brake pedal.▷ Press the start/stop button.

Switching off drive-ready state1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage selec‐

tor lever position P.2. Press the start/stop button.

The engine is switched off.3. Apply the parking brake.

Auto Start Stop functionThe Auto Start Stop function switches the en‐gine off automatically at a standstill to save fuel.For driving off, the engine automatically startsunder the following conditions:Steptronic transmission:▷ By releasing the brake pedal.▷ With Automatic Hold activated: press the ac‐

celerator pedal.

Parking brakeEngaging

Pull the switch.LED and indicator lamp are illuminated.

ReleasingWith drive-ready state switched on:

Press the switch with the brake pedal depressedor selector lever position P engaged.LED and indicator lamp turn off.The parking brake is released.

ParkingThe parking brake is automatically applied whenthe vehicle is held by Automatic Hold and thedrive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle isexited.

Steptronic transmissionEngaging selector lever positions D,N, R

▷ D drive position.▷ N neutral.▷ R reverse.With the driver's seat belt fastened, briefly pressthe selector lever in the desired direction, possi‐bly overcoming a resistance point. Selector leverreturns to centre position in each case.Apply the brakes until ready to drive off, other‐wise the vehicle will move when a drive positionor reverse gear is selected.A selector lever lock prevents inadvertently shift‐ing to selector lever position R or inadvertentlyshifting from selector lever position P.

Seite 32

QUICK REFERENCE On the move


Only engage selector lever position R when thevehicle is stationary.

Cancelling the selector lever lock

Press the button.

Engaging POnly engage selector lever position P when thevehicle is stationary.

Press button P.

Steptronic transmission, sportprogramme and manualoperation

Activate sport programme/manual operation:

Press the selector lever out of selector lever po‐sition D to the left.Manual operation:▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

wards.▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever backwards.

Deactivate sport programme/manual operation:Press the selector lever to the right.

High-beam headlights, flasher,indicatorHigh-beam headlights, headlightflasher

Push the lever forwards or pull it back.▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.

The high-beam headlights are illuminatedwhen the low-beam headlights are switchedon.

▷ High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,arrow 2.

Seite 33

On the move QUICK REFERENCE


Turn indicator

▷ On: press the lever beyond the resistancepoint.

▷ Off: press the lever in the opposite directionbeyond the resistance point.

▷ Triple turn signal: lightly tip the lever up ordown.

▷ Indicating a turn briefly: press the lever as faras the resistance point and hold it there for aslong as you wish to indicate a turn.

Light and lightingLight functions

Symbol FunctionRear fog light.

Night Vision.

Lights off.Daytime driving lights.

Side lights.

Automatic driving lights control.Adaptive light functions.

Low-beam headlights.

Symbol FunctionInstrument lighting.

Parking light, right.

Parking light, left.

Wiper systemSwitching the wipers on/off andflick-wiping

Switching on

Press the lever upwards until the desired positionis reached.▷ Rest position of the wipers: position 0.▷ Rain sensor: position 1.▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Seite 34



Switching off and flick-wiping

Press the lever down.▷ To switch off: press the lever downwards un‐

til the home position is reached.▷ To flick-wipe: press the lever downwards

from the home position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from itshome position, arrow 1.To deactivate: press the lever back into thehome position.

To adjust the sensitivity

Turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever.

To clean the windscreen

Pull the wiper lever.

Air conditioningAutomatic air conditioningButton Function

Temperature.

Air-conditioning mode.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO programme.

Recirculated-air mode.

Seite 35



Button FunctionAir flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrost the windscreen and re‐move condensation.

Rear window heating.

Active seat ventilation.

Seat and armrest heating.

To call up the air conditioningmenu.For the following settings, for ex‐ample: upper body temperatureadjustment, independent venti‐lation.

Refuelling stopRefuellingFuel tank cap1. Tap the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to open

it.

2. Turn the fuel tank cap anticlockwise.3. Place the fuel tank cap in the holder on the

fuel filler flap.

PetrolFor optimal fuel consumption, the petrol shouldbe sulphur-free or low in sulphur content.Fuels labelled on the pump as containing metalmust not be used.

DieselThe engine is designed to run on diesel fuel toDIN EN 590 and ASTM D975.

Wheels and tyresTyre inflation pressure information

The tyre inflation pressure inscriptions can befound on the tyre pressure plate on the door pil‐lar.

After adjusting the tyre inflationpressureReinitialise runflat indicator.Reset Tyre Pressure Monitor.

Checking the tyre inflation pressureCheck regularly and adjust as necessary:▷ At least twice a month.▷ Before a long journey.

Electronic oil measurementOperating requirementsA current measurement is available after approxi‐mately 30 minutes of normal driving.

Seite 36



Displaying the engine oil levelVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Engine oil level"Different messages are shown on the ControlDisplay, depending on the engine oil level. Followthese messages.

Adding engine oilGeneralSafely stop the vehicle and switch off drive-readystate before topping up with engine oil.

Topping up

Do not top up engine oil unless a message is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Note the top-up quantity in the message.Do not top up with too much engine oil.Note recommended engine oil types.

Breakdown AssistHazard warning lights

The button is located in the centre console.

Breakdown AssistBMW breakdown assistanceVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "BMW Assistance"3. If applicable, "BMW Roadside Assist."

A voice connection is established.

ConnectedDriveConcierge ServiceThe Concierge Service provides informationabout hotels, restaurants etc. and can send anSMS with the required information to the vehicle.Addresses can also be sent directly to the navi‐gation system.Via iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "BMW Assistance"3. If applicable, "Concierge Services"A voice connection to the Concierge Service isestablished.

Seite 37



TeleserviceTeleservices are services that help to keep thevehicle mobile.Teleservices can comprise the following serv‐ices:▷ BMW breakdown assistance.▷ BMW Accident Assistance▷ Teleservice Call.▷ Manual Teleservice Call.▷ Automatic Teleservice Call.▷ Teleservice Report.▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.▷ Your Service Partner.▷ Online logbook.

Seite 38



Seite 39



40


CONTROLSDriving area ................................................................................................. 42Vehicle operating state ............................................................................. 47iDrive ............................................................................................................ 50BMW Remote Software Upgrade ........................................................... 63General settings ......................................................................................... 66Opening and closing ................................................................................. 79Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ........................................................ 108Carrying children safely .......................................................................... 120Driving ....................................................................................................... 129Displays ..................................................................................................... 146Lights ......................................................................................................... 163Safety ........................................................................................................ 172Driving Stability Control Systems ......................................................... 215Driver Assistance Systems .................................................................... 219Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 262Climate ...................................................................................................... 264Interior equipment ................................................................................... 276Storage compartments .......................................................................... 282Boot ........................................................................................................... 285


Driving areaVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed in

your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Around the steering wheel

1 Power window switches 106

2 Exterior mirror operation 1143 To open/close boot lid 97

4 Seat comfort functionsMemory function 116

5 Central locking system

Unlocking 89

Locking 89

6 LightsRear fog light 168

Night Vision 191

Seite 42

CONTROLS Driving area


Light switch 163

Lights offDaytime driving lights 165Side lights 164

Automatic driving lights con‐trol 163Adaptive light functions 165High-beam assistance 167Low-beam headlights 164

Instrument lighting 169

Right parking light 164

Left parking light 164

7 Steering-column lever, leftTurn indicator 135

High-beam headlights, headlightflasher 135

High-beam assistance 167

Widgets in the instrument clus‐ter 147Journey data 158

8 Buttons on steering wheel, leftManual Speed Limiter 219

Cruise Control on/off 221

Active Cruise Control on/off 223

With steering and lane control as‐sistant 233:Cruise Control, distance control andtracking on/off

Cruise Control: to store a speed

To interrupt or resume Cruise Con‐trol

Active Cruise Control: to increasethe distance

Active Cruise Control: to reduce thedistance

Rocker switch for Cruise Control

9 Instrument cluster 14610 Buttons on steering wheel, right

Selection lists 158

Volume, see Owner's Handbook forNavigation, Entertainment, Com‐munication 8Voice control system 58

Telephone, see Owner's Handbookfor Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

Knurled wheel for selection lists 158

11 Steering-column lever, rightWiper 136

Rain sensor 136

Cleaning windscreen and head‐lights 137

Seite 43

Driving area CONTROLS


12 Horn, entire area

13 Steering wheel heating 116

14 To adjust the steering wheel 115

15 To release the bonnet 332

Around the centre console

1 Control Display 532 Hazard warning lights 351

Intelligent Safety 176

3 Ventilation 2694 Glove box 2825 Automatic air conditioning 2646 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐tion 8

7 Controller with buttons 53

8 Parking brake 132

Automatic Hold 133

9 Drive experience switch 143SPORT drive modeCOMFORT drive mode

Seite 44



ECO PRO drive mode

ADAPTIVE drive mode

10 To switch drive-ready state on/off 129

11 Auto Start Stop function 129

Park Distance Control, PDC 239Without Surround View: rear-viewcamera 243Surround view 246Crossing traffic warning 259Park Assistant 253

Surround View: PanoramaView 246

Dynamic Stability Control,DSC 215

12 Steptronic transmission selector lever 138

Around the roof lining

1 Emergency call, SOS 353 2 Front passenger airbag indicatorlamp 175

Seite 45

Driving area CONTROLS


3 Reading lights 169 4 Interior light 169

Seite 46



Vehicle operating stateVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

GeneralDepending on the situation, the vehicle is in oneof the three states:▷ Idle state.▷ Standby state.▷ Drive-ready state.

Idle statePrincipleWhen the vehicle is in idle state, it is switchedoff. All electrical consumers are deactivated.

GeneralThe vehicle is in the idle state before you open itfrom outside and once you have left the vehicleand locked it.

Safety notes

WARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ing away. There is a danger of accidents. Be‐fore leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent itfrom rolling away.Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐cle is secured against rolling away:▷ Apply the parking brake.▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on

upward or downward gradients.▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward

or downward gradients, for example with achock.

WARNINGUnsupervised children or pets in the vehiclecan set the vehicle in motion and endangerthemselves or other road users, for example bythe following actions:▷ Pressing the start/stop button.▷ Release the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.▷ Engaging selector lever position N.▷ Operating vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injury. Do notleave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the remotecontrol with you and lock the vehicle.

Automatic idle stateThe vehicle switches automatically to the idlestate under the following conditions:▷ After a few minutes, if no operation is per‐

formed on the vehicle.

Seite 47

Vehicle operating state CONTROLS


▷ When the battery state-of-charge is low.▷ When leaving the vehicle, if one of the front

doors is opened, depending on the iDrivesetting.

Idle state is not established automatically duringa telephone call.

Establishing idle state onopening the front doorsVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "Switch off after door opening"

Manual idle stateTo establish idle state in the vehicle at the end ofa journey:

Press and hold the button, untilthe OFF display on the instru‐ment cluster turns off.

Standby statePrincipleWhen standby state is activated, most functionscan be operated while the vehicle is still at astandstill. Any desired settings can be per‐formed.

GeneralThe vehicle switches to standby state after thefront doors are opened from the outside.

Display in the instrument clusterOFF is shown in the instrumentcluster. The drive is switched offand standby state switched on.

Drive-ready statePrincipleSwitching on the drive-ready state correspondsto starting the engine.

GeneralSome functions, for example Dynamic StabilityControl DSC, can only be operated when drive-ready state is switched on.

Safety notes

DANGERA blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to enterthe vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain pollu‐tants which are colourless and odourless. In en‐closed spaces, the exhaust fumes can alsobuild up outside the vehicle. There is a dangerof fatal injury. Keep the exhaust pipe clear andensure sufficient ventilation.

WARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ing away. There is a danger of accidents. Be‐fore leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent itfrom rolling away.

Seite 48

CONTROLS Vehicle operating state


Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐cle is secured against rolling away:▷ Apply the parking brake.▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on



NOTERepeated start attempts or starting severaltimes in quick succession means that fuel isnot burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐lytic converter can overheat. There is a dangerof damage to property. Avoid repeatedly start‐ing in quick succession.

Switching on drive-ready statePrinciple

Drive-ready state is switched onusing the start/stop button:

Steptronic transmission1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the start/stop button.The starting process is activated automaticallyfor a short time and stops as soon as the enginestarts.Most of the indicator and warning lamps in theinstrument cluster are illuminated for differentlengths of time.

Diesel engineWith the engine cold and at temperatures below0 ℃, approximately 32 ℉ the starting operationcan be delayed slightly due to automatic pre‐heating.

A Check Control message is shown.

Petrol engineDepending on the engine version, full drivepower may only be available approx. 30 secondsafter starting the engine. In this case, the vehiclewill not accelerate in the usual way.

Display in the instrument clusterWhen drive-ready state is switched on, the revo‐lution counter shows the current engine speed.

Switching off drive-ready stateSteptronic transmission1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage selec‐

tor lever position P.2. Press the start/stop button.

The engine is switched off. The vehiclechanges to standby state.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Seite 49

Vehicle operating state CONTROLS


iDriveVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Operating conceptPrincipleiDrive comprises a wide range of functions.These functions can be operated using the Con‐troller and, depending on the equipment version,the touchscreen, voice control system or Ges‐ture Control.

Safety note

WARNINGOperating integrated information systems andcommunication devices during a journey maydistract you from the traffic. You could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a danger of acci‐dents. Only operate the systems or devices ifpermissible in the traffic situation. Stop if nec‐essary and operate the systems or devices withthe vehicle at a standstill.

Entry and displayMain menuThe left-hand side of the main menu featuresmenu items which can be used to access all ofthe iDrive functions.

Media/RadioAll of the entertainment system functions, for ex‐ample radio and TV stations, connection with ex‐ternal devices and music collection.

CommunicationTelephone and SMS function, e-mail and calen‐dar as well as connection and management ofmobile devices such as smartphones.

NavigationAccess to navigation system, destination entryand traffic information. Configurable map viewsas well as other functions such as Points of Inter‐est and avoid areas.

My vehicleInformation on vehicle status and journeys, ac‐cess to the integrated Owner's Handbook as wellas management of driver profiles and setting op‐tions for vehicle and iDrive.

Seite 50

CONTROLS iDrive


AppsManagement and access to apps as well as vehi‐cle functions. Additional apps can be obtainedfrom the BMW Store.

WidgetsThe right-hand part of the main menu containsthe widgets. The defined widgets display dy‐namic content – for example the navigation map– and also serve as buttons.

Letters and numbersLetters and numbers can be entered using theController, touchscreen or voice control system.The keyboard display changes automatically.

Symbol Function or

Switch between upper andlower case.

To enter a space.

To use the voice control.

To confirm your entry.

Move the entry area to the leftor right.

Entry comparisonWhen entering names and addresses, the selec‐tion is gradually narrowed down and possiblysupplemented with every subsequent letter andcharacter that entered.Inputs are continuously compared with the datasaved in the vehicle.▷ Only letters and characters for which data is

available are offered for entry.▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐

tered in all languages available in iDrive.

Enabling/disablingfunctionsSome menu items are preceded by a checkbox.The box indicates whether the function is ena‐

bled or disabled. Selecting the menu item ena‐bles or disables the function.

Function is enabled. Function is disabled.

Status information

GeneralThe status field is located in the top area of theControl Display. Status information is displayedin the form of symbols.

Symbols for telephone

Symbol Meaning Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Reception level of mobile telephonenetwork.

Searching for network.

No mobile telephone network avail‐able.

Critical charge state of the mobiletelephone reached.

Data transfer not possible.

Roaming active.

Location active.

Text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Seite 51

iDrive CONTROLS


Symbols for entertainment

Symbol Meaning Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Online Entertainment.

WLAN.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning Check Control message.

Sound output switched off.

Determining the current vehicle posi‐tion.

Traffic information.

Driver profile.

Messages.

Favourites buttonsGeneraliDrive functions, for example radio stations, navi‐gation destinations, telephone numbers andshortcuts to the menu or pages of the IntegratedOwner's Handbook, can be saved to Favouritesbuttons and called up directly.The settings are saved for the currently useddriver profile.

Overview

1 Favourites buttons

Saving a function1. Select function via iDrive.

2. Press and hold the desired buttonuntil the bar shown on the Control Displayhas fully loaded.

Performing a functionPress the button.

The function is carried out immediately. If youhave selected a telephone number for example,the connection will also be established.

Displaying the button assignmentTouch the buttons with your finger. Do not weargloves or use objects.The button assignment is displayed at the topedge of the screen.

Deleting an individual buttonassignmentPress and hold the desired button and at thesame time until a signal sounds.

Removing all button assignmentsIt is possible to remove the assignments of allbuttons.

1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 simultane‐ously.

Seite 52

CONTROLS iDrive


2. "OK"

Control Display andControllerOverview

1 Control Display with touchscreen2 Controller with buttons and touchpad

Control DisplayGeneralTo clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐structions, see page 363.If the Control Display is exposed to very hightemperatures, for example because of strongsunlight, the brightness may be reduced and theControl Display may even switch itself off. Nor‐mal functions will be restored when the tempera‐ture is reduced, for example by shading or usingthe air conditioning system.

Safety note

NOTEObjects located in front of the Control Displaymay slip and damage the Control Display.There is a danger of damage to property. Donot place objects in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automaticallyThe Control Display is switched on automaticallyafter unlocking.In certain situations, the Control Display isswitched off automatically, for example if no op‐eration is performed on the vehicle for severalminutes.

Switching on/off manuallyThe Control Display can also be switched offmanually.

1. Tilt the Controller up.2. "Screen off"Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐troller to switch it back on again.

ControllerGeneralThe buttons can be used to call up menus di‐rectly. The Controller can be used to selectmenu items and perform settings.Some of the functions of the iDrive can be oper‐ated with the touchpad of the Controller, seepage 56.

Operation▷ Turning.

▷ Pressing.

Seite 53

iDrive CONTROLS


▷ Tilting in four directions.

Buttons on the Controller

Button FunctionTo call up the main menu.

To call up the Apps menu.

To call up the Communication menu.

To call up the Media/Radio menu.

To call up the Destination input menuof the navigation system.

To call up the navigation map.

To call up the previous screen.

To call up the Options menu.

Operation using the ControllerCalling up the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.All iDrive functions can be called up via the mainmenu.

Selecting menu

Selecting menu itemsHighlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menuitem is highlighted.

2. Press the Controller.

Selecting widgets1. Tilt the Controller to the right.2. Select widgets.3. Press the Controller.It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐ment cluster, see page 147.

Adapting the menu

Adapting widgetsYou can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It ispossible to create multiple pages with widgetsand switch between the pages. It is only possibleto make adaptations with the vehicle at a stand‐still.

Seite 54

CONTROLS iDrive


Via iDrive:

1. Select the required page in the main menu. Itis only possible to adapt the page that is cur‐rently selected.

2. Tilt the Controller up.3. "Adjust main menu"4. Select the desired adaptation:

▷ Add a new widget: "Add widget".It is possible to display a maximum of fourwidgets per page.

▷ Add a new page: "Add page".▷ Delete the selected page: "Delete page".▷ Adapt the widget content: select the

widget.5. "Done"

Adapt the menu contentIt is possible to adapt the menu displays for"MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV".

1. Select menu.2. "Personalise menu"3. Select the menu content that is intended to

be displayed.

Switching between screensAfter a menu item has been selected, for exam‐ple "Settings", a new screen is displayed.▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.

The current screen is closed and the previ‐ous screen is displayed.

▷ Press the button.The previous screen is opened again.

▷ Tilt the Controller to the right.The new screen is opened.

An arrow indicates that further screens can becalled up.

Calling up the Options menuPress the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.The Options menu consists of various areas:▷ System settings; for example "Screen off".▷ Operating options for the main menu selec‐

ted, for example for "Media/Radio".▷ Help for selected menu; for example "Help".

Adjusting the settingsSettings such as brightness can be adjusted.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Control display"5. "Brightness at night"6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is

displayed.7. Press the Controller.

Entering letters and numbers

Entry1. Turn the Controller: to select letters or num‐

bers.2. : to confirm your entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function Press Controller: to delete letters or

numbers.

Press and hold the Controller: to de‐lete all letters or numbers.

Seite 55

iDrive CONTROLS


Operating alphabetical listsFor alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,the letters for which entries are available can bedisplayed on the left.

1. Turn the Controller quickly to the left or right.All the letters for which an entry is availableare shown in a letter field.

2. Select the initial letter of the desired entry.The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐played.

Operation via touchpadGeneralSome of the functions of the iDrive can be oper‐ated with the touchpad of the Controller.

Selecting functions1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Touchpad"5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Character input": to enter letters andnumbers.

▷ "Map": to operate the map.▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐

lecting the list field.▷ "Audio confirmation": to have the entered

letters and numbers read out.

Entering letters and numbersEntering letters requires a bit of practice to beginwith. Pay attention to the following when enter‐ing:▷ The system recognises upper and lower case

and numbers. It may be necessary to switchbetween letters and numbers, see page 50.

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on theControl Display.

▷ Always enter associated characters, for ex‐ample accents or dots, so that the letter willbe correctly detected. The input option de‐pends on the language that has been set.You may need to enter special characters us‐ing the Controller.

Entering special characters

Entry OperationTo delete a char‐acter.

Swipe on the touchpad to‐wards the left.

To enter a space. Swipe in the middle of thetouchpad to the right.

To enter a hy‐phen.

Swipe at the top of thetouchpad to the right.

To enter an un‐derscore.

Swipe at the bottom of thetouchpad to the right.

Operating mapThe map of the navigation system can be movedusing the touchpad.

Function OperationTo move map. Swipe in the appropriate

direction.

To enlarge/reducemap.

Pinch together or moveapart your fingers on thetouchpad.

To display menu. Tap once.

Operation by touchscreenGeneralThe Control Display is equipped with a touch‐screen.It is possible to tap menu items and widgets.Touch the touchscreen with your fingers. Do notuse any objects.

Seite 56

CONTROLS iDrive


Calling up the main menu Tap the symbol.

The main menu is displayed.All iDrive functions can be called up via the mainmenu.

Adapting widgetsYou can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It ispossible to create multiple pages with widgetsand switch between the pages. It is only possibleto make adaptations with the vehicle at a stand‐still.Via iDrive:

1. Select the required page in the main menu. Itis only possible to adapt the page that is cur‐rently selected.

2. Tap the symbol in the main menu.3. Select the desired adaptation:

▷ Add a new widget: tap the symbol.A new widget will be added at the relevantposition. It is possible to display a maxi‐mum of four widgets per page.

▷ Delete the selected widget: tap the symbol.

▷ Add a new page: tap "Add page".▷ Delete the selected page: tap "Delete

page".▷ Adapt the content of the widget: tap the

centre of the widget.4. Tap "Done".

Switching between screensAfter a menu item has been selected, a newscreen is displayed.An arrow indicates that further screens can becalled up.▷ Swipe to the left.▷ Tap the arrow.The new screen is opened.

Adjusting the settingsSettings such as brightness can be made usingthe touchscreen.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Control display"5. "Brightness at night"6. Make the desired setting:

▷ Move to the right or left until the requiredsetting is displayed.

▷ Tap the symbol.

Entering letters and numbers

Entry1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.

A keyboard appears on the Control Display.2. Enter letters and numbers.

Deleting

Symbol Function Tap the symbol: to delete letter or

number.

Tap and hold the symbol: to deleteall letters or numbers.

Seite 57

iDrive CONTROLS


Operating the mapThe navigation map can be moved via the touch‐screen.

Function OperationTo enlarge/reducemap.

Pinch or move your fin‐gers apart.

Voice control systemPrincipleThe voice control system enables most of thefunctions shown in the Control Display to be op‐erated by spoken commands. The system pro‐vides spoken announcements to assist you withinput.The voice control system and the feedback itprovides are not a substitute for the printed orintegrated Owner's Handbook.

General▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐

hicle is stationary can only be operated viathe voice control system to a limited extent.

▷ The system has a special microphone on thedriver's side and the passenger side.

▷ ›...‹ indicates commands for the voice controlsystem in the Owner's Handbook.

Operating requirementsIn order for the voice commands to be detected,a language must be set using iDrive that is sup‐ported by the voice control system.Selecting the language, see page 68.

Activating the voice controlsystemGeneralVoice control can be activated in various ways:

▷ Press the button on the steeringwheel.

▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐sonalised wake word.

It is possible that no further spoken commandsare available. In this case, switch to iDrive to op‐erate the function.Voice control can be interrupted:

Press the button on the steering wheelagain or ›Cancel‹.

Button on the steering wheel


2. Wait for the acoustic signal.3. Say the command.

This symbol on the Control Displayshows that the voice control system isactive.

Wake word

GeneralSaying the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ starts thesystem. Voice control can be continued withvoice commands immediately afterwards.

1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹.2. Say the command.

Personalised wake wordThe preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can bechanged to a personalised wake word. Setting apersonalised wake word will deactivate the pre‐set wake word.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"

Seite 58

CONTROLS iDrive


4. "Language"5. "Personal key word"6. "Start recording"7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐

play.

Preset wake wordThe preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be reset.This will deactivate and delete any personalisedwake word that has previously been set.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Language"5. "Say "Hello BMW" for activation"

Possible commandsGeneralMost of the contents on the Control Display canbe said as commands; for example, menu itemsor list entries. When doing this, say the list en‐tries as they are shown in the list.Commands, numbers and letters should be spo‐ken fluently, with the usual emphasis and at anormal volume and speed.Always say the commands in the language of thevoice control system.The voice recognition status is displayed in theupper area of the Control Display.

Functional exampleThe commands for the menu items are spokenin the same way as they are selected using theController.


2. ›Media and radio‹3. ›Saved stations‹

The saved stations are displayed on the ControlDisplay.Additionally, the voice control system can beused to operate most air conditioning functions,see page 275.The destination can be input using the voicecontrol system; see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐gation, Entertainment, Communication.

Help with the voice control system▷ To have possible voice commands read

aloud: ›Voice commands‹.▷ To have information about the voice control

system read aloud: ›General information onvoice control‹.

▷ To have help on the current menu readaloud: ›Help‹.

Information for emergency callsThe voice control system should not be used foremergency calls. Under stress, a person'sspeech and voice pitch can change. This couldunnecessarily delay the connection of your call.Instead, use the SOS button, see page 353, lo‐cated near the rear-view mirror.

SettingsSetting the speech dialogueYou can select whether the system uses thestandard dialogue or the short variant.If the short variant is selected, the system an‐nouncements are played in shortened form.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Language"5. "Voice control"6. Select the desired setting.

Seite 59

iDrive CONTROLS


Activating voice recognition viaserverVoice recognition via server enables use of thedictation function, natural input of destinationsand improves the quality of voice recognition. Touse it, data is sent across an encrypted connec‐tion to a service provider and stored locally there.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Language"5. "Online speech processing"

Speaking during voice outputIt is possible to answer while the voice controlsystem is querying your previous spoken instruc‐tion. The function can be deactivated if the quer‐ies are frequently cancelled inadvertently, for ex‐ample due to background noise or speaking.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Language"5. "Speaking during voice output"

Selecting the languageThe language to be used for voice control andsystem announcements can be set.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Language"5. "System language"6. Select the desired language.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume knob during the spoken instruc‐tions until the desired volume is obtained.▷ The volume setting is retained even if you

change the volume of other audio sources.▷ The volume setting is saved for the currently

used driver profile.

System limits▷ Certain noises may be detected and could re‐

sult in problems. Keep doors and windowsclosed.

▷ Noise from passengers or the rear benchmay interfere with the system. Avoid back‐ground noise in the vehicle while you arespeaking.

▷ Strong dialects may prevent voice recognitionfrom working properly. Speak loudly andclearly.

Using the voice control systemon the smartphoneA smartphone connected to the vehicle can beoperated via voice control.To do this, activate voice control on the smart‐phone.

1. Press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.Voice control in the smartphone is activated.

2. Release the button.If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐pears on the Control Display.

If it was not possible to activate voice control, thelist of Bluetooth devices appears on the ControlDisplay.

Seite 60

CONTROLS iDrive


BMW Gesture ControlPrincipleBMW Gesture Control enables some iDrive func‐tions to be operated simply by moving yourhands.

Overview

The gestures performed under the rear-viewmirror are detected by a camera in the roof lining.

Activating/deactivatingVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Gesture control"5. "Gesture control"

Settings1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Gesture control"5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Display user help": the possible gestureis displayed on the Control Display.

▷ "Audio confirmation": an audible signal isoutput when the gesture is recognised.

Possible gestures

Gesture Operation FunctionMove your index finger forward in the directionof the screen and back again.

Accept phone call.Select highlighted entry of a list dur‐ing voice control.Confirm the pop-up.

Move your hand across the width of the Con‐trol Display in the direction of the front-passen‐ger side.

Reject phone call.Close the pop-up.End voice control.

Slowly move your hand in a circle with your in‐dex finger pointing forwards.Gesture is detected after approximately onecircular movement.

Increase or reduce the volume, de‐pending on the direction of move‐ment.

Seite 61

iDrive CONTROLS


Gesture Operation FunctionPinch your thumb and index finger togetherand move your hand horizontally right or left.

Surround View: rotate camera view.This gesture is only possible withthe vehicle at standstill.

Move your index and middle fingers apart andextend them forwards.

Individually assignable gesture.

Keep your thumb pointing left. Skip function backwards.

Keep your thumb pointing right. Skip function forwards.

Stretch out all five fingers, make a fist and thenstretch out all five fingers again.

Individually assignable gesture.

Performing gesturesPerform the gestures under the rear-view win‐dow and to the side of the steering wheel.Perform the gestures clearly.The gestures can also be performed by the frontpassenger.

Assign gesture individuallyVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Gesture control"

5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or"Function assignment gesture 2"

6. Select the desired setting.

System limitsDetection of gestures by the camera can be dis‐rupted under the following circumstances:▷ The camera lens is covered.▷ There are objects on the rear-view mirror.▷ The camera lens is contaminated. Cleaning

camera lenses, see page 363.▷ The gesture is performed outside the detec‐

tion area.▷ Wearing of gloves or jewellery.▷ Smoking in the interior.

Seite 62

CONTROLS iDrive


BMW Remote Software UpgradeVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

BMW Remote SoftwareUpgradePrincipleThe Remote Software Upgrade can be used toupdate the vehicle software. The Remote Soft‐ware Upgrade provides new functions, functionalenhancements or quality improvements.

GeneralBMW recommends carrying out the RemoteSoftware Upgrade as soon as it becomes avail‐able.The upgrade installation will not begin until it hasbeen confirmed at the vehicle.▷ Installation can take up to 20 minutes.▷ Installation cannot be interrupted.▷ The vehicle cannot be used during installa‐

tion.▷ You may leave the vehicle during installation.

Validity of Owner's HandbookVehicle productionAt the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐formation.

After a software update in thevehicleAfter a vehicle software update – for example, aRemote Software Upgrade – the integratedOwner's Handbook for the vehicle will containupdated information.

Operating requirementsAn active ConnectedDrive contract is required inorder to use the Remote Software Upgrade.

Version informationGeneralThe version information describes the updatescontained in the Remote Software Upgrade. Theversion information can be shown on the ControlDisplay during the download and following suc‐cessful completion of the installation. The infor‐mation is available at all times in the Connected‐Drive customer portal.

Displaying the version informationVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Remote software upgrade"5. "Installed version:"

Seite 63

BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS


Safety note



Searching for and downloadingan upgradeGeneralThere are various ways of searching for anddownloading an upgrade:▷ Automatically.▷ Via iDrive.▷ Via BMW Connected app.

AutomaticThe data for the Remote Software Upgrade isautomatically downloaded to the vehicle whenavailable.

Via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Remote software upgrade"

5. "Search for upgrades"6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐

play.

Via BMW Connected app1. Download the upgrade to your smartphone in

the BMW Connected app when available.2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Connec‐

ted app.3. Establish a WiFi and Bluetooth connection

between the smartphone and the vehicle.The upgrade data will transfer from thesmartphone to the vehicle while driving.

4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐play.

Installing an upgradeGeneralIf the upgrade has downloaded successfully, itcan be installed once the vehicle has beenparked.Follow the instructions on the Control Display.Following a successful upgrade, booked services– for example RTTI – are automatically activatedagain while driving.

Operating requirements▷ Adequate charge state of the battery.▷ The outside temperature is above —

10 ℃/14 ℉.▷ Vehicle is standing horizontally.▷ Hazard warning lights switched off.▷ Transmission position P is engaged.

Preparing the vehicle▷ Park the vehicle in a safe place off the public

roads.▷ Make sure there is mobile phone reception

so that an error message can be sent if theinstallation is cancelled, for example.

Seite 64

CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade


▷ Close the windows.▷ Close the tailgate.▷ Remove devices that consume energy, for

example mobile telephone.▷ The remote control is in the vehicle to start

the installation.▷ Switch off the exterior lights.Other vehicle-dependent operating requirementsare shown on the Control Display.

Installing an upgrade laterVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Remote software upgrade"5. "Start upgrade now"

Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐play.

Functional limitationsDuring the upgrade, many of the functions aretemporarily unavailable, for example:▷ Hazard warning lights.▷ Central locking system.▷ Side lights.▷ Horn.▷ Alarm system.▷ Emergency call.▷ Power window switches.The driver's door can be unlocked and lockedfrom outside with the integrated key.

MalfunctionIn the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐nected app.If the malfunction cannot be rectified, contact aService Partner of the manufacturer or another

qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Seite 65

BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS


General settingsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

MessagesPrincipleThe menu shows all messages received by thevehicle, centrally in the form of a list.

GeneralThe following messages can be displayed:▷ Traffic messages.▷ Check Control messages.▷ Communication messages, for example e-

mail, SMS or reminders.▷ Service requirement messages.The number of messages is also displayed in thestatus field.The Messages menu can also be created as awidget, see page 54.

Calling up messagesVia iDrive:

1. Tilt the Controller up.2. "Notifications"

3. The associated menu in which the messagesare displayed is opened.

4. Select the required message.

Deleting messagesAll messages which are not Check Control mes‐sages can be deleted from the list. Check Con‐trol messages remain for as long as they are rel‐evant.Via iDrive:

1. Tilt the Controller up.2. "Notifications"3. Select the desired message; for example,

SMS.

4. Press the button.5. "Delete"

SettingsThe following settings can be performed:▷ Select the applications from which messages

are permitted.▷ All messages or a limited period of received

messages.Via iDrive:

1. Tilt the Controller up.2. "Notifications"3. Tilt the Controller right.4. Select the desired setting.

Seite 66

CONTROLS General settings


TimeSetting the time zoneVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Date and time"5. "Time zone:"6. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Setting the timeVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Date and time"5. "Time"6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are

displayed.7. Press the Controller.8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes

are displayed.9. Press the Controller.

Setting the time formatVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Date and time"5. "Time format:"6. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Automatic time settingDepending on the equipment, the time, date and,if necessary, time zone are updated automati‐cally.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Date and time"5. "Automatic time setting"The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

DateSetting the dateVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Date and time"5. "Date:"6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is

displayed.7. Press the Controller.8. Alter the setting for the month and year.

Setting the date formatVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Date and time"5. "Date format:"6. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Seite 67

General settings CONTROLS


LanguageSelecting the languageVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Language:"5. "System language"6. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Setting the speech dialogueSpeech dialogue for the voice control system,see page 59.

Setting units ofmeasurementDepending on the country specifications, it ispossible to select the units of measurement forvarious values, for example consumption, distan‐ces and temperature.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Units"5. Select the desired menu item.6. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Journey data settingsPrincipleThe intervals at which the journey data, seepage 158, is reset can be adjusted.

Resetting journey data1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Reset journey data"5. Select the desired setting.

Speed warningPrincipleA speed limit can be set which triggers a warningwhen it is reached.

GeneralThe warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐ped below 5 km/h/3 mph.

Displaying, setting or altering thespeed warningVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Speed warning"5. "Warning at:"6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is

displayed.7. Press the Controller.

Seite 68



Activating/deactivating thespeed warningVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Speed warning"5. "Speed warning"

Setting the current speed as thespeed warningVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Speed warning"5. "Select current speed"

Driver Attention CameraPrincipleThe instrument cluster contains a camera whichmonitors the driver's activity. The camera evalu‐ates the head position and opening of the eyes inorder to analyse the attentiveness of the driver.This system supports various vehicle assistancesystems.Position in the instrument cluster, see page 146.


1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Driver Attention Camera"5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivatinginformation windowsInformation windows are automatically shown onthe Control Display for some functions. Some ofthese information windows can be activated ordeactivated.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Pop-ups"5. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Activating/deactivatingdisplay of the currentvehicle positionPrincipleIf vehicle tracking is activated, the current vehicleposition can be displayed in the BMW Connec‐ted app or in the ConnectedDrive customer por‐tal.


1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Vehicle tracking"5. Select the desired setting.

Seite 69



Control DisplayBrightnessVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Control display"5. "Brightness at night"6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐

ness is obtained.7. Press the Controller.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.Depending on the lighting conditions, the bright‐ness adjustment may not be immediately appa‐rent.

Data protectionData transferPrincipleThe vehicle offers various services which requiredata to be transferred to BMW or a service pro‐vider. The transfer of data can be deactivated forsome services.

GeneralIf data transfer has been deactivated for a serv‐ice, then that service cannot be used.Only perform settings with the vehicle at a stand‐still.

Activating/deactivating data transferFollow the instructions on the Control Display.

Via iDrive:

1. Switch on standby state.2. "CAR"3. "Settings"4. "General settings"5. "Data privacy"6. "Agree to all and activate"

All data protection-related services and func‐tions are activated or deactivated.

Configuring data transferThe data transfer can be configured separatelyfor individual services.Via iDrive:

1. Switch on standby state.2. "CAR"3. "Settings"4. "General settings"5. "Data privacy"6. "Manual configuration"7. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in thevehiclePrincipleDepending on use, the vehicle stores personaldata such as saved radio stations. This personaldata can be permanently deleted using iDrive.

GeneralDepending on the equipment in your vehicle,data such as the following can be deleted:▷ Driver profile settings.▷ Saved radio stations.▷ Saved Favourites buttons.▷ Trip and on-board computer values.▷ Music hard disc.

Seite 70



▷ Navigation, for example saved destinations.▷ Phone book.▷ Online data, for example Favourites, cookies.▷ Office data, for example voice memos.▷ Login accounts.It can take up to 15 minutes in total to deletedata.

Operating requirementsData can only be deleted with the vehicle at astandstill.

Deleting dataPersonal data in the vehicle is deleted when thevehicle is reset to its factory settings.Reset the vehicle to its factory settings, seepage 78.

Connecting mobile devicesto the vehiclePrincipleVarious connection types are available for usingmobile devices in the vehicle. The connectiontype to select depends on the mobile device andthe desired function.

GeneralThe following overview shows possible functionsand the appropriate connection types for them.The level of functionality depends on the mobiledevice.

Function Connec‐tion type

Making calls using the hands-free system.Operating telephone functionsvia iDrive or touchscreen.Other functions, for examplecontacts or SMS.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from the smart‐phone or the audio player.

Bluetooth orUSB.

Operating compatible apps viaiDrive.

Bluetooth,USB or WiFi.

USB storage medium:Music playback.

USB.

Playing videos from the smart‐phone or the USB device.

USB.

Using the vehicle's Internet ac‐cess.

Internet hot‐spot viaWiFi.

Operate Apple CarPlay apps viaiDrive and by voice commands.

Bluetoothand WiFi.

Screen Mirroring:Showing the smartphone displayon the Control Display.

WiFi.

The following connection types require a one-offregistration process with the vehicle:▷ Bluetooth.▷ Internet hotspot.▷ Apple CarPlay.▷ Screen Mirroring.Registered devices are then automatically recog‐nised and connected to the vehicle.

Seite 71



Safety note

WARNINGOperating integrated information systems andcommunication devices during a journey maydistract you from the traffic. You could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a danger of acci‐dents. Only operate the systems or devices ifpermissible in the traffic situation. Stop if nec‐essary and operate the systems or devices withthe vehicle at a standstill.

Compatible devicesGeneralInformation about mobile devices compatiblewith the vehicle is available at www.bmw.com/bluetooth.Malfunctions may occur when using unlisted de‐vices or different software versions.

Viewing the vehicle identificationnumber and software part numberWhen looking for compatible devices, the vehicleidentification number and software part numbermay have to be stated. These numbers can bedisplayed in the vehicle.Via iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. "Settings"4. "Bluetooth information"5. "System information"

Bluetooth connectionOperating requirements▷ Compatible device, see page 72, with Blue‐

tooth interface.

▷ The remote control or BMW display key is lo‐cated in the vehicle.

▷ The device is operational.▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and

switched on in the vehicle, see page 72.▷ The Control Display indicates that the system

is ready for registration:▷ The device may require certain Bluetooth de‐

fault settings, for example visibility, see theuser manual of the device.

Switching on BluetoothVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. "Settings"4. "Bluetooth"5. Select the setting.

Enabling/disabling telephonefunctionsTo be able to use all supported functions of amobile telephone, the desired functions mayneed to be activated in the vehicle before regis‐tering the mobile telephone with the vehicle.Via iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Personalise menu"3. Select the desired settings, for example "Text

messages".4. Select the desired setting.

Registering the mobile devicewith the vehicleVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. "New device"4. Select functions:

Seite 72



▷ "Phone calls and Bluetooth audio"▷ "Apps"▷ "Apple CarPlay"The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐played in the Control Display.

5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetoothdevices in the vicinity.The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shownon the display of the mobile device.Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

6. A control number is displayed.▷ Compare the control number shown on

the Control Display with the control num‐ber in the device display.Confirm the control number in the deviceand on the Control Display.

The device is connected and displayed in thedevice list, see page 77.

Frequently Asked QuestionsThere may be instances where the mobile de‐vice does not function as expected, even thoughall preconditions have been met and all the nec‐essary steps have been carried out in the correctorder. Nevertheless, the mobile device does notfunction as expected.In such cases, the following explanations mayprovide assistance:Why could the mobile telephone not be paired orconnected?▷ Too many Bluetooth devices are paired to

the mobile telephone or the vehicle.In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connectionswith other devices.Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐vice list on the mobile telephone and start anew device search.Too many Bluetooth devices with the samefunction are registered.

▷ The mobile telephone is in power-save modeor the battery is low.

Charge the mobile telephone and deactivatepower-save mode if necessary.

Why does the mobile telephone no longer re‐spond?▷ The applications on the mobile telephone are

no longer functioning.Switch the mobile telephone off and onagain.

▷ Ambient temperature too high or too low tooperate the mobile telephone.Do not subject the mobile telephone to ex‐treme ambient conditions.

Why can telephone functions not be operated viaiDrive?▷ No telephone functions are configured for the

mobile telephone.Connect the mobile telephone with the tele‐phone function.

Why are no phone book entries, not all entries orincomplete entries displayed?▷ The transfer of the phone book entries is not

yet completed.▷ Under certain circumstances only the phone

book entries saved in the mobile telephone oron the SIM card are transferred.

▷ It is possible that phone book entries withspecial characters cannot be displayed.

▷ It may not be possible to transfer contactsfrom social networks.

▷ The number of phone book entries to betransferred is too high.

▷ The data volume of the contact is too large,for example due to saved information such asmemos.Reduce the data volume of the contact.

▷ A mobile telephone can only be connected asan audio source or as a telephone.Configure the mobile telephone and connectit to the telephone function.

▷ A contact was created in the telephone con‐tact list after the last synchronisation.

Seite 73



Re-synchronise the contacts: "Reloadcontacts"

How can the telephone connection quality beimproved?▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on

the mobile telephone; the procedure variesfrom mobile telephone to mobile telephone.

▷ Insert the mobile telephone in the wirelesscharging dock.

▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐rately in the sound settings.

If all the points on the list have been reviewedand the desired function cannot be performed,contact the Hotline, a Service Partner of themanufacturer or another qualified Service Partneror a specialist workshop.

USB connectionGeneralMobile devices with a USB port are connected tothe USB interface.▷ Mobile telephones.▷ Audio devices, for example MP3 players.▷ USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. For‐mats FAT32 and exFAT are recommended.

The following uses are possible:▷ Playback of music files.▷ Playback of video films.When connecting, bear the following in mind:▷ Do not use force when inserting the plug into

the USB interface.▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.▷ Protect the USB device from mechanical

damage.▷ Due to the large variety of USB devices avail‐

able on the market, operation via the vehiclecannot be ensured for every device.

▷ Do not expose the USB devices to extremeenvironmental conditions, for example veryhigh temperatures, see the operating instruc‐tions of the device.

▷ Due to the large variety of different compres‐sion techniques, correct playback of the me‐dia stored on the USB device cannot beguaranteed in every case.

▷ A connected USB device is supplied withcharging current via the USB interface if thedevice supports this.

▷ To ensure correct transfer of the stored data,do not charge a USB device from the socketin the vehicle when the device is also con‐nected to the USB interface.

▷ Depending on how the USB device is beingused, it may be necessary to perform settingson the USB device, see the operating instruc‐tions of the device.

Unsuitable USB devices:▷ USB hard drives.▷ USB hubs.▷ USB memory card reader with several inserts.▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.

Operating requirementsCompatible device, see page 72, with USB inter‐face.

Connecting a deviceConnect the USB device to a USB interface, seepage 281, using a suitable adapter cable.The USB device is displayed in the device list,see page 77.

Seite 74



Internet connectionPrincipleCompatible devices with a WiFi interface can usethe vehicle's Internet connection via the Internethotspot.

GeneralUp to 10 devices can be connected at the sametime using the Internet hotspot.

Operating requirements▷ Compatible device, see page 72, with WiFi

interface.▷ ConnectedDrive contract.▷ Data contract with a service provider.▷ WiFi activated on the device.▷ Internet hotspot activated on the vehicle.▷ Standby state switched on.

Connecting a device to theInternet hotspotVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. "New device"4. ▷ "Internet"

▷ "via Internet hotspot"5. The hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐

played on the Control Display. A QR code isalso displayed.

6. On the device, search for WiFi networks. Se‐lect the network name on the device.

7. Enter the hotspot code on the device andconnect. Alternatively, use the QR code.

The device is displayed in the device list, seepage 77.

A data volume may need to be purchased from aservice provider when you first connect to the In‐ternet via the Internet hotspot.Data volumes can be purchased via the connec‐ted mobile telephone or the ConnectedDriveStore, depending on the country version.This data volume is used by all devices connec‐ted via the Internet hotspot.

Apple CarPlay preparationPrincipleCarPlay makes it possible to operate certainfunctions of a compatible Apple iPhone by Sirivoice operation and using iDrive.

Operating requirements▷ Compatible iPhone, see page 72.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.▷ Corresponding mobile radio contract.▷ Bluetooth, WiFi and Siri voice operation are

activated on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth andCarPlayVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. "Settings"4. Set the following setting:

"Apple CarPlay"5. Activate the function.

Registering iPhone with CarPlayRegister iPhone via Bluetooth on the vehicle, seepage 72.

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"

Seite 75



3. "New device"4. Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐played in the device list, see page 77.

OperationFor further information, see the integrated Own‐er's Handbook in the vehicle or the printed Own‐er's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment andCommunication.

Frequently Asked QuestionsThere may be instances where the mobile de‐vice does not function as expected, even thoughall preconditions have been met and all the nec‐essary steps have been carried out in the correctorder. Nevertheless, the mobile device does notfunction as expected.In such cases, the following explanations mayprovide assistance:The iPhone has already been paired with AppleCarPlay. When a new connection is established,CarPlay can no longer be selected.▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device

list.▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned

from the list of saved connections underBluetooth and under WiFi.

▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.If the steps listed have been carried out and thedesired function still cannot be run: contact thehotline, a Service Partner of the manufacturer oranother qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Screen MirroringGeneralScreen Mirroring enables you to display yoursmartphone screen on the Control Display.

Operating requirements▷ Compatible smartphone, see page 72, with

Screen Mirroring interface.▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on in the smart‐

phone.▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.

Switching on WiFiVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Settings"5. "WiFi"

Registering the smartphone withScreen MirroringVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Mobile devices"5. "New device"6. "Screen Mirroring"

The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed inthe Control Display.

7. On the smartphone, search for WiFi devicesin the vicinity.The WiFi name of the vehicle is shown on thedisplay of the device. Select the WiFi name ofthe vehicle.

8. Confirm the connection via iDrive.The device is connected and displayed in thedevice list, see page 77.

Seite 76



Managing mobile devicesGeneral▷ Following one-off registration, the devices are

automatically detected and connected againwhen the standby state is switched on.

▷ The data saved on the SIM card or in the mo‐bile telephone – for example, contacts – istransferred to the vehicle following detectionand can be used via iDrive.

▷ Some devices may require particular settings,for example authorisation; see the user man‐ual of the device.

Displaying the device listAll devices registered or connected to the vehi‐cle are displayed in the device list.A maximum of 4 devices can be connected tothe vehicle via Bluetooth and 10 devices via WiFi.A maximum of 20 devices can be detected.Via iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"A symbol indicates which function a device isused for. If the symbol is shown in white, there isan active connection to the vehicle with thisfunction. The symbol is shown in grey when thedevice function is inactive.

Symbol FunctionTelephone.

Bluetooth audio.

Apps.

Internet hotspot.

Apple CarPlay.

Screen Mirroring.

Configuring the deviceFunctions can be activated or deactivated on aregistered or connected device.Via iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. Select the required device.4. Select the desired setting.If a function is assigned to a device but it is al‐ready activated on another connected device, itis transferred to the new device and the previousdevice is disconnected. Observe the informationon the Control Display.

Disconnecting a deviceVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. Select a device.4. "Disconnect device"The device remains registered and can be con‐nected again, see page 77.

Connecting a deviceA disconnected device can be reconnected.Via iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. Select a device.4. "Connect device"Functions assigned to the device before discon‐nection are reassigned to the device upon recon‐nection. If applicable, these functions are deacti‐vated for an already connected device.

Seite 77



Deleting a deviceVia iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "Mobile devices"3. Select a device.4. "Delete device"The device is disconnected and deleted from thedevice list.

Telephone priorityIf two mobile telephones are connected to thevehicle, it is possible to define reconnection pri‐orities for them.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Mobile devices"5. "Settings"6. "Priorities for telephony"7. Select the required device.8. Turn the Controller to set the priority for the

selected mobile telephone.9. Press the Controller.

Resetting the vehicleconfigurationAll individual settings can be reset to the factorysettings when the drive-ready state is switchedoff.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Reset vehicle data"5. "Reset vehicle data"

If the settings saved in a driver profile aresynchronised with a ConnectedDrive account,these settings will be retained in the Connected‐Drive account.

Seite 78



Opening and closingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Remote controlGeneralDepending on the equipment, two remote con‐trols or one remote control and the BMW displaykey, see page 83, are supplied.Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐tery. Replacing the battery, see page 82.The button functions can be assigned, depend‐ing on the equipment and the country specifica‐tions. For settings, see page 103.A driver profile, see page 98, with personalisedsettings can be assigned to a remote control.The remote controls store servicing information.Service data in the remote control, seepage 344.To prevent the remote control from being lockedin, take it with you whenever you leave the vehi‐cle.

Safety notes

WARNINGPersons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐side can lock the doors from the inside and lockthemselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannotbe opened from the outside. There is a dangerof injury. Carry the remote control with you sothat you can open the vehicle from the outside.

WARNINGWith some country specifications, unlockingfrom the inside is only possible with specialknowledge.There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐sons remain in the vehicle for extended periodsand are exposed to extreme temperatures as aresult. Do not lock the vehicle from the outsidewhen there is someone inside it.



Seite 79

Opening and closing CONTROLS


Overview

1 Unlocking2 Locking3 To open/close boot lid4 Headlight courtesy delay feature

UnlockingGeneralThe behaviour of the vehicle when unlocked withthe remote control depends on the following set‐tings, see page 103, for locking and unlocking:▷ Whether only the driver's door and the fuel

filler flap or all vehicle access points are un‐locked when the button is first pressed.

▷ Whether the unlocking of the vehicle is ac‐knowledged with a light signal or an acousticsignal.

▷ Whether the welcome light, see page 165, isswitched on when the vehicle is unlocked.

▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automaticallyfolded out and in when the vehicle is un‐locked and locked.Exterior mirrors folded in using comfort clos‐ing must be folded out using comfort open‐ing.

▷ Whether the window can be lowered furtherto make it easier to get in.

Unlocking the vehiclePress the button on the remote control.

If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flaphave been unlocked due to the settings, pressthe button on the remote control again to unlockthe other vehicle access points.The following functions are also carried out:▷ If a driver profile, see page 98, has been as‐

signed to the remote control, this driver pro‐file is activated and the settings saved in it areconfigured.

▷ The interior light is switched on unless it wasswitched off manually. Switching the interiorlight on/off manually, see page 169.

▷ With anti-theft system: The anti-theft systemis switched off.

▷ The alarm system, see page 105, is switchedoff.

Press remote control button twice in di‐rect succession to activate comfort

memory.Depending on the settings, the window is low‐ered further when opening a door.

The vehicle is operational, see page 48, after oneof the front doors is opened.The light functions might be dependent on theambient brightness.

Comfort openingKeep the button on the remote controlpressed after unlocking.

The windows are opened for as long as the but‐ton on the remote control is pressed.Exterior mirrors which were folded in via thecomfort closing feature are folded out.

LockingGeneralThe behaviour of the vehicle in the case of re‐mote control locking depends on the followingsettings, see page 103:

Seite 80

CONTROLS Opening and closing


▷ Whether locking of the vehicle is acknowl‐edged with a light signal or an acoustic signal.

▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automaticallyfolded in and out when the vehicle is locked/unlocked.

▷ Whether the headlight courtesy delay feature,see page 165, is activated when the vehicleis locked.

Locking the vehicle1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the remote control.Following functions are carried out:▷ All the doors, the boot lid and fuel filler flap

are locked.▷ With anti-theft system: The anti-theft system

is switched on. This prevents the doors frombeing unlocked using the locking buttons orthe door openers.

▷ The alarm system, see page 105, is switchedon.

If the drive-ready state is still switched on whenlocking, the vehicle horn sounds twice. In thiscase, switch off the drive-ready state using start/stop button.

Comfort closingSafety note

WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenthe comfort closing feature is operated. Thereis a danger of injury. During comfort closing,make sure that the area of movement is keptclear.

ClosingKeep the button on the remote controlpressed after locking.

The windows are closed for as long as the but‐ton on the remote control is pressed.The exterior mirrors are folded in.If the hazard warning lights are switched on, theexterior mirrors are not folded in.

Switching on the interior lightand exterior lights

With the vehicle locked, press the buttonon the remote control.

The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐onds after locking.▷ The interior light is switched on unless it was

switched off manually. Switching the interiorlight on/off manually, see page 169.

▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior lights,see page 165, are switched on.

The light functions might be dependent on theambient brightness.

Boot lidGeneralTo prevent the remote control from being lockedin, do not place the remote control in the boot.It is possible to set whether the doors are un‐locked when the tailgate is opened with the re‐mote control. For settings, see page 103.

Safety notes

WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenthe boot lid is operated. There is a danger of in‐jury. When opening and closing, make sure thatthe area of movement of the boot lid is keptclear.

Seite 81



NOTEThe boot lid swings rearwards and upwardswhen opened. There is a danger of damage toproperty. When opening and closing, makesure that the area of movement of the boot lidis kept clear.

OpeningPress and hold the button on the re‐mote control for approximately 1 sec‐

ond.

On some equipment versions, the doors are alsounlocked each time.

ClosingPress and hold the button on the re‐mote control.

Releasing the button stops the movement.If the doors were not unlocked, the boot lid islocked again as soon as it is closed.

Switching on the headlightcourtesy delay feature

Press the button on the remote control.

Setting the duration, see page 165.

Replacing the battery1. Remove the integrated key from the remote

control, see page 88.2. Place integrated key under the battery com‐

partment cover, arrow 1, and pry off the cover

with a lever motion of the integrated key, ar‐row 2.

3. Use a pointed object to push the battery inthe direction of the arrow and lift it out.

4. Insert a new type CR 2032 battery with thepositive side facing upwards.

5. Press the cover back into position.Dispose of old batteries at a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist

workshop or hand them into an authorised col‐lecting point.

Additional remote controlsAdditional remote controls are available from aService Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Loss of remote controlsA lost remote control can be blocked and re‐placed by a Service Partner of the manufactureror another qualified Service Partner or a special‐ist workshop.

Seite 82



If a driver profile, see page 98, has been as‐signed to the lost remote control, the connectionto this remote control must be removed. A newremote control can then be assigned to thedriver profile.

MalfunctionGeneralA Check Control message, see page 148, isshown.It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the re‐mote control in some conditions, including thefollowing:▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐

charged. Replacing the battery, see page 82.▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission

masts or other equipment transmitting pow‐erful signals.

▷ Shielding of the remote control by metallicobjects.Do not transport the remote control togetherwith metallic objects.

▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐phones or other electronic devices in the im‐mediate vicinity of the remote control.Do not transport the remote control togetherwith electronic devices.

▷ Interference with the radio transmissioncaused by the charging of mobile devices, forexample a mobile phone.

▷ The remote control is located in the immedi‐ate vicinity of the wireless charging dock.Place the remote control somewhere else.

If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be un‐locked and locked from the outside with theintegrated key, see page 87.

Switching on drive-ready state viathe remote control special ID feature

The drive-ready state cannot be switched on ifthe remote control has not been detected.If this happens, proceed as follows:

1. Hold the back of the remote control againstthe mark on the steering column. Pay atten‐tion to the display in the instrument cluster.

2. If the remote control is detected:Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐onds.

If the remote control is not detected, change theposition of the remote control slightly and repeatthe procedure.

BMW display keyGeneralThe BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐tional mechanical key. When using the displaykey, you should also carry the mechanical key,for example in your wallet or purse. The mechan‐ical key is used in the same way as theintegrated key, see page 87.The display key supports all functions of thestandard remote control.The following functions are also available:▷ Call up status of doors and windows.▷ Call up status of the anti-theft alarm.▷ Call up service information.▷ Call up range with the available fuel.

Seite 83



▷ With auxiliary heating: operate auxiliary heat‐ing.Without auxiliary heating: operate independ‐ent ventilation.

Safety notes

WARNINGPersons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐side can lock the doors from the inside and lockthemselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannotbe opened from the outside. There is a dangerof injury. Carry the remote control with you sothat you can open the vehicle from the outside.




Overview

1 Opening/closing the boot2 Unlocking3 Headlight courtesy delay feature4 Locking5 Display6 Back7 Switch display on/off8 Micro-USB charge point

Reception rangeNumber of available functions of the display keydepends on distance to vehicle.▷ In close reception range, all functions of the

display key are available.▷ In the extended reception range, the status

information can be called up.With auxiliary heating: auxiliary heating can beoperated.Without auxiliary heating: independent venti‐lation can be operated.

▷ Outside reception range, it is possible to dis‐play last status information transmitted fromvehicle.

Symbol is shown on the display if one of thebuttons is pressed outside the reception range.

Seite 84



DisplayGeneralDisplay is divided into the status bar at top, infor‐mation area and status bar at bottom.

Upper status barStatus bar at top shows following information:▷ Vehicle locked.

Vehicle unlocked.▷ Time set in vehicle.▷ State of charge of the battery of the dis‐

play key.

Information areaIn the information area, the information can becalled up and the additional functions carried out.If information area contains more than one page,page indicators are displayed under information.

Indicator for current side is filled in.Swipe to the left or right to switch between thesides.If further information can be accessed on a page,tap on the corresponding symbol.

Tap symbol below the display to return to thehigher-level page.

Lower status barThe lower status bar shows whether the displaykey is within the reception range, see page 84.▷ "Connected": the display key is located in the

reception range.▷ "Updated": the display key is located outside

of the reception range. It indicates when thelast data transfer from the vehicle took place.

Switching off/onThe content of the display is hidden automati‐cally after a brief time to reduce battery powerconsumption.

Hide the information shown on the display man‐ually:Press the button on the left of the display key.Overview, see page 84.Show content on the display:

1. Press the button on the left of the displaykey.

2. Next, swipe your finger from the bottom tothe top to cancel the screen lock.

Switch off the display to increase the battery life:

1. Unlock the screen if necessary.2. Press and hold the button on the left side of

the display key for longer than 4 seconds.3. "OK"Switch on the display:Press the button on the left of the display key.

Operating principleIt is possible to access each sub-menu from thefollowing main menus:

Main menu Information/function"Securityinformation"

/ Status of the doors.Status of the alarm system.After alarm triggering: date,time and reason for the alarmtriggering.

Status of the windows.

"Vehicleinformation"

Maintenance displays of theCondition Based Service CBS,see page 344.Status of the parking lights.

Seite 85



Main menu Information/function"Rangeinformation"

Range with the available fuel.

"Precondit.setting"

With auxiliary heating: operateauxiliary heating, seepage 270.Without auxiliary heating: oper‐ate independent ventilation,see page 270.

Battery of the display keyGeneralComply with the following notes:▷ If the charge state of the display key battery

decreases, the display is automaticallyswitched off. The battery must be charged sothe display can be switched on again. Func‐tional capability of standard buttons is re‐tained until the battery is completely flat.

▷ Charge the battery for at least three hoursbefore using the display key for the first timeor if the key has not been used for an exten‐ded period.

▷ The display key can be used during chargingvia the USB port. If the battery is fully dis‐charged, it can take some time before thedisplay key can be used again.

▷ Due to the large variety of USB devices avail‐able on the market, operation via the vehiclecannot be ensured for every charger. Thecharging time depends on the charger used.

▷ Charging via the USB port can cause thecharger and the display key to heat up.Charging in the wireless charging dock cancause the dock and the display key to heatup.At higher temperatures, a reduction in thecharging current can occur due to the displaykey; in exceptional cases, the charging proc‐ess is temporarily interrupted.

▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐less charging dock, make sure there are noobjects between it and the wireless chargingdock.

Safety note

WARNINGWhen charging a Qi-compatible device in thewireless charging dock, any metal objects loca‐ted between the device and the dock can be‐come very hot. If smart cards, memory cards orcards with magnetic strips are placed betweenthe device and the dock, this may impair cardfunction. There is a danger of injury and dam‐age to property. When charging mobile devi‐ces, make sure there are no objects betweenthe device and the dock.

Charging

Via USBConnect the display key to a USB port using themicro-USB charging connection.

In the wireless charging dock

1. Open the cover of the dock.2. Place the display key in the middle of the

wireless charging dock in front of the cuphol‐der.Make sure that the display is pointing up‐wards.

3. Close the cover of the dock.

Seite 86



MalfunctionGeneralA Check Control message is shown.Detection of the BMW display key by the vehiclemay be disrupted by the following circumstan‐ces, amongst others:▷ The battery of the display key is flat. Re‐

charging the battery, see page 86.▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission


▷ Shielding of the display key by metallic ob‐jects.

▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐phones or other electronic devices in the im‐mediate vicinity.

▷ Interference with the radio transmissioncaused by the charging of mobile devices, forexample a mobile phone.

Do not transport the display key together withmetallic objects or electronic devices.If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be un‐locked and locked from the outside with the me‐chanical key.

Switching on drive-ready state byspecial ID of the BMW display key

The drive-ready state cannot be switched on ifthe display key has not been detected.

If this happens, proceed as follows:

1. Hold the back of the display key against themark on the steering column. Pay attention tothe display in the instrument cluster.

2. If the display key is detected:Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐onds.

If the display key is not detected, change the po‐sition of the display key slightly and repeat theprocedure.

Resetting the BMW display keyIf the charged display key can no longer beswitched on, or the display no longer responds toinputs, the display key can be reset.Press and hold the button on the left of the dis‐play key for at least 20 seconds until somethingis shown on the display.

Integrated keyGeneralWith the integrated key, the driver's door can beunlocked and locked without the remote control.The integrated key also fits in the glove box.Use the integrated key to operate the key switchfor front passenger airbags, see page 174.

Safety notes


Seite 87



NOTEThe door lock is firmly connected to the door.The door handle can be moved. Pulling thedoor handle when the integrated key is insertedcan damage the paint or the integrated key.There is a danger of damage to property. Pullout the integrated key before pulling on theouter door handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out theintegrated key, arrow 2.

Unlocking/locking using the doorlock1. Pull the door handle outwards with one hand

and hold it.

2. Slide one finger of your other hand under thecover from behind and, when you feel the un‐locking mechanism there, push it outwards.

3. Use the thumb of the hand on the door han‐dle to push the cover towards the rear of thevehicle.

4. Remove the cover.5. Unlock or lock the door lock with the

integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or lockedfrom the inside.

Seite 88



Alarm systemThe alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐cle is locked with the integrated key.The alarm system is triggered when the door isopened after being unlocked via the door lock.To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the re‐mote control, if necessary using the special IDfeature of the remote control, see page 83.

Central locking buttonsGeneralIn the event of an accident of sufficient severity,the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazardwarning lights and interior lights illuminate.

Overview

Central locking buttons.

LockingPress the button with the front doorsclosed.

▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.▷ Locking does not activate the vehicle's anti-

theft protection system.

UnlockingPress the button.

Opening▷ Press the button to unlock all the

doors together.Pull the door opener above the armrest.

▷ Turn the door opener on the door to beopened. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort AccessPrincipleThis feature allows you to access the vehiclewithout having to operate the remote control.Simply having the remote control with you, forexample in your trouser pocket, is sufficient.The vehicle automatically recognises the remotecontrol when it is in the immediate vicinity or in‐side the vehicle.

GeneralComfort Access supports the following func‐tions:▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the

door handle.▷ Comfort closing.▷ Contactless vehicle unlocking and locking.▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the

BMW Digital Key.▷ Opening the boot lid.▷ Contactless opening and closing of the boot

lid.

Operating requirements▷ To lock, the remote control must be located

outside the vehicle in the vicinity of the doors.▷ The vehicle can only be unlocked and locked

again after approximately 2 seconds.

Seite 89



UnlockingGeneralThe behaviour of the vehicle when unlocked viaComfort Access depends on the following set‐tings, see page 103:▷ Whether the unlocking of the vehicle is ac‐

knowledged with a light signal or an acousticsignal.


▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automaticallyfolded out and in when the vehicle is un‐locked and locked.Exterior mirrors folded in using comfort clos‐ing must be folded out using comfort open‐ing.

Unlocking the vehicle

Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door.

This corresponds to pressing the button onthe remote control.

LockingGeneralThe behaviour of the vehicle when locked viaComfort Access depends on the following set‐tings, see page 103:▷ Whether the locking of the vehicle is ac‐

knowledged with a light signal or an acousticsignal.

▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automaticallyfolded out and in when the vehicle is un‐locked and locked.


Locking the vehicleClose the driver's door.

With your finger, touch the grooved area on thehandle of a closed vehicle door for approximately1 second, without gripping the door handle.

This corresponds to pressing the button onthe remote control.

Comfort closingSafety note

WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenthe comfort closing feature is operated. Thereis a danger of injury. During comfort closing,make sure that the area of movement is keptclear.

Seite 90



Closing

With your finger, touch the knurled area on thehandle of a closed vehicle door and keep yourfinger there without gripping the door handle.This corresponds to pressing and holding the

button on the remote control.

In addition to locking, the windows are closedand the exterior mirrors are folded in.

Opening the boot lidGeneralIf the boot lid is opened using Comfort Access,locked doors are not unlocked.To prevent the remote control from being lockedin, do not place the remote control in the boot.

Safety notes



Opening

Press the button on the outside of the boot lid.

Contactless opening and closingof the boot lidPrincipleThe boot lid can be opened and closed contact‐lessly, provided you are carrying the remote con‐trol with you. Two sensors detect a directed footmovement in the central rear area and the bootlid is opened or closed.

GeneralTo prevent the remote control from being lockedin, do not place the remote control in the boot.If the remote control is within the sensor range,the boot lid can be accidentally opened or closedby an unintentional or presumed foot movement.The sensor range extends to approximately1.50 m, 5 ft behind the rear area.If the boot lid is opened with a contactlessmethod, locked doors are not unlocked.

Seite 91



Safety notes

WARNINGWhen operating the boot lid contactlessly,there is a risk of touching vehicle parts, for ex‐ample the hot exhaust system. There is a dan‐ger of injury. Make sure you are standing se‐curely when you perform the foot movement,and do not touch the vehicle.



Correct foot movement1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap‐

proximately an arm's length away from therear of the vehicle.

2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as farunder the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ately pull it back again. When performing this

movement, the leg must pass through therange of both sensors.

OpeningPerform the foot movement described previ‐ously.The hazard warning lights flash before the bootlid opens.Moving your foot again will stop the opening op‐eration, and moving it one more time after thatwill close the boot lid again.

ClosingPerform the foot movement described previ‐ously.The hazard warning lights flash and an acousticsignal sounds.Moving your foot again will stop the closing oper‐ation, and moving it one more time after that willopen the boot lid again.

Contactless vehicle unlockingand lockingPrincipleThe vehicle is unlocked automatically when thedriver approaches the vehicle with the remotecontrol.If the driver moves away from the unlocked vehi‐cle with the remote control, the vehicle is lockedautomatically.

Seite 92



GeneralThe behaviour of the vehicle in the case of con‐tactless locking and unlocking depends on thefollowing settings, see page 103:▷ Whether automatic unlocking is active.▷ Whether automatic locking is active.▷ Whether only the driver's door and the fuel

filler flap or all vehicle access points are un‐locked.Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: driver'sdoor and fuel filler flap are only unlockedwhen the driver approaches the vehicle onthe driver's side.All vehicle access points: the vehicle is un‐locked regardless of which side the driver ap‐proaches the vehicle from.

▷ Whether the locking and unlocking of the ve‐hicle is acknowledged with a light signal or anacoustic signal.



▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automaticallyfolded out and in when the vehicle is un‐locked and locked.

If the vehicle is unlocked and opened with the re‐mote control without starting the engine, it can‐not then be locked using contactless locking.If there is a second remote control inside the ve‐hicle during the locking process, it is ignored andthe vehicle is locked.If the remote control remains within the unlock‐ing zone without moving for a prolonged periodof time, the vehicle is locked automatically.

Operating requirements▷ Contactless unlocking of the vehicle can be

used within a radius of approx. 1 m, 3 ftaround the door handles.

▷ The drive-ready state must be switched off inorder to use contactless vehicle locking.

▷ All vehicle doors must be closed in order touse contactless vehicle locking.

▷ The system must not detect anyone sittingon the front passenger seat and the passen‐ger seat belt must not be inserted in the beltbuckle in order to use contactless vehiclelocking.

▷ There must not be a second remote controlwithin the locking zone in order to use con‐tactless vehicle locking.

▷ Contactless locking and the anti-theft alarmsystem are only activated when the driverleaves a radius of approx. 2 m, 7 ft around thedoor handles with the remote control.

BMW Digital KeyPrincipleBMW Digital Key allows you to use a compatiblesmartphone, see page 71, to lock, unlock andstart the vehicle.

GeneralBMW Digital Key is country-specific and may beunavailable.To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatiblesmartphone, a digital key must be installed onthe smartphone. Digital keys are installed, man‐aged and passed on via the BMW Connectedapp.A driver profile, see page 98, with individualsettings can be assigned to a digital key.When using a digital key, always have a remotecontrol about your person too, so the vehicle canstill be accessed even if your smartphone is notworking. It is also useful to have the remote con‐trol about your person if the vehicle has to behanded over to another person or a service de‐partment. You can then hand over the remotecontrol, instead of your smartphone.

Seite 93



Connection to the vehicleCommunication between the vehicle and thesmartphone takes place via near field communi‐cation, NFC.The vehicle is unlocked via the outer door handleon the driver's side. To register a digital key andto start the engine, the smartphone must beplaced in the smartphone dock.A digital key is detected by the vehicle even ifthe smartphone is switched off.

Operating requirements▷ The BMW Connected app is installed on a

compatible smartphone.▷ The smartphone battery is sufficiently

charged. The minimum battery charge re‐quired depends on the smartphone in ques‐tion.

▷ A digital key for the vehicle is installed on thesmartphone.

▷ BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle.

Activating BMW Digital KeyThe vehicle owner must provide the ServicePartner with evidence of his/her authorisation forthe vehicle in order to use BMW Digital Key.The vehicle owner sets a Digital Key Code withthe Service Partner so that other digital keys canbe enabled at a later date.

Acquiring digital keysAn initial digital key is provided in the BMW Con‐nected app when the vehicle is purchased.Additional digital keys can be acquired via theBMW ConnectedDrive Store. Acquiring digitalkeys may incur costs.Digital keys have limited validity periods. The ex‐piry date can be checked in the BMW Connec‐ted app and in the vehicle.If a digital key has expired, it can only still be usedto unlock and lock the vehicle for a limited time.

Corresponding messages are shown on theControl Display.

Passing on digital keysThe vehicle owner can pass a digital key forhis/her vehicle on to another person via the BMWConnected app.When a digital key is passed on, a TAN transac‐tion number is generated. Using this TAN andthe Digital Key Code, another person can regis‐ter the digital key in the vehicle. This means thedriver can let someone else use the vehicle with‐out having to be in the vicinity of the vehiclethemselves.The TAN and the Digital Key Code should onlybe passed on in person or via telephone.The digital key that has been passed on can beremoved at any time in the vehicle or via theBMW Connected app.If a digital key has been removed via the BMWConnected app, it can only still be used to unlockand lock the vehicle for a limited time. Corre‐sponding messages are shown on the ControlDisplay.As soon as the vehicle is used with a differentdigital key or a remote control, the removed digi‐tal key can no longer be used.

Registering digital keys in thevehicleIn order to register a digital key, there must be aremote control in the vehicle or an active digitalkey belonging to the vehicle owner in the smart‐phone dock.If the digital key has been passed on by the vehi‐cle owner, it may not be possible to meet this re‐quirement. In this case, the Digital Key Code andthe TAN must be entered. The digital key thathas been passed on can be used to unlock thevehicle even before it has been registered.Place the smartphone with the digital key to beregistered in the smartphone dock.

Seite 94



Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "BMW Digital Key"5. "Add new digital key"6. Enter the Digital Key Code and the TAN if ap‐

plicable.Once the digital key has been registered, itsname appears in the list of digital keys.

Activating/deactivating digital keysin the vehicleA digital key can be temporarily deactivated.In order to activate and deactivate a digital key,there must be a remote control in the vehicle oran active digital key belonging to the vehicleowner in the smartphone dock.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "BMW Digital Key"5. Select the desired digital key.6. "Digital key active."A deactivated digital key will remain in the list ofregistered digital keys.

Removing digital keys in the vehicleIn order to remove a digital key, there must be aremote control in the vehicle or another activedigital key belonging to the vehicle owner in thesmartphone dock. To remove all digital keys,there must be a remote control in the vehicle.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "BMW Digital Key"

5. Select a digital key if applicable.6. ▷ "Remove digital key"

The digital key is removed from the list ofregistered digital keys.

▷ "Remove all digital keys"

Resetting BMW Digital KeyTo reset BMW Digital Key, there must be an au‐thorised remote control in the vehicle.Following the reset, it will no longer be possibleto lock, unlock or start the vehicle with a digitalkey.The vehicle owner must provide the ServicePartner with evidence of his/her authorisation forthe vehicle in order to use BMW Digital Keyagain.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "BMW Digital Key"5. "Reset function"

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

Hold the smartphone up against the outer handleon the driver's door.

Seite 95



Starting the engine

1. Open the cover of the smartphone dock.2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the

smartphone dock in front of the cupholders.3. Once the digital key has been detected as an

authorised key, the engine can be started.

Selling the smartphone/vehicleIf a smartphone with a digital key is to be sold, alldigital keys should be deleted from the smart‐phone.If a vehicle is to be sold, BMW Digital Key shouldbe reset in the vehicle. The new vehicle ownershould make sure that BMW Digital Key hasbeen reset. This ensures that the previous ownerno longer has access to the vehicle.

MalfunctionIt may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the re‐mote control in some conditions, including thefollowing:▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐

charged. Replacing the battery, see page 82.▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission


▷ Shielding of the remote control by metallicobjects.Do not transport the remote control togetherwith metallic objects.

▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐phones or other electronic devices in the im‐mediate vicinity of the remote control.

Do not transport the remote control togetherwith electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lockingrequest recognition function on the door han‐dles.If a fault occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle withthe buttons on the remote control or with theintegrated key, see page 87.

Boot lidGeneralTo prevent the remote control from being lockedin, do not place the remote control in the boot.Depending on the equipment and the countryspecifications, it is possible to select whether thedoors are also unlocked. Adjusting the settings,see page 103.The boot lid cannot open when the vehicle is inparking service mode, see page 102.

Safety notes



Seite 96



Opening and closingOpening

From outside

▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle,then press the button on the outside of theboot lid.With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle orhave the remote control about your person,then press the button on the outside of theboot lid.

▷ Press and hold the button on the re‐mote control for approximately

1 second.

From insidePress the button in the driver's door stor‐age compartment.

Cancelling the opening operationThe opening procedure is interrupted:▷ If the vehicle begins to move.▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the

boot lid. Pressing the button again closes theboot lid.

▷ By pressing the button on the inside of theboot lid. Pressing the button again closes theboot lid.

▷ By pressing the button on the remote control.Pressing the button again resumes the open‐ing operation.

Pressing and holding the button closes theboot lid again.

▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐er's door. Pressing the button again resumesthe opening operation.

Closing

From outsidePress and hold the button on the re‐mote control.

Without Comfort Access:Press the button on the inside of theboot lid.

With Comfort Access:

▷ Press the button on the inside of theboot lid.

▷ Press the button.The vehicle is locked after the boot lid hasbeen closed. To do this, the driver's doormust be closed and the remote control mustbe outside the vehicle in the vicinity of theboot lid.

From insidePull and hold the button in the driver's doorstorage compartment.

For this function, the remote control must be in‐side the vehicle.

Cancelling the closing operationThe closing procedure is interrupted in thefollowing situations:▷ When driving off suddenly.▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the

boot lid. Pressing the button again re-opensthe boot lid.

Seite 97



▷ By pressing the button on the inside of theboot lid. Pressing the button again re-opensthe boot lid.

▷ By releasing the button on the remote con‐trol. Pressing the button again and holding itdown resumes the closing operation.

▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.Pulling the button again and holding it in thisposition resumes the closing operation.

MalfunctionIn the event of an electrical fault, manually oper‐ate the unlocked boot lid slowly, avoiding jerkymovements.

Boot lid emergency release

Pull the handle in the boot.

This will unlock the boot lid.

Soft Close AutomaticSafety note

WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenthe doors are operated. There is a danger of in‐jury. When opening and closing, make sure thatthe area of movement of the doors is keptclear.

ClosingTo close, push the door gently.The closing operation is then performed auto‐matically.

Driver profilesPrincipleDriver profiles can be created in order to storepersonalised vehicle settings. If multiple driversuse a vehicle, each driver can create a personal‐ised driver profile. If a driver profile is selected,the vehicle automatically adopts the settingsstored in the driver profile.

GeneralYou can create three personal driver profiles.Each driver profile can be protected via a PIN sothat other drivers cannot see or change thesaved settings.There is also a guest profile available which canbe selected by any driver. The guest profile is ac‐tive if no personal driver profile has been selec‐ted.Changes to the vehicle settings are saved auto‐matically in the active driver profile or in the guestprofile.Recognition via a remote control and a digitalkey, see page 93, can be assigned to a driverprofile so that the vehicle settings are adjusted tothe relevant driver as soon as the vehicle is un‐locked. As soon as the remote control or the dig‐ital key is detected by the vehicle, the relevantdriver profile is activated.ConnectedDrive countries: The settings saved inthe driver profile can be synchronised with thepersonal BMW ConnectedDrive account. Thismakes it possible to use these settings in otherBMW vehicles as well.

Seite 98



Operating requirementsIf you change to a different driver profile, the ve‐hicle cannot move at any more than walkingspeed.

Welcome screenThe welcome screen is shown once the ControlDisplay is switched on.The following actions can be performed on thewelcome screen:▷ Select a driver profile.▷ Call up the settings menu for driver profiles.▷ Start the setup assistant.

This option is offered for a limited time in newvehicles.

As soon as the engine is started or any button ispressed, the welcome screen disappears.

Setup assistantThe setup assistant is offered on the welcomescreen in new vehicles for a limited time in orderto define the key features of a new driver profile.The driver is guided through the following func‐tions step by step:▷ Set the system language.▷ Register mobile devices with the vehicle.▷ Non-ConnectedDrive countries: Assign pro‐

file names.▷ ConnectedDrive countries:

Enable continuous synchronisation betweenthe ConnectedDrive account and the driverprofile.Settings saved in the ConnectedDrive ac‐count are transferred to the vehicle. If thedriver has not yet created a ConnectedDriveaccount, one must be created in the Connec‐tedDrive portal.

▷ Confirm the declaration regarding the transferof vehicle data.

▷ Define the voice command used to start thevoice control.

▷ Switch on Gesture Control.

Guest profileThe guest profile can be activated by any driver.Vehicle settings that are made when the guestprofile is active are saved in the guest profile.The guest profile is automatically active in thefollowing cases:▷ No driver profiles have been created yet.▷ No driver profile is assigned to the remote

control used to unlock the vehicle.▷ No driver profile is assigned to the digital key

used to unlock the vehicle.▷ It is not possible to clearly identify which

driver profile should be activated.The following restrictions apply:▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.▷ Recognition cannot be assigned to the guest

profile.▷ PIN protection is not possible.▷ ConnectedDrive countries: Synchronisation

with a ConnectedDrive account is not possi‐ble.

The guest profile is selected on the welcomescreen or via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"3. "Guest"4. "Sign in"

Creating a driver profileDriver profiles are created on the welcomescreen or via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"3. "Create driver profile"ConnectedDrive countries: A ConnectedDriveaccount must be assigned to a driver profile. Youcan use an existing account or create a new ac‐count if necessary.

Seite 99



Selecting recognitionThe recognition setting is made on the welcomescreen or via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"3. "Driver recognition"4. Select the desired setting:

▷ "with vehicle key"A remote control is assigned to the driverprofile. As soon as the remote control isdetected by the vehicle, the relevantdriver profile is activated.If the driver does not have the remotecontrol with them or the remote control isnot detected, the driver profile can only beselected on the welcome screen if PINprotection has been set up.

▷ "with BMW Digital Key"A digital key is assigned to the driver pro‐file. As soon as the digital key is detectedby the vehicle, the relevant driver profile isactivated.If the driver does not have the smart‐phone with the digital key with them orthe digital key is not detected, the driverprofile can only be selected on the wel‐come screen if PIN protection has beenset up.

5. "Activate linkage"

Setting up PIN protectionA driver profile without recognition and withoutPIN protection can be activated and changed byany driver.A driver profile with recognition cannot be activa‐ted without a remote control and without a digitalkey if PIN protection has not been set up.Non-ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protectionhas not been set up or the PIN is not known, thedriver profile cannot be activated.

ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection hasnot been set up or the PIN is not known, thedriver profile can be activated with the login de‐tails for the relevant ConnectedDrive account.Setup is carried out on the welcome screen orvia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"3. "Driver recognition"4. "using PIN"

Changing/cancelling recognitionIf the vehicle and the remote control are to behanded over for a service, for example, recogni‐tion via the remote control should be cancelled.This means the remote control that is handedover can no longer be used to access the per‐sonal driver profile. If the driver profile was pro‐tected with a PIN, unwanted access is no longerpossible.If a different remote control or a different digitalkey is to be assigned to a driver profile, the cur‐rent assignment must be cancelled first.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"3. "Driver recognition"4. "with vehicle key"

or"with BMW Digital Key"

5. "Activate linkage"

Selecting a driver profileThe driver profile is selected automatically basedon the recognition of the key/remote control.If the guest profile is active, the driver profile isselected on the welcome screen or via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"

Seite 100



3. Select a driver profile.4. "Sign in"The settings saved in the selected driver profileare applied automatically.

Switching synchronisation withthe ConnectedDrive accounton/offConnectedDrive countries:The settings saved in the personal driver profilecan also be saved in the personal Connected‐Drive account. This makes it possible to use thepersonal settings in other BMW vehicles withConnectedDrive access as well.Synchronisation with the ConnectedDrive ac‐count is enabled in the setup assistant or viaiDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"3. "Settings"4. "Synchronise driver profile"5. "Synchronise driver profile"

Renaming the driver profileNon-ConnectedDrive countries:The name assigned when setting up the driverprofile can be changed via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"3. Select a driver profile.4. "Settings"5. Enter a profile name.6. Select the symbol.

Selecting a profile pictureVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"

3. "Select profile picture"4. Select the desired profile picture.

Deleting a driver profileVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driver profiles"3. "Settings"4. "Remove driver profile"5. Select the desired driver profile.6. "Remove now"ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profilehas been synchronised with a ConnectedDriveaccount, the data saved in the ConnectedDriveaccount is retained.

System limitsIt is not always possible to detect the desired re‐mote control uniquely. This may be the case inthe following scenarios:▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle using Comfort

Access and is carrying a number of remotecontrols.

▷ If there is a change of driver without the vehi‐cle being locked and unlocked.

▷ If a number of remote controls are located inthe area outside of the vehicle, on the driver'sside.

If the remote control has not been detecteduniquely, unlock the vehicle by pressing the but‐ton on the desired remote control.ConnectedDrive countries:It is only possible to create a driver profile andsynchronise it with the ConnectedDrive accountif mobile telephone reception is available.Using the personal settings stored in the Con‐nectedDrive in other vehicles is subject to certaintechnical restrictions. For example, there may bestored settings for a system that is not availablein other vehicles, or only in an incompatible ver‐sion.

Seite 101



Parking service modePrincipleIn parking service mode, the Control Display isdisabled and operation via iDrive is no longerpossible.This mode can be used, for example, if the vehi‐cle is to be handed over to a parking service.

GeneralIn parking service mode, the vehicle settingscannot be changed via iDrive. Personal settingscannot be changed and personal data cannot bedisplayed.In addition, the following actions are performed:▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated.▷ DSC cannot be switched off.▷ The boot lid can be locked and disconnected

from the central locking system.

Operating requirements▷ At least one driver profile has been created.▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.▷ A ConnectedDrive account is assigned to at

least one driver profile.

Calling up the menu for parkingservice modeGeneralThe menu for parking service mode can becalled up in several ways.▷ Via the switch-off screen.

The switch-off screen is displayed afterswitching off the drive-ready state. Select thecorresponding entry in the switch-off screen.

▷ Via the display bar at the top of the ControlDisplay.

Tilt the Controller upwards and select thecorresponding entry.

▷ Via the vehicle settings.

Via the vehicle settingsVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Valet parking mode"

Activating parking service modeGeneralBefore activating parking service mode, a PINmust be defined so that parking service modecan be deactivated later on.The procedure for entering a PIN varies depend‐ing on the active driver profile.

Driver profile with PINA PIN has been defined for the active driver pro‐file.It is not necessary to enter another PIN.

1. Select the desired setting:"Lock boot as well"The tailgate is locked and disconnected fromthe central locking system.

2. "Activate now"

Driver profile without PINA PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.

1. "PIN"2. PIN required.3. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Lock boot as well"The tailgate is locked and disconnectedfrom the central locking system.

▷ "Activate linkage"

Seite 102



This PIN is defined for the active driverprofile.

4. "Activate now"

Guest profileThe active driver profile is the guest profile.A PIN must be entered.

1. "PIN"2. PIN required.3. Select the desired setting:

"Lock boot as well"The tailgate is locked and disconnected fromthe central locking system.

4. "Activate now"This PIN can be used once to deactivateparking service mode when the guest profileis active.

Deactivating parking servicemodeGeneralThe lock screen for parking service mode is dis‐played on the Control Display.How parking service mode is deactivated de‐pends on which driver profile is selected on thelock screen.

Driver profile with PINRegardless of which driver has activated parkingservice mode, a driver can deactivate parkingservice mode by entering his/her PIN.

1. Select a driver profile.2. Enter the PIN assigned to the driver profile.If you have forgotten the PIN, parking servicemode must be deactivated by entering the as‐signed ConnectedDrive login details.

Driver profile without PINParking service mode was activated by a differ‐ent person. To deactivate parking service mode,a driver without a PIN must enter the login detailsfor his/her ConnectedDrive account.

1. Select a driver profile.2. Enter the login details assigned to the driver

profile.

Guest profileIt is only possible to deactivate parking servicemode in the guest profile if the mode was activa‐ted in the guest profile.

1. Select the guest profile.2. Enter the PIN that was set during activation.If you have forgotten the PIN, parking servicemode must be deactivated via a personal driverprofile.

SettingsGeneralVarious settings are possible for opening andclosing, depending on the equipment installedand the country specifications.These settings are saved for the currently useddriver profile.

Unlocking and lockingDoorsVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Key button assignment"4. Select the symbol.5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Driver's door only"

Seite 103



Only the driver's door and fuel filler flapare unlocked. Pressing again unlocks theentire vehicle.

▷ "All doors"The entire vehicle is unlocked.

▷ "Comfort entry"The entire vehicle is unlocked.Pressing the button on the remote controltwice in direct succession causes the win‐dow to be lowered further when the dooris subsequently opened.

Acknowledgement signals of thevehicleVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. Deactivate or activate desired acknowledge‐

ment signals.▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is acknowledged by flashingtwice, locking by flashing once.

▷ With alarm system:"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"Unlocking is acknowledged by an acous‐tic signal sounding twice, locking by theacoustic signal sounding once.

Folding the mirrors automaticallyVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"

When locking, the exterior mirrors are auto‐matically folded in, and when unlocking theyare automatically folded out.

Automatic unlockingVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "Unlock at end of journey"

After the drive-ready state has been switchedoff by pressing the start/stop button, thelocked vehicle is automatically unlocked.

Automatic lockingVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Lock automatically"The vehicle is automatically locked againafter a short while if no door is opened af‐ter unlocking.

▷ "Lock after pulling away"On driving off, the vehicle is locked auto‐matically.

Boot lidBoot lid and doorsDepending on the equipment and the countryspecifications, these settings may not be avail‐able.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Key button assignment"4. Select the symbol.5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Tailgate"Boot lid is opened.

Seite 104



▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"Boot lid is opened and the doors are un‐locked.

Comfort AccessContactless locking/unlocking1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "Comfort access"5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Unlock by approaching"▷ "Lock by leaving"

Establishing idle state afteropening the front doorsVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Doors/Vehicle access"4. "Switch off after door opening"

Idle state, see page 47, is established whenthe front doors are opened.

Alarm systemGeneralThe alarm system responds to the followingchanges when the vehicle is locked:▷ A door, the bonnet or the boot lid is opened.▷ Movements in the interior.▷ The vehicle's incline changes, for instance

if an attempt is made to jack it up and stealthe wheels or to raise it prior to towing away.

▷ There is an interruption in the power supplyfrom the battery.

▷ Improper use of the socket for on-board diag‐nosis OBD.

The alarm system indicates these changes visu‐ally and audibly:▷ Audible alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acousticalarm may be suppressed.

▷ Visual alarm:By flashing the exterior lights.

Switching on/offThe alarm system is switched on and off at thesame time as the vehicle is unlocked and lockedvia the remote control or Comfort Access.

Opening the doors when thealarm system is switched onThe alarm system is triggered on opening a doorif the door has been unlocked using theintegrated key in the door lock.Stopping the alarm, see page 106.

Opening the boot lid with thealarm system switched onThe boot lid can be opened even with the alarmsystem switched on.On closing the boot lid, it is locked again andmonitored, as long as the doors are locked. Thehazard warning lights flash once.

Indicator lamp on the rear-viewmirror

▷ Indicator lamp flashes every 2 seconds:The alarm system is switched on.

Seite 105



▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approximately10 seconds before it flashes every 2 sec‐onds:The interior movement detector and tilt alarmsensor are not active because doors, bonnetor boot lid are not closed correctly. Correctlyclosed access points are secured.If the open access points are then closed, theinterior protection and tilt alarm sensor areswitched on.

▷ The indicator lamp extinguishes after the ve‐hicle has been unlocked:No attempt has been made to tamper withthe vehicle.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking un‐til the drive-ready state is switched on, but forno longer than approximately 5 minutes:The alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe incline of the vehicle is monitored.The alarm system responds, for example, whenthere is an attempt to steel a wheel or when tow‐ing away.

Interior movement detectorTo ensure perfect functioning, the windows mustbe closed.

Avoiding false alarmsGeneralThe tilt alarm sensor and the interior movementdetector may trigger an alarm without any unau‐thorised activity taking place.Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:▷ In washing bays or car washes.▷ In two-level garages.▷ During transport via motorail, car ferry or

trailer.▷ When there are pets in the vehicle.

▷ When the vehicle is locked after starting torefuel.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior protection canbe switched off for such situations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensorand interior movement detector

Within 10 seconds of locking the vehicle,press the button on the remote control

again.The indicator lamp illuminates for approximately2 seconds and then flashes again.The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movementdetector are switched off until the next time thevehicle is locked.

Stopping the alarm▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control, if

necessary using the special ID feature of theremote control, see page 83.

▷ With Comfort Access: fully grasp the doorhandle on either the driver's door or the frontpassenger door while carrying the remotecontrol.

Power window switchesSafety note

WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenthe windows are operated. There is a danger ofinjury or damage to property. When openingand closing, make sure that the area of move‐ment of the windows is kept clear.

Seite 106



Overview

Power window switches

Operating requirementsThe windows can be operated under thefollowing conditions.▷ Standby state is established.▷ Drive-ready state is established.▷ For a short while after idle state has been es‐

tablished.▷ The remote control is in the interior.

Opening▷ Push the switch as far as the resist‐

ance point.The window opens as long as the switch isheld.

▷ Push the switch past the resistancepoint.

The window is opened automatically. Themovement is stopped by pressing the switchagain.

Comfort opening using the remote control, seepage 80.

Closing▷ Pull the switch as far as the resist‐

ance point.The window closes as long as the switch isheld.

▷ Pull the switch past the resistancepoint.

The window closes automatically if the dooris closed. Pulling the switch again stops themovement.

Comfort closing using the remote control, seepage 81.Closing using Comfort Access, see page 89.

Anti-trap mechanismGeneralIf the closing force exceeds a certain value whena window is closing, the closing operation is in‐terrupted.The window is opened slightly.

Safety note

WARNINGAccessories on the windows, for example aer‐ials, can impair the anti-trap mechanism. Thereis a danger of injury. Do not attach any acces‐sories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the anti-trapmechanismIf an external danger or ice does not allow you toclose the windows normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistancepoint and hold it there.The window is closed with a restricted anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force exceedsa certain value, the closing operation is inter‐rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistancepoint again within approximately 4 secondsand hold it there.The window is closed without the anti-trapmechanism.

Seite 107



Seats, mirrors and steering wheelVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Safe seating positionA seating position that suitably reflects the re‐quirements of the occupants is essential for re‐laxed driving with minimum fatigue.In an accident, the correct seating position playsan important role. Comply with the notes in thefollowing chapters:▷ Seats, see page 108.▷ Seat belts, see page 111.▷ Head restraints, see page 113.▷ Airbags, see page 172.

SeatsGeneralThe driver's seat setting is saved for the currentlyused profile, see page 98. If a driver profile is se‐lected, the saved position is called up automati‐cally.The current seat position can be saved with thememory function, see page 116.

Safety notes

WARNINGAdjusting the seat during a journey could causethe seat to move unexpectedly. You could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a danger of acci‐dents. Only adjust the seat on the driver's sidewhen at a standstill.

WARNINGIf the backrest is angled back too far, the pro‐tective effect of the seat belt will no longer beguaranteed. There is a danger of sliding underthe seat belt in the event of an accident. Thereis a danger of injury or even death. Adjust theseat before starting the journey. Adjust thebackrest to the most upright position possible,and do not change it during the journey.

WARNINGThere is a risk of entrapment when the seatsare being moved. There is a danger of injury ordamage to property. Before making any adjust‐ment, make sure that the area of movement ofthe seat is clear.

Seite 108

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel


Overview

1 Backrest width2 Forward/back, height, seat angle3 Backrest tilt, head restraint4 Lumbar support

Forward/back

Press the switch forwards or backwards.

Height


Seat angle

Tilt the switch up or down.

Backrest angle

Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.

Thigh supportMultifunction seat

Pull the lever on the front of the seat and adjustthe thigh support forwards or backwards.

Seite 109

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS


Lumbar supportPrincipleThe curvature of the backrest can be changed insuch a way that the lumbar region, the lordosis, issupported. The upper edge of the pelvis and thespinal column are supported to encourage anupright posture.

Adjusting▷ Press the button at the front/

rear:The curvature is increased/decreased.

▷ Press the button at the top/bottom:The curvature is shifted up‐wards/downwards.

Function restrictionIt may not be possible to adjust the lumbar sup‐port at very high and very low temperatures.

Backrest widthPrincipleTo adjust the backrest width can improve lateralsupport when taking corners.

GeneralTo change the width of the backrest, the sidecushions of the backrest can be adjusted.

Adjusting▷ Press the button at the front:

Backrest width is reduced.▷ Press the button at the rear:

Backrest width is increased.

Function restrictionIt may not be possible to adjust the backrestwidth at very high and very low temperatures.

Entering the rear passengercompartmentSafety notes


WARNINGIf the backrest is not locked, it could move un‐expectedly while you are driving. You could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a danger of in‐jury. Fold back and lock the backrests beforeevery journey.

Folding down the backrest1. Pull loop.

2. Fold the backrest forwards.To make it easier to get into the back, the seatautomatically moves all the way forwards.The process is interrupted if the switch for theforward/back position is pressed or the backrestis folded back.

Seite 110



Folding back the backrestFold back and lock the backrest.The seat automatically moves back to the lastseat position saved.Pulling the loop again stops the movement.

Seat beltsNumber of seat belts and beltbucklesFor the safety of the vehicle occupants, the vehi‐cle is equipped with four seat belts. However,they can only provide effective protection whenworn correctly.

GeneralBefore a journey, always make sure that all occu‐pants have fastened their seat belts. The airbagssupplement the seat belts as an additional safetydevice. The airbags are not a substitute for theseat belts.The belt anchorage is suitable for adults of anystature if the seat is adjusted correctly.

Safety notes

WARNINGNever restrain more than one person with eachseat belt, otherwise the protective effect of theseat belt is no longer guaranteed. There is adanger of injury or even death. Only restrainone person with each seat belt. Do not allow in‐fants and children to travel on the lap of anotheroccupant. Instead, secure the infant or child in achild restraint system intended for this purpose.

WARNINGThe protective function of the seat belts maybe limited or may even fail completely if theseat belts are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt isnot worn correctly, additional injuries can becaused, for example in the event of an accidentor braking and evasive manoeuvres. There is adanger of injury or even death. Make sure thatall vehicle occupants have fastened their seatbelts correctly.

WARNINGSeat belts are designed to bear upon thebody's skeleton and should be worn low acrossthe front of the pelvis, or lie against pelvis,chest and shoulders, as applicable. Do notroute the lap section of the belt across the ab‐domen.In order to provide the protection for which theyhave been designed, the seat belts should beadjusted to fit as snugly as possible without be‐ing uncomfortable. A slack belt will greatly re‐duce the protection afforded to the wearer.Do not allow the seat belt webbing to comeinto contact with polishes, oils and chemicalsand particularly battery acid. It may be safelycleaned with a mild soap water solution. Re‐place the seat belt if the webbing becomesfrayed, contaminated or damaged. Seat beltsshould not be worn with seat belt straps twis‐ted. Each seat belt assembly must only beused by one occupant; carrying infants andchildren on the occupant's lap is not permitted.It is essential to replace the entire belt assem‐bly if it was being worn by a vehicle occupantwhen a severe impact occurred, even if dam‐age to the assembly is not obvious.

Seite 111



WARNINGNo modifications or additions should be madeby the user that will either prevent the seat beltadjusting devices from operating to removeslack, or prevent the seat belt assembly frombeing adjusted to remove slack.

WARNINGThe protective function of the seat belts maybe limited or may even fail completely in thefollowing situations:▷ The seat belts or belt buckles are dam‐

aged, dirty or have been modified in an‐other way.

▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors havebeen modified.

Seat belts can be damaged in an accident with‐out the damage necessarily being apparent.There is a danger of injury or even death. Donot modify seat belts, belt buckles, belt ten‐sioners, belt retractors and belt anchor pointsand ensure that they are kept clean. After anaccident, have the seat belts inspected at aService Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Correct seat belt use▷ Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis and

shoulder, close to the body and without twist‐ing.

▷ Make sure that the seat belt is positioned lowat the hip in the area of the pelvis. The seatbelt must not press on the abdomen.

▷ The seat belt must not be rubbed on sharpedges, be routed over solid or breakable ob‐jects or be trapped.

▷ Avoid bulky clothing.▷ Keep the seat belt taut by occasionally pulling

upwards on the upper section.

Adjustment for automaticretracting seat belts▷ Pull the seat belt tongue diagonally across

the body and push it into the belt buckle untilit audibly engages into place.

▷ It is important to adjust the belt length cor‐rectly. To adjust the lap belt and checkwhether the belt tongue has engaged cor‐rectly in the buckle, pull upwards on theshoulder section of the belt until the lap beltfits tightly.

▷ The diagonal shoulder strap adjusts automat‐ically to allow freedom of movement.

▷ To release the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle.

Fastening the seat belt1. When fastening the seat belt, guide the seat

belt slowly from the bracket.2. Insert the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.

The seat belt buckle must be heard to en‐gage.

Unfastening the seat belt1. Hold the seat belt firmly.2. Press the red button on the belt buckle.3. Guide the seat belt back up to the reel mech‐

anism.

Seite 112



Seat belt reminder for driver andfront passenger seatGeneralThe seat belt reminder is activated when theseat belt on the driver's side is not fastened.For some country specifications, the seat belt re‐minder is also active if the front passenger seatbelt is not fastened and heavy objects are on thefront passenger seat.

Display in the instrument clusterA Check Control message is shown.Check whether the seat belt has beenfastened correctly.

Front head restraintsGeneralThe current head restraint position can be savedwith the memory function, see page 116.

Safety notes

WARNINGIf the head restraints are removed or incorrectlyadjusted, they cannot provide protection as in‐tended and head and neck injuries may result.There is a danger of injury.▷ Before a journey, re-install any removed

head restraints on all occupied seats.▷ Adjust the head restraint so that its centre

supports the back of the head at eye levelwhere possible.

▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐straint is as close as possible to the backof the head. If necessary, adjust the dis‐tance by adjusting the backrest angle.

WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenthe head restraints are moved. There is a dan‐ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,make sure that the area of movement is keptclear.

WARNINGObjects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐tective effect in the head and neck area. Thereis a danger of injury.▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or head

restraints.▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hangers

directly on the head restraint.▷ Only use accessories that have been clas‐

sified as safe for attaching to the head re‐straint.

▷ Do not use any accessories, for examplecushions, during the journey.

Adjusting the height


To prevent the head restraint from colliding withthe roof lining, the height of the head restraintcannot be adjusted in certain seat positions. Toadjust the head restraint, move the seat to alower position.

Seite 113



Setting the distance

▷ Back: press the button and slide the head re‐straint towards the rear.

▷ Forward: pull the head restraint forwards.After setting the distance, move the head re‐straint forwards or backwards slightly, makingsure it engages properly.

RemovingThe head restraints cannot be removed.

Exterior mirrorsGeneralThe mirror setting is saved for the currently useddriver profile, see page 98. If a driver profile is se‐lected, the saved position is called up automati‐cally.The current exterior mirror position can be savedwith the memory function, see page 116.

Safety note

WARNINGObjects reflected in the mirror are closer thanthey appear. The distance to road users behindthe vehicle could be incorrectly estimated, forexample when changing lane. There is a dangerof accidents. Look over your shoulder to esti‐mate the distance from following traffic.

Overview

1 Adjusting2 Selecting a mirror, automatic parking function3 Folding in and out

Electrical adjustmentPress the button.The selected mirror moves in response to

the button movement.

Selecting a mirrorTo switch to the other mirror:Push the switch.

MalfunctionIn the event of an electrical fault, press the edgesof the mirror glass to adjust the mirror.

Folding in and out

NOTEBecause of its width, the vehicle could sustaindamage in car washes. There is a danger ofdamage to property. Before washing, fold themirrors in manually or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding in is possible up to a speed of approx.20 km/h, 15 mph.

Seite 114



Folding the mirrors in and out is useful in thefollowing situations:▷ In car washes.▷ In narrow streets.Folded-in mirrors automatically fold out when thevehicle reaches a speed of approx. 40 km/h,25 mph.

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automatically heatedwhen the drive-ready state is switched on.

Automatically dimmingThe exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐matically dimmed. Photocells in the rear-viewmirror, see page 115, to control this function.

Automatic parking function,exterior mirrorPrincipleWhen reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glasson the front passenger side is tilted downwards.This improves the view of the kerb or other ob‐stacles near the ground, for example when park‐ing.

Activating

1. Push the switch to the driver's mirrorposition.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

DeactivatingPush the switch to the front passeng‐er's mirror position.

Rear-view mirrorGeneralThe rear-view mirror is dimmed automatically.

The function is controlled by photocells:▷ In the mirror glass.▷ On the back of the mirror.

Overview

Operating requirements▷ Keep the photocells clean.▷ Do not obstruct the zone between the rear-

view mirror and the windscreen.

Steering wheelSafety note

WARNINGAdjusting the steering wheel while driving maycause the steering wheel to move unexpect‐edly. You could lose control of the vehicle.There is a danger of accidents. Only adjust thesteering wheel when the vehicle is at a stand‐still.

Electrical steering wheeladjustmentGeneralThe steering wheel setting is saved for the cur‐rently used driver profile, see page 98. If a driverprofile is selected, the position that applies whenthe drive-ready state is switched on is called upautomatically.

Seite 115



The current steering wheel position can besaved with the memory function, see page 116.

Adjusting

Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel tothe correct fore/aft position and height for yourseating position.

Easy entry/exitThe steering wheel temporarily moves to itshighest position to facilitate entry and exit.

Steering wheel heatingOverview

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/offPress the button.A Check Control message is shown.

If the journey is continued within about 15 mi‐nutes following a temporary stop, the steeringwheel heating is activated automatically if the

function was switched on at the end of the lastjourney.

Memory functionPrincipleThe memory function enables the following set‐tings to be stored and retrieved when required:▷ Seat position.▷ Exterior mirror position.▷ Steering wheel position.▷ Height of the Head-Up Display.

GeneralFor each driver profile, see page 98, two memoryslots can be assigned with different settings.The following settings are not saved:▷ Backrest width.▷ Lumbar support.

Safety notes

WARNINGUsing the memory function while driving maycause the seat or steering wheel to move unex‐pectedly. You could lose control of the vehicle.There is a danger of accidents. Only call up thememory function when the vehicle is at stand‐still.


Seite 116



Overview

The memory buttons are on the front doors.

Saving1. Set the desired position.

2. Press the button. The lettering in thebutton is illuminated.

3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the let‐tering is illuminated. A signal sounds.

RecallingPress the desired button 1 or 2.The saved position is called up automatically.The operation is cancelled when you press aseat adjustment switch or press one of thememory buttons again.Adjusting the seat position on the driver's side isinterrupted after a short time during the journey.

Seat and armrest heatingPrincipleThe system heats the seats and armrests if re‐quired. Seat heating can also be used withoutarmrest heating.

Overview

Seat and armrest heating

Switching on1. Press the button.2. Select the temperature stage:

▷ Press the button once for each tempera‐ture stage. Three red LEDs indicate thehighest stage.

▷ Select the desired stage on the touch‐screen. Three red bars indicate the high‐est stage.

If ECO PRO is activated, see page 296, theheating power is reduced.If the journey is continued within about 15 mi‐nutes after a temporary stop, the functions areautomatically activated with the last temperatureset.

Switching offPress and hold the button until theLEDs are extinguished.

Seat heating distributionThe heat distribution between the seat cushionand the backrest can be varied.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"

Seite 117



3. "Climate comfort"4. "Seat and armrest heating"5. Select the desired seat.6. Press and turn the Controller to adjust the

seat heating distribution.

Switching the armrest heatingon/offVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Seat and armrest heating"5. Select the desired seat.6. "Heat armrests together with seat"

Active seat ventilationPrincipleIntegrated fans suck in air from the vehicle inte‐rior. The seat and backrest surfaces are cooledas a result.The ventilation function cools the seat, for exam‐ple if the vehicle interior is uncomfortably hot or ifcontinuous cooling is required when the weatheris hot.

GeneralDepending on the automatic air conditioning set‐ting, the cooling effect is increased or reduced.The cooling function can be adapted individuallyby setting the ventilation temperature, seepage 265, and the air distribution, seepage 268, manually.For maximum cooling, adjust the air distributionmanually to the upper body area.

Overview

Active seat ventilation

Switching on1. Press the button.2. Select the ventilation stage:

▷ Press the button once for each ventilationstage. Three blue LEDs indicate the high‐est stage.

▷ Select the desired stage on the touch‐screen. Three blue bars indicate the high‐est stage.


Seat air conditioningPrincipleThe seat air conditioning combines the seatheating and active seat ventilation functions.

GeneralThe seat heating and active seat ventilation areoperated via the same button on the HVAC con‐trol panel.If both systems are active, pressing the buttonwill reduce the intensity of both functions by onestage in each case. The last active function is ac‐

Seite 118



tivated directly when the system is switched onagain. If both functions are switched off at thesame time, the system automatically activatesthe seat heating.

Overview

Seat air conditioning

Switching on1. Press the button.2. Select the desired setting via the touch‐

screen.


Seite 119



Carrying children safelyVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Important considerationsSafety note



Children always in the rear seatsGeneralAccident research has shown that the safestplace for children is on the rear seat.

Children younger than 12 years old or less than150 cm, 5 ft in height are only allowed to betransported in the rear using child restraint sys‐tems appropriate for their age, weight and stat‐ure. Children older than 12 years must be se‐cured with a seat belt as soon as a suitable childrestraint system is no longer appropriate due totheir age, weight and stature.

Safety note

WARNINGChildren less than 150 cm, 5 ft in height cannotwear the seat belt correctly without using addi‐tional child restraint systems. The protectivefunction of the seat belts may be limited or mayeven fail completely if the seat belts are wornincorrectly. If a seat belt is not worn correctly,additional injuries can be caused, for example inthe event of an accident or braking and evasivemanoeuvres. There is a danger of injury or evendeath. Children smaller than 150 cm, 5 ft inheight must be secured in suitable child re‐straint systems.

Not for Australia/New Zealand:Children on the front passengerseatGeneralWhen using a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, make sure that the front andside airbags on the passenger side are deactiva‐ted. Front passenger airbags can only be deacti‐vated with the key switch for front passenger air‐bags, see page 174.

Seite 120

CONTROLS Carrying children safely


Safety note

WARNINGActive front passenger airbags can injure a childin a child restraint system if they are triggered.There is a danger of injury. Make sure that thefront passenger airbags are deactivated and the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐luminated.

Not for Australia/New Zealand: Suitable seatsInformation about which child restraint systemscan be used on the seats in question if the child

restraint systems are attached with a seat belt inaccordance with the ECE-R 16 standard:

Group Weight ofchild

Approxi‐mate age

Front pas‐sengerseat, air‐bag ON

Front pas‐sengerseat, air‐bag OFF –a)

Rear seats,outer – b)

Rear seat,middle

0 Up to 10 kg Upto 9 months

X U, L U, L X

0+ Up to 13 kg Upto 18 months

X U, L U, L X

I 9 – 18 kg Upto 4 years

X U, L U, L X

II 15 – 25 kg Upto 7 years

X U, L U, L X

III 22 – 36 kg 7 years ormore

X U, L U, L X

U: suitable for child restraint systems in the Universal category that have been approved for use inthis weight group.L: suitable for child restraint systems in the Semi-Universal category if the vehicle and the seat arelisted in the list of vehicle models from the manufacturer of the child restraint system.X: not suitable for child restraint systems in the Universal category that have been approved for usein this weight group.a) Adapt the front/back position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the highestposition to achieve the best possible routing of the belt.b) Adjust the front/back position of the front seat if necessary when using child restraint systems onthe rear seats.

Seite 121

Carrying children safely CONTROLS


Fitting child restraintsGeneralAppropriate child restraint systems for every ageand weight class are available from a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.Please comply with the operating and safety in‐structions provided by the child restraint systemmanufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐ing child restraint systems.

Safety notes

WARNINGIf child restraint systems and their attachmentsystems have been damaged or subjected tostresses in an accident, their protective func‐tion may be limited or may fail completely. Achild might not be adequately restrained, for ex‐ample in the event of an accident or brakingand evasive manoeuvres. There is a danger ofinjury or even death. If child restraint systemsand their attachment systems have been dam‐aged or subjected to stresses in an accident,have them checked by a Service Partner of themanufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐ner or a specialist workshop and renewed ifnecessary.

WARNINGIf the seat adjustment or child seat installationis incorrect, the child restraint system may havelimited stability or may not be stable at all.There is a danger of injury or even death. Makesure the child restraint system is firmly posi‐tioned against the backrest. Wherever possible,adapt the backrest angle of all the relevant seatbackrests and adjust the seats correctly. Makesure that the seats and their backrests are cor‐rectly engaged or locked. If possible, adjust theheight of the head restraints, or remove them.

WARNINGIf child restraint systems are used on the thirdseat row, the protective effect is limited. Thereis a danger of injury or even death. Do notmount child restraint systems on the third seatrow.

For Australia/New Zealand:Installation of child restraintsPlease note the following warning because yourvehicle has been equipped with a front airbag forthe front passenger seat that cannot be deacti‐vated:

It is recommended not to use any kind ofchild restraint system on the front pas‐senger seat.

Extreme hazardDo not use a rearward-facing child restraint ona seat protected by an airbag in front of it.

Not for Australia/New Zealand:On the front passenger seatDeactivating airbags

WARNINGActive front passenger airbags can injure a childin a child restraint system if they are triggered.There is a danger of injury. Make sure that thefront passenger airbags are deactivated and thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐luminated.

Before fitting a child restraint on the front pas‐senger seat, make sure that the front and sideairbags on the passenger side are disabled.Deactivating the front passenger airbags with keyswitch, see page 174.

Seite 122



Rearward-facing child restraints

DANGERActive front passenger airbags can fatally injurea child in a rearward-facing child restraint sys‐tem if they are triggered. There is a danger ofinjury or even death. Make sure that the frontpassenger airbags are deactivated and thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐luminated.

Follow the information on the front passengersun visor.NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front ofit, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILDcan occur.

Seat position and heightBefore installing a universal child restraint sys‐tem, move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go and adjust to a mid-height position.This seat position and height achieves the bestpossible routing of the belt and protection in theevent of an accident.If the upper attachment point of the seat belt islocated ahead of the child seat's belt guide, care‐fully move the front passenger seat forwards untilthe best possible belt guidance is achieved.

Backrest widthWith adjustable backrest width: before fitting achild restraint system on the front passengerseat, fully open the backrest width. Do not

change the backrest width from this point on anddo not call up a memory position.

ISOFIX child seatmountingsGeneralNote for Australia: ISOFIX child seats are not per‐mitted for road use in Australia at the time ofprinting. However, also since a change of the re‐spective regulations is also expected in the fu‐ture, lower ISOFIX anchorages are supplied inline with applicable ADRs also for Australia.Please comply with the operating and safety in‐structions provided by the child restraint systemmanufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐ing ISOFIX child restraint systems.

Brackets for lowerISOFIX anchorsSafety note

WARNINGIf the ISOFIX child restraint systems are not en‐gaged correctly, the protective effect of theISOFIX child restraint systems may be limited.There is a danger of injury or even death. Makesure the lower anchor point has engaged cor‐rectly and the ISOFIX child restraint system isfirmly positioned against the backrest.

Position

Symbol MeaningThe corresponding symbolshows the brackets for lowerISOFIX anchor points.

Seite 123



The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors arelocated behind the marked covers.

Before fitting ISOFIX childrestraintsPull the seat belt away from the area of the childseat mountings.

Fitting ISOFIX child restraintsystems1. Install the child restraint system, see the

manufacturer's instructions.2. Make sure that both ISOFIX anchors are

locked correctly in place.

Mounts for the upper ISOFIXretaining strapSafety notes

WARNINGIf the upper retaining strap is used incorrectlywith the child restraint system, the protectiveeffect may be reduced. There is a danger of in‐jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap isnot routed to the upper attachment strap oversharp edges and that it is not twisted.

WARNINGIf the rear backrest is not locked, the protectiveeffect of the child restraint system is limited ornon-existing. The rear backrest can fold for‐ward in certain situations, for example brakingmanoeuvre or accident. There is a danger of in‐jury or even death. Make sure that the rearbackrests are locked.

NOTEThe mounting points for the upper retainingstraps of child restraint systems are only inten‐ded for these retaining straps. The mountingpoints can be damaged if other objects are at‐tached. There is a danger of damage to prop‐erty. Only attach child restraint systems to theupper retaining straps.

Mounting pointsThe symbol shows the mounting pointfor the upper retaining strap.

There are two mounting points for the upper re‐taining strap of ISOFIX child restraint systems.

Seite 124



Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint3 Hook for the upper retaining strap4 Mounting point/eyelet

5 Seat backrest6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strapto the mounting point1. Release rear backrest and fold forwards.2. Guide the upper retaining strap over or along

both sides of the head restraint to the mount‐ing point.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to themounting point.

4. Folding back the rear backrest.5. Pull the retaining strap taut.

Suitable ISOFIX child restraint systemsThe following ISOFIX child restraints may beused on the seats designated as appropriate forthis purpose. The corresponding size class and

size category are denoted by a letter or ISO ref‐erence on a plate on the child seat.


Approximateage

Class/cate‐gory – a)

Frontpas‐sen‐gerseat,airbagON

Frontpas‐sen‐gerseat,airbagOFF –b)

Rearseats,outer

Rearseat,mid‐dle

Carrycot F - ISO/L1G - ISO/L2

XX

XX

XX

XX

0 Up to 10 kg Approximately9 months

E - ISO/R1 X X IL, c) X

0+ Up to 13 kg Approximately18 months

E - ISO/R1D - ISO/R2C - ISO/R3

XXX

XXX

IL, c)IL c)X

XXX

Seite 125




Approximateage

Class/cate‐gory – a)

Frontpas‐sen‐gerseat,airbagON

Frontpas‐sen‐gerseat,airbagOFF –b)

Rearseats,outer

Rearseat,mid‐dle

I 9 - 18 kg Up to approxi‐mately 4 years

D - ISO/R2C - ISO/R3B - ISO/F2B1 - ISO/F2XA - ISO/F3

XXXXX

XXXXX

IL, c)XIL, IUFIL, IUFX

XXXXX

a) When using child seats on the rear seats, adapt the front/back position of the front seat if neces‐sary, and also adjust the head restraint of the rear seat or remove it.

b) Only if equipped with ISOFIX child seat mountings.

c) Adjust the front/back position of the front seat and the height when using child seats on the rearseats.

IL: suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in Semi-Universal category if the vehicle and the seatare listed in the vehicle type list of the manufacturer of the child restraint system.

IUF: suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Universal category that havebeen approved for use in this weight class.

X: the seat is not approved or equipped with mounting points for the ISOFIX system.

i-Size child restraint systemsGenerali-Size is a regulation for child restraint systems,which is used for the approval of child restraintsystems.

If this symbol is seen in the vehicle, thevehicle has been approved in accord‐ance with i-Size. The symbol shows the

mounts for the system's lower anchors.

The symbol shows the mounting pointfor the upper retaining strap.

Suitable i-Size seatsInformation on the suitability of the different vehi‐cle seats for the installation of child restraint sys‐

tems suitable for i-Size or meeting i-Size require‐ments - in accordance with standard ECE-R 129:

Seite 126



Group Front passengerseat, airbag ON

Front passengerseat, airbag OFF

Rear seat on left, right2nd seat row

i-Size X X i-U

i-U, suitable for rearward and forward-facing i-Size child restraint systems.

X: not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.

Recommended child seatsAppropriate child restraint systems for every ageand weight class are available from a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendsthe following child restraint systems:▷ Maxi Cosi CabrioFix.▷ Maxi Cosi FamilyFix base.▷ Maxi Cosi 2wayPearl & 2wayFix.▷ Römer KidFix XP.▷ Osann Topo.

For Australia/New Zealand:Child restraintsGeneralIn accordance with ADR 34/02, provisions havebeen made to allow installation of a child restraintat each rear seating position.The anchoring hooks which belong to the upperrestraining strap of the child restraint - AS 1754,can be applied immediately to the relevantmounting.Please refer strictly to the installation instructionssupplied with the child restraint system.Each seating position is fitted with a head rest.

Safety notes

WARNINGChild restraint anchorages are designed towithstand only those loads imposed by cor‐rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum‐stances are they to be used for adult seat belts,harnesses or for attaching other items or equip‐ment to the vehicle. After using and removingchild restraints, fold away the anchor fittingsdown again if necessary.

WARNINGIf the rear backrest is not locked, the protectiveeffect of the child restraint system is limited ornon-existing. The rear backrest can fold for‐ward in certain situations, for example brakingmanoeuvre or accident. There is a danger of in‐jury or even death. Make sure that the rearbackrests are locked.

WARNINGIf the upper retaining strap is used incorrectlywith the child restraint system, the protectiveeffect may be reduced. There is a danger of in‐jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap isnot routed to the upper attachment strap oversharp edges and that it is not twisted.

Seite 127



Mounting pointsThe symbol shows the mounting pointfor the upper retaining strap.

There are two mounting points for the upper re‐taining strap of ISOFIX child restraint systems.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint3 Hook for the upper retaining strap4 Mounting point/eyelet5 Seat backrest6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retainingstrap to the mounting point1. Release rear backrest and fold forwards.2. Guide the upper retaining strap over or along

both sides of the head restraint to the mount‐ing point.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to themounting point.

4. Folding back the rear backrest.5. Pull the retaining strap taut.

Seite 128



DrivingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Start/stop buttonPrinciple

Drive-ready state, see page 47, isswitched on and off by pressingthe start/stop button.Drive-ready state is switched onby pressing the start/stop button

while the brake pedal is depressed.Pressing the start/stop button again switchesdrive-ready state back off and standby state, seepage 47, is switched on.

Auto Start Stop functionPrincipleThe Auto Start Stop function helps you to savefuel. The system stops the engine when station‐ary, for example in a traffic jam or at traffic lights.The drive-ready state remains switched on. Fordriving off, the engine starts automatically.

GeneralEach time the engine is started via the start/stopbutton, the Auto Start/Stop function is switchedto standby. The function is activated from aspeed of around 5 km/h, approximately 3 mph.Depending on selected drive mode, seepage 143, the system is activated or deactivatedautomatically.

Stopping the engineOperating requirements

Steptronic transmissionThe engine is automatically shut down when sta‐tionary under the following conditions:▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D.▷ Brake pedal remains pressed while the vehi‐

cle is at a standstill or vehicle is kept station‐ary by Automatic Hold.

▷ Driver's seat belt buckled or driver's doorclosed.

Manual engine stopIf the engine was not switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle came to a stop, it can beswitched off manually:▷ Rapidly press the brake pedal from the cur‐

rent position.▷ Engaging the selector lever in position P.If all the operating requirements have been met,the engine is shut down.

Air conditioning system when thevehicle is parkedThe air flow rate of the air conditioning system isreduced when the engine is not running.

Seite 129

Driving CONTROLS


Displays in the instrument cluster

GeneralThe display in the revolutioncounter indicates that the AutoStart Stop function is ready forautomatically starting the engine.

The display indicates that the pre‐conditions for an automatic en‐gine stop are not met.

Total time for switched-off engineECO PRO, see page 296, drivemode: depending on the equip‐ment, the total time during whichthe engine is shut down by theAuto Start Stop function is dis‐

played during an automatic engine stop.After refuelling, the total time is automatically re‐set.

Functional limitationsThe engine is not shut down automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ On steep downward gradients.▷ Brake not pressed strongly enough.▷ High outside temperature and operation of

the automatic air conditioning.▷ Interior not heated or cooled to the desired

temperature.▷ Where there is a risk of condensation when

the automatic air conditioning is switched on.▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐

perature.▷ Engine cooling is required.▷ Sharp steering angle or steering operation.▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.▷ At high altitudes.

▷ Bonnet is unlocked.▷ Park Assistant is activated.▷ Stop-and-go traffic.▷ Selector lever position in N or R.▷ After reversing.▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.

Engine startOperating requirements

Steptronic transmissionFor driving off, the engine automatically startsunder the following conditions:▷ By releasing the brake pedal.▷ With Automatic Hold activated: press the ac‐

celerator pedal.

Driving offAfter starting the engine, accelerate as normal.

Safety functionAfter an automatic shut down, the engine will notrestart automatically, if one of the following con‐ditions is met:▷ Driver's seat belt unbuckled and driver's door

open.▷ Bonnet has been unlocked.Several indicator lamps illuminate for variouslengths of time.The engine can only be started using the start/stop button.

System limitsEven if you do not want to drive off, the enginerestarts automatically in the following situations:▷ Very high temperature in the interior when

the cooling function is switched on.▷ Very low temperature in the interior when the

heating is switched on.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Driving


▷ Where there is a risk of condensation whenthe automatic air conditioning is switched on.

▷ The driver applies lock to the steering wheel.▷ Shift from selector lever position D to N or R.▷ Shift from selector lever position P to N, D or

R.▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.▷ Start of an oil level measurement.

Intelligent Auto Start StopfunctionDepending on the equipment version and coun‐try version, the vehicle has various sensors to re‐cord the traffic situation. This enables the intelli‐gent Auto Start Stop function to adapt to varioustraffic situations and, where necessary, behave inan anticipatory manner.For example, in the following situations:▷ If a situation is detected in which the duration

of the stop is likely to be very short, the en‐gine is not stopped automatically. Dependingon the situation, a message is shown on theControl Display.

▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicleshould drive off immediately, the stopped en‐gine is started automatically.

The function may be limited if the navigation datais invalid, outdated or not available, for example.

Manually deactivating/activatingthe systemPrincipleThe engine is not switched off automatically.During an automatic engine stop, the engine isstarted.

Using the button

Press the button.

Using selector lever position or driveexperience switchThe Auto Start Stop function is also deactivatedin selector lever position M/S or in SPORT drivemode of the drive experience switch.

Display▷ LED illuminates: Auto Start Stop function is

deactivated.▷ The LED is extinguished: Auto Start Stop

function is activated.

Parking the vehicle duringautomatic engine stop

GeneralWith automatic engine stop, the vehicle can beparked safely, for example in order to leave it.

Steptronic transmission1. Press the start/stop button.

▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.▷ Standby state is switched on.▷ Selector lever position P is automatically

engaged.2. Apply the parking brake.

Seite 131

Driving CONTROLS


Automatic deactivationGeneralIn certain situations the Auto Start Stop functionis deactivated automatically for safety reasons,for example if the absence of the driver is detec‐ted.

MalfunctionThe Auto Start Stop function no longer shutsdown the engine automatically. A Check Controlmessage is shown. It is possible to keep driving.Have the system checked by a Service Partnerof the manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

Parking brakePrincipleThe parking brake is used to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling when it is parked.

Safety notes






Overview

Parking brake

EngagingWhen the vehicle is stationary

Pull the switch.The LED is illuminated.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster is illuminated red. The parkingbrake is engaged.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Driving


While the vehicle is in motion

GeneralUse during the journey serves as an emergencybrake.Pull and hold the switch. Vehicle brakes stronglyfor as long as the switch is pulled.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster is illuminated red, a signal soundsand the brake lights illuminate.


Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is sta‐tionary.

With steering and lane control assistantand emergency stop assistantBriefly press the switch for the parking brake toactivate the emergency stop function, seepage 211.

ReleasingReleasing manually1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. Press the switch with the brake pedaldepressed or selector lever position P en‐gaged.LED and indicator lamp turn off.The parking brake is released.

Automatic releaseThe parking brake is automatically released ondriving off.LED and indicator lamp turn off.

Automatic HoldPrincipleThis system provides assistance by automaticallyapplying and releasing the brake, for example instop-and-go traffic.

The vehicle is held automatically when at astandstill.On upward gradients, rolling back is preventedwhen driving off.

GeneralThe parking brake is automatically applied if thefollowing conditions are met:▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.▷ The driver's door is opened with the vehicle

at a standstill.▷ The parking brake is used to brake to a

standstill during the journey.

DisplayThe indicator lamp changes from greento red.

Safety notes




WARNINGUnsupervised children or pets in the vehiclecan set the vehicle in motion and endangerthemselves or other road users, for example bythe following actions:▷ Pressing the start/stop button.

Seite 133

Driving CONTROLS


▷ Release the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.▷ Engaging selector lever position N.▷ Operating vehicle equipment.


NOTEAutomatic Hold applies the parking brake whenthe vehicle is stationary and prevents the vehi‐cle from rolling in car washes. There is a dangerof damage to property. Deactivate AutomaticHold before driving into the car wash.

Overview

Automatic Hold

Establishing operational readinessof Automatic Hold1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. Press the button.The LED is illuminated.

The indicator lamp illuminates green.Automatic Hold is ready to operate.When the vehicle is restarted, the last se‐

lected setting is retained.

Automatic Hold holds the vehicleFunctional readiness is established and the driv‐er's door is closed.When the brake is pressed, for example whenstopped at traffic lights, the vehicle is automati‐cally secured to prevent it from rolling away.

The indicator lamp illuminates green.

Driving offTo drive off, press the accelerator pedal.The brake is released automatically and the indi‐cator lamp extinguishes.

Automatic activation of the parkingbrakeThe parking brake is automatically applied whenthe vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold anddrive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle isexited.

The indicator lamp changes from greento red.

The parking brake is not applied automatically ifdrive-ready state was switched off while the ve‐hicle was still rolling. Automatic Hold is switchedoff in this case.

Switching off operational readinessPress the button.The LED is extinguished.

The indicator lamp extinguishes.

Automatic Hold is switched off.If the vehicle is being kept stationary by Auto‐matic Hold, also depress the brake pedal whenswitching off.

MalfunctionIf the parking brake fails or malfunctions:

Seite 134

CONTROLS Driving


After getting out, secure the vehicle to prevent itfrom rolling away, for example with a chock.

After a power failureTo restore parking brake functionality after apower failure:

1. Switch on standby state.

2. Pull the switch with the brake pedal de‐pressed or selector lever position P engagedand then press it.

The procedure can take a few seconds. Anysounds that occur are normal.

The indicator lamp no longer illuminatesas soon as the parking brake is onceagain operational.

Turn indicatorTurn indicator in exterior mirrorDo not fold in the exterior mirrors while driving orwhile operating the turn indicators or hazardwarning lights to ensure that the turn indicatorsin the exterior mirrors are well recognisable.

Indicating

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

Triple turn signalBriefly press the lever up or down.The duration of the triple turn signal can be set.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Exterior lighting"4. "One-touch turn signal"5. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Indicating a turn brieflyPress the lever as far as the resistance point andhold it there for as long as you wish to indicate aturn.

High-beam headlights,headlight flasherPush the lever forwards or pull it back.

▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.The high-beam headlights are illuminatedwhen the low-beam headlights are switchedon.

▷ High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,arrow 2.

Seite 135

Driving CONTROLS


Wiper systemGeneralDo not use the wipers on a dry windscreen, oth‐erwise the wiper blades will wear or becomedamaged more quickly.

Safety notes

WARNINGIf the wipers start moving when they are foldedaway from the windscreen, parts of the bodymay become trapped or the vehicle may bedamaged. There is a danger of injury or dam‐age to property. Make sure that the vehicle isswitched off when the wipers are folded awayfrom the windscreen, and that the wipers are incontact with the windscreen when switchingon.

NOTEIf the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,switching them on may cause the wiper bladesto tear off and the wiper motor to overheat.There is a danger of damage to property. De‐frost the windscreen before switching on thewipers.

Switching on

Press the lever upwards until the desired positionis reached.

▷ Rest position of the wipers, position 0.▷ Rain sensor, position 1.▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.

When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wipersswitch to intermittent operation.

▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wipersswitch to normal speed.

If a journey is interrupted with the wiper systemswitched on: when the journey is resumed, thewipers continue operating at the previously setlevel.

Switching off and flick-wiping

Press the lever down.▷ To switch off: press the lever downwards un‐

til the home position is reached.▷ To flick-wipe: press the lever downwards

from the home position.The lever returns to the home position whenreleased.

Rain sensorPrincipleThe rain sensor automatically controls the wiperoperation depending on the rain intensity.

GeneralThe sensor is mounted on the windscreen, di‐rectly in front of the rear-view mirror.

Seite 136

CONTROLS Driving


Safety note

NOTEIn car washes, the wipers may inadvertentlystart moving if the rain sensor is activated.There is a danger of damage to property. Deac‐tivate the rain sensor in car washes.

Activating

Press the lever upwards from the home positiononce, arrow 1.Wiping is started.The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.If there is frost, a wiping process may not be star‐ted.

DeactivatingPress the lever back into the home position.

Setting the sensitivity of the rainsensor

Turn the knurled wheel to set the sensitivity ofthe rain sensor.

Upwards: high sensitivity of the rain sensor.Downwards: low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windscreen washerSafety notes

WARNINGAt low temperatures, the washer fluid canfreeze onto the windscreen and restrict visibil‐ity. There is a danger of accidents. Only use thewasher systems if there is no possibility of thewasher fluid freezing. Use antifreeze if required.

NOTEIf the washer fluid reservoir is empty, thewasher pump cannot operate as intended.There is a danger of damage to property. Donot use the washer system with the washerfluid reservoir empty.

To clean the windscreen

Pull the lever.Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayedonto the windscreen and the wipers are operatedbriefly.

Windscreen washer jetsThe windscreen washer jets are automaticallyheated when standby state is switched on.

Seite 137

Driving CONTROLS


Fold-out position of the wipersPrincipleIn the fold-out position, the wipers can be foldedaway from the windscreen.

GeneralThis is important, for example for replacing thewiper blades or folding them away from thewindscreen in the event of frost.

Safety notes

WARNINGIf the wipers start moving when they are foldedaway from the windscreen, parts of the bodymay become trapped or the vehicle may bedamaged. There is a danger of injury or dam‐age to property. Make sure that the vehicle isswitched off when the wipers are folded awayfrom the windscreen, and that the wipers are incontact with the windscreen when switchingon.

NOTEIf the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,switching them on may cause the wiper bladesto tear off and the wiper motor to overheat.There is a danger of damage to property. De‐frost the windscreen before switching on thewipers.

Folding out the wipers1. Switch on standby state.

2. Press wiper lever down and hold until thewipers stop in an approximately vertical posi‐tion.

3. Lift the wipers completely away from thewindscreen.

Folding in the wipersAfter folding the wipers in, the wiper systemmust be reactivated.

1. Folding in the wipers completely onto thewindscreen.

2. Switch on standby state and press and holdthe wiper lever down again.

3. The wipers move back to the rest positionand are operational once again.

Steptronic transmissionPrincipleThe Steptronic transmission combines the func‐tions of an automatic transmission with the op‐portunity of changing gear manually if required.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Driving


Safety note

WARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ing away. There is a danger of accidents. Be‐fore leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent itfrom rolling away, for example by applying theparking brake.

Selector lever positionsD drive positionSelector lever position for all normal driving. Allgears for forward driving are selected automati‐cally.

R ReverseOnly engage selector lever position R when thevehicle is stationary.

N neutralIn selector lever position N, the vehicle can bepushed or can roll without power from the en‐gine, for example in car washes, see page 140.

P ParkSelector lever position for parking the vehicle, forexample. In selector lever position P, the trans‐mission blocks the drive wheels.Only engage selector lever position P when thevehicle is stationary.

P is engaged automaticallySelector lever position P is automatically en‐gaged in the following situations, for example:▷ After switching off drive-ready state if selec‐

tor lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.▷ After switching off standby state if selector

lever position N is engaged.▷ If, while the vehicle is at a standstill and selec‐

tor lever position D, M/S or R is engaged, thedriver's seat belt is unfastened, the driver's

door is opened and the brake pedal is not de‐pressed.

Engaging selector leverpositionsGeneralApply the brakes until you are ready to drive off,otherwise the vehicle will move when a drive po‐sition is selected.

Operating requirementsThe selector lever will only move from position Pto another selector lever position if drive-readystate is switched on and the brake pedal is de‐pressed.Where applicable, selector lever position P canonly be changed once all technical requirementsare fulfilled.

Engaging selector lever positions D,N, RA selector lever lock prevents the following incor‐rect operation:▷ Inadvertent shifting to selector lever posi‐

tion R.▷ Inadvertent change from selector lever posi‐

tion P to another selector lever position.1. Fasten the driver's seat belt.2. Press and hold the button to cancel the se‐

lector lever lock.

3. Briefly press the selector lever in the desireddirection, possibly overcoming a resistance

Seite 139

Driving CONTROLS


point. The selector lever returns to the middleposition when released.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicleGeneralIn some situations, the vehicle may need to berolled a short distance without power, for exam‐ple in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

the brake.2. If necessary, release the parking brake.3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, see

page 133.4. Depress the brake pedal.5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐

lector lever position N.6. Switch off drive-ready state.

Standby state then remains switched on anda Check Control message is shown.The vehicle can now roll.

NOTESelector lever position P is automatically en‐gaged when standby state is switched off.There is a danger of damage to property. Donot switch off standby state in car washes.

Irrespective of standby state, selector lever posi‐tion P is engaged automatically after approxi‐mately 35 minutes.If there is a fault, it may not be possible tochange the selector lever position.Unlock the transmission lockout electronically ifnecessary, see page 142.

Kick-downKick-down enables you to achieve maximumperformance.Press the accelerator pedal down beyond theregular full-throttle position; resistance will befelt.

Sport program M/SPrincipleIn the sport programme, the gear shift points andgear shift times are configured for more sportydriving. For example, the transmission shifts uplater and the gearshift times are shorter.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Driving


Activating the sport programme

Press the selector lever out of selector lever po‐sition D to the left.The gear selected appears on the instrumentcluster, for example S1.The sport programme of the gearbox is activa‐ted.

Exiting sport programmePress the selector lever to the right.D is shown in the instrument cluster.

Manual operation M/SPrincipleThe gears can be changed manually in manualoperation.

Activating manual operation1. Press the selector lever from selector lever

position D to the left, arrow 1.

2. Press the selector lever forwards or pull itbackwards, arrows 2.

Manual operation becomes active and the gear isshifted.The gear selected appears on the instrumentcluster, for example M1.

Shifting gears▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

wards.▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever backwards.In certain situations, the transmission continuesto shift automatically, for example when enginespeed limits are reached.

Steptronic sport transmission:preventing automatic upshift inmanual operation M/SWhen SPORT drive mode, see page 144, is se‐lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission doesnot automatically shift up in manualoperation M/S when certain engine speed limitsare reached.On corresponding BMW M drive configurations,this function is active independently of the drivemode.In addition, there is no down shift for kick-down.

Exiting manual operationPress the selector lever to the right.D is shown in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddlesPrincipleShift paddles on steering wheel enable fast gear‐shifting without taking hands off steering wheel.

General

GearshiftGear shifting is only carried out at the appropriateengine RPM and vehicle speed.

Seite 141

Driving CONTROLS


Short-term manual operationIn selector lever position D, operating a shift pad‐dle causes the system to switch to manual oper‐ation temporarily.The gearbox reverts to automatic operation frommanual operation after a certain period of time ofmoderate driving without acceleration or gearshifts using the shift paddles.Changing to automatic operation is possible asfollows:▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.▷ In addition to briefly pulling right shift paddle,

briefly pull left shift paddle.

Permanent manual operationIn selector lever position S, operating a shift pad‐dle causes the system to switch permanently tomanual operation (mode).

Steptronic sport transmissionIn the corresponding gearbox version, operatingthe kick-down and the left shift paddle at thesame time allows you to change down to thelowest possible gear. This is not possible inshort-term manual operation.

Shifting gears

▷ Change up: pull right shift paddle briefly.▷ Change down: pull left shift paddle briefly.▷ Pull and hold left shift paddle to shift to the

lowest possible gear.

The gear selected appears briefly on the instru‐ment cluster, followed by the gear currently inuse.

Displays in the instrumentcluster

The selector lever position is dis‐played, for example P.

Unlocking the transmissionlockout electronicallyGeneralUnlock the transmission lockout electronically tomanoeuvre the vehicle out of a danger area.Unlocking is possible if the starter can turn theengine.Before the transmission lockout is released, ap‐ply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.2. Press the start/stop button. The starter must

be heard to start turning. Press and hold thestart/stop button.

3. With your free hand, press the button on theselector lever, arrow 1, push the selectorlever to selector lever position N and hold itthere, arrow N, until selector lever position Nis displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 142

CONTROLS Driving



4. Release the start/stop button and selectorlever.

5. Release the brake as soon as the starterstops.

6. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of the danger areaand then secure it against rolling away.

More information can be found in the Tow-start‐ing and towing chapter, see page 357.

Launch ControlPrincipleWhen the ambient conditions are dry, LaunchControl permits optimised acceleration on a roadsurface that offers plenty of grip.

GeneralUse of Launch Control causes premature com‐ponent wear, as the function subjects the vehicleto very high stresses and loads.Do not use Launch Control when running in, seepage 290.When starting with Launch Control, do not turnthe steering wheel.

Operating requirementsLaunch Control is available when the engine is atoperating temperature. The engine is at operat‐ing temperature after an uninterrupted journey ofat least 10 km, approx. 6 miles.

Starting with Launch Control1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. Press the button.TRACTION is displayed in the instrumentcluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp is il‐luminated.

3. Engage selector lever position S.4. Press the brake firmly with the left foot.5. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the

resistance at the full-throttle position andhold, kick-down.A flag symbol is shown in the instrumentcluster.

6. The starting engine speed is adjusted. Re‐lease the brake within 3 seconds.

Using again during a journeyOnce Launch Control has been used, the trans‐mission requires approximately 5 minutes to cooldown before Launch Control can be used again.Launch Control adapts to the ambient conditionswhen used again.

After using Launch ControlTo support driving stability, re-activate DynamicStability Control, DSC as soon as possible.

System limitsAn experienced driver may be able to achievebetter acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Drive experience switchPrincipleThe drive experience switch influences the driv‐ing dynamics characteristics of the vehicle. Thevehicle can be adapted depending on the situa‐tion using various driving modes.

Seite 143

Driving CONTROLS


GeneralThe following systems are influenced, for exam‐ple:▷ Engine characteristics.▷ Steptronic transmission.▷ Adaptive suspension.▷ Adaptive M suspension Professional.▷ Active Roll Stabilisation.▷ Steering.▷ Integral Active Steering.▷ Display in the instrument cluster.▷ Cruise Control.

Overview

Displays in the instrumentcluster

The selected drive mode isshown in the instrument cluster.

Drive modesButton in the vehicle

Button Drive mode Configura‐tion

SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL

SPORT SPORTPLUS

COMFORT COMFORT

ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

ADAPTIVE ADAPTIVE

The COMFORT drive mode is automatically se‐lected when drive-ready state is switched on.

Drive modes in detailCOMFORT

PrincipleBalanced configuration between dynamic and ef‐ficient driving.

Switching onPress the button until COMFORT isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.

SPORT

PrincipleDynamic configuration for greater agility with anoptimised suspension.

Switching onPress the button until SPORT is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

SPORT INDIVIDUAL

PrincipleIndividual settings can be made in SPORT INDI‐VIDUAL drive mode.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Driving


ConfiguringVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driving mode"4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL"5. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to default setting:"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".

SPORT PLUS

PrincipleDynamic configuration for maximum agility withan adapted drive.

Switching onPress the button repeatedly untilSPORT is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

ECO PRO

PrincipleEfficient driving setting.

Switching onPress the button until ECO PRO is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

PrincipleIndividual settings can be made in ECO PRO IN‐DIVIDUAL drive mode.

ConfiguringVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driving mode"4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"5. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default set‐ting:"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".

ADAPTIVE

PrincipleBalanced drive mode with a configuration thatautomatically adapts to the driving situation anddriving style.Using the navigation system, upcoming routestages are also taken into account.

Switching onPress the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

INDIVIDUAL configurationGeneralThe individual configuration of the drive mode issaved for the currently used driver profile. Theconfiguration set last is directly activated whenthe drive mode is called up again.

Activating the configuration of thedrive modePress the button of the desired drive severaltimes.

Seite 145

Driving CONTROLS


DisplaysVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Instrument clusterPrincipleThe instrument cluster is a variable display.When the drive experience switch is used tochange programmes, the displays in the instru‐ment cluster are adapted to the driving mode inquestion.

GeneralChanges to the displays in the instrument clustercan be deactivated via iDrive.The displays in the instrument cluster can some‐times differ from the illustrations in this Owner'sHandbook.

Overview

1 Fuel gauge 151Range 153

2 Speedometer3 Variable displays 146

Service requirements 153Navigation display

4 Driver Attention Camera 695 Revolution counter 151

Selection lists 158Widgets in the instrument cluster 147ECO PRO displays 296Status of drive experience switch 143Gear indicator 138

6 Engine temperature 1527 Outside temperature 1528 Check Control 1489 Variable displays 146

Speed Limit Info 155Time 67

Variable displaysIn certain areas of the instrument cluster, variousassistance systems – for example Cruise Control– can be displayed. The displays may vary de‐pending on the equipment and country specifi‐cations.

Seite 146

CONTROLS Displays


Activating/deactivating drivingmode viewPrincipleIf the driving mode view is deactivated, the dis‐plays in the instrument cluster remain un‐changed and are not adapted to the drivingmode in question when the drive experienceswitch is used to change programmes.

AdjustingVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Driving mode view"

Setting the display modePrincipleIn addition to the driving modes, the instrumentcluster can be set to various display modes.


1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Instrument cluster"5. "Display mode"6. Select the desired setting:

▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the instru‐ment cluster are active.

▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the instru‐ment cluster are active. Individual displayscan be selected separately.

Setting reduced display mode

Principle: the displays in the instrument cluster are re‐duced to the minimum necessary.

Adjusting1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Instrument cluster"5. "Reduced display mode"

Setting INDIVIDUAL1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Instrument cluster"5. "INDIVIDUAL"6. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Speed Assistant": show speed assis‐tance, such as Speed Limit Info, in the in‐strument cluster.

▷ "Selection lists displayed in": selectwhether the selection lists are displayed inthe instrument cluster or in the Head-UpDisplay.

Widgets in the instrument clusterPrincipleDisplays for particular functions can be shown inthe revolution counter in the instrument cluster.The following displays can be selected:▷ Journey data, see page 158.▷ Sport displays, see page 159.▷ Current entertainment source, for example

radio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,Entertainment, Communication.

▷ Consumption display.

Seite 147

Displays CONTROLS


Selecting

Press the button on the turn indicator lever re‐peatedly until the desired widget is selected.

Check ControlPrincipleThe Check Control monitors vehicle functionsand alerts you to any faults in the monitored sys‐tems.

GeneralA Check Control message is displayed as a com‐bination of indicator or warning lamps and textmessages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐cable, in the Head-Up Display.If applicable, the text message shown in the Con‐trol Display is accompanied by an additionalacoustic signal.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Continuous displaySome Check Control messages are displayedpermanently and remain until the fault has beenrepaired. If there are a number of malfunctions si‐multaneously, the messages are displayed insuccession.The messages can be hidden for approximately8 seconds. They are then displayed again auto‐matically.

Temporary displaySome Check Control messages are automati‐cally hidden after approximately 20 seconds. TheCheck Control messages remain saved and canbe displayed again.

Displaying Check Controlmessages saved in the memoryVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Check Control"4. Select a text message.

DisplayCheck Control

At least one Check Control message isdisplayed or saved.

Text messagesText messages and symbols in the instrumentcluster explain the meaning of a Check Controlmessage and the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messagesYou can call up additional information via CheckControl, for example the cause of the fault andany action required.The supplementary text is automatically shownin the Control Display for urgent messages.

Seite 148

CONTROLS Displays


Additional assistanceIt is possible to select additional assistance de‐pending on the Check Control message.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Check Control"4. Select the required text message.5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Call BMW Accident Assistance"Contact the BMW Group Accident Assis‐tance.

▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"Contact breakdown assistance.

▷ "Service request"Contact a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partneror a specialist workshop.

▷ "Owner's Handbook"Display additional information on theCheck Control message in the IntegratedOwner's Handbook.

Messages displayed at the end ofa journeyCertain messages displayed when driving aredisplayed again when the drive-ready state isswitched off.

Indicator and warninglampsPrincipleIndicator and warning lamps in the instrumentcluster show the status of some functions in thevehicle, and indicate when there is a malfunctionin monitored systems.

GeneralIndicator and warning lamps can illuminate in avariety of combinations and colours.When the drive-ready state is switched on, thefunctionality of some lights is checked and theyilluminate briefly.

Red lightsSeat belt reminder

The driver's side seat belt is not fas‐tened. With some country specifications:the front passenger seat belt is not fas‐

tened or objects are detected on the front pas‐senger seat.Check whether the seat belt has been fastenedcorrectly.

Airbag systemAirbag system and belt tensioner may befaulty.Immediately have the vehicle checked by

a Service Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Parking brakeThe parking brake is engaged.Release the parking brake, seepage 133.

Brake systemBrake system malfunctioning. Continuedriving at moderate speed.Immediately have the vehicle checked by

a Service Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Seite 149

Displays CONTROLS


Yellow lightsAnti-lock Brake System ABS

Braking force boost may be faulty. Avoidsudden braking. Take into account thatthe braking distance will be longer.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by a Serv‐ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

Dynamic Stability Control DSCIf the indicator lamp is flashing: DSC isregulating the acceleration and brakingforces. The vehicle is being stabilised.

Decrease speed and adjust driving style to theroad conditions.If the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC hasfailed.Immediately have the system checked by a Serv‐ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.DSC, see page 215.

Dynamic Stability Control DSCdeactivated, or Dynamic TractionControl DTC activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.DSC, see page 215, and DTC, seepage 217.

Runflat indicator RPAThe runflat indicator reports a loss of tyreinflation pressure in a tyre.Reduce your speed and carefully stop

the vehicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking andsteering manoeuvres.Runflat indicator, see page 323.

Tyre Pressure Monitor TPMThe indicator lamp illuminates: the TyrePressure Monitor is reporting a low tyreinflation pressure or a flat tyre. Note the

information in the Check Control message.The indicator lamp flashes and then illuminatescontinuously: no flat tyres or loss of tyre inflationpressure can be detected.▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the

same radio frequency: the system is auto‐matically reactivated upon leaving the field ofinterference.

▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is fit‐ted: have it checked by a Service Partner ofthe manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop if necessary.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by aService Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 317.

Steering systemThe steering system may be faulty.Have the system checked by a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another


EmissionsEngine function malfunctioning.Have the vehicle checked by a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another


Socket for on-board diagnosis, see page 345.

Rear fog lightRear fog light is switched on.Rear fog light, see page 168.

Seite 150

CONTROLS Displays


Green lightsTurn indicator

The turn indicator is switched on.If the indicator lamp flashes more rapidlythan usual, a turn signal light has failed.

Turn indicators, see page 135.

Side lightsThe side lights are switched on.Side lights / low-beam headlights, auto‐matic driving lights control, see

page 164.

Driving lightsDriving lights are switched on.Side lights / low-beam headlights, auto‐matic driving lights control, see

page 164.

Lane Departure WarningIndicator lamp is illuminated: system isswitched on. At least one lane markinghas been detected and warnings can be

issued on at least one side of the vehicle.Lane Departure Warning, see page 195.

High-beam assistanceHigh-beam assistance is switched on.The high-beam headlights are switchedon and off automatically depending on

the traffic situation.High-beam assistance, see page 167.

Automatic HoldAutomatic Hold is activated. The vehicleis held automatically when at a standstill.Automatic Hold, see page 133.

Blue lightsHigh-beam headlights

The high-beam headlights are switchedon.High-beam headlights, see page 135.

Fuel gaugePrincipleThe current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.

GeneralThe angle of the vehicle may cause the displayto fluctuate.Notes on refuelling, see page 304.

DisplayAn arrow next to the petrol pumpsymbol shows which side of thevehicle the fuel filler flap is on.The current range is displayed asa number.

Revolution counterIt is vital to avoid engine speeds in the red warn‐ing zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is interrup‐ted to protect the engine.

Shift LightsPrincipleThe shift lights indicate the maximum shift pointat which the best possible acceleration can beachieved.

Seite 151

Displays CONTROLS


Operating requirementsShift Lights are displayed when the SPORT orSPORT PLUS drive programme is activated.

Switching on Shift Lights1. Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving

mode.To do this, press the drive experience switch.

2. Activate manual mode M of the gearbox.

Display

▷ Current engine speed is shown in the revolu‐tion counter.

▷ Arrow 1: yellow buttons lighting up succes‐sively indicate the increase in revs.

▷ Arrow 2: orange buttons lighting up succes‐sively indicate when an upshift is due.

▷ Arrow 3: buttons illuminate red. Latest pointto upshift.

When the maximum permitted engine speed isreached, the entire display flashes. The fuel sup‐ply is limited to protect the engine.

Standby state and drive-ready state

OFF in the revolution counter in‐dicates that the drive-ready stateis switched off and the standbystate is switched on.

The letters READY in the revolu‐tion counter indicate that the AutoStart Stop function is ready forautomatic engine starting.

For more information, see Idle state, standbystate and drive-ready state, see page 47.

Engine temperatureDisplay

▷ Cold engine: the pointer is lo‐cated at a low temperaturevalue. Drive with moderate en‐gine speed and vehicle speed.

▷ Normal operating tempera‐ture: the pointer is in the mid‐dle or the bottom half of thetemperature display.

▷ Hot engine: the pointer is located at a hightemperature value. A Check Control messageis also displayed.

Checking the coolant level, see page 342.

Outside temperatureGeneralIf the display drops to +3 ℃/+37 ℉ or lower, asignal sounds.A Check Control message is shown.There is an increased risk of black ice.

Safety note

WARNINGEven at temperatures above +3 ℃/+37 ℉there may be an increased risk of black ice, forexample on bridges or on shaded road selec‐tion. There is a danger of accidents. At low

Seite 152

CONTROLS Displays


temperatures, adjust the driving style to theweather conditions.

RangePrincipleThe range shows what distance can still be cov‐ered with the current amount of fuel in the tank.

GeneralThe estimated range available with the remainingfuel is permanently displayed in the instrumentcluster.A Check Control message is displayed briefly ifthe remaining range is low. If a dynamic drivingstyle is adopted, for example fast cornering, en‐gine function is not always ensured.If the range drops below approximately 50 km,approximately 30 miles the Check Control mes‐sage is continually displayed.

Safety note

NOTEIf the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, theengine may no longer be supplied with suffi‐cient fuel. Engine function is no longer ensured.There is a danger of damage to property. Re‐fuel in good time.

DisplayThe current range is displayed asa number next to the fuel gauge.

Service requirementsPrincipleThe function shows the current service require‐ments and related maintenance jobs.

GeneralThe distance or time remaining until the nextservice is displayed briefly in the instrument clus‐ter after the ignition is switched on.The current service requirements can be readout from the remote control by a service advisor.Some information on service requirements canalso be shown on the BMW display key.

DisplayDetailed information on servicerequirementsMore detailed information on the scope of main‐tenance can be displayed on the Control Display.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service requirements"

Essential maintenance routines and any stat‐utory inspections required are displayed.

4. Select an entry to display more detailed infor‐mation.

Seite 153

Displays CONTROLS


Symbols

Sym‐bols

Description

No servicing is currently needed.

Maintenance or an inspection re‐quired by law is due soon.

Servicing is overdue.

Entering deadlinesEnter deadlines for statutory vehicle inspections.Ensure that the date and time are set correctly inthe vehicle.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service requirements"4. "BMW Service"5. "Date:"6. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service notificationData on the service status or on statutory inspec‐tions for the vehicle is transmitted to the ServicePartner automatically when a service or inspec‐tion is imminent.It is possible to check when the Service Partnerwas notified.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Teleservice Call"

Service historyPrincipleMaintenance that has been performed can bedisplayed on the Control Display. The function isavailable as soon as a maintenance visit hasbeen documented in the vehicle data.

GeneralHave maintenance work performed by a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop. Themaintenance work carried out is documented inthe vehicle data, see page 344.

DisplaysVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service requirements"

Essential maintenance routines and any stat‐utory inspections required are displayed.

4. "Service history"Performed maintenance is shown.

5. Select an entry to display more detailed infor‐mation.

Symbols

Sym‐bols

Description

Green: maintenance has been carriedout on time.

Yellow: maintenance has been car‐ried out later than scheduled.

Maintenance has not been carriedout.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Displays


Shift point indicatorPrincipleThe system recommends the most efficient gearfor the current driving situation.

GeneralDepending on the design and the country speci‐fications, the shift point indicator is active in man‐ual mode of the Steptronic transmission.

Steptronic transmission:displaysInformation on up or down shifting are displayedin the instrument cluster.For vehicles without shift point indicator, the gearengaged is shown.

Example DescriptionMost efficient gear is engaged.

Shift to a more efficient gear.

Speed Limit Info withovertaking restrictiondisplaySpeed Limit InfoPrincipleSpeed Limit Info shows the currently detectedspeed limit in the instrument cluster and theHead-Up Display, as well as valid additional signswhere applicable; for example, wet conditions.

GeneralThe camera in the area of the interior rear-viewmirror detects traffic signs at the edge of theroad as well as variable overhead signs.Road signs with additional instructions, for exam‐ple restrictions applicable in wet weather, aretaken into account and correlated with informa‐tion in the vehicle, such as the windscreen wipersignal. The road sign and corresponding addi‐tional signs are then displayed in the instrumentcluster or ignored, depending on the situation.Some additional signs are taken into account inthe evaluation of the speed limit, but are not dis‐played in the instrument cluster.The system considers the information saved inthe navigation system as applicable and also dis‐plays the speed limits present on unmarked sec‐tions of road.

Overtaking restriction displayPrincipleOvertaking restriction signs and end of restrictionsigns that are detected by the camera are indica‐ted by corresponding symbols in the instrumentcluster.

GeneralThe system only considers no overtaking restric‐tions and ends of restrictions that are indicatedby means of signs.Nothing will be displayed in the following situa‐tions:▷ In countries in which no overtaking is primarily

shown by road markings.▷ On routes without signs.▷ In the case of railway crossings, lane mark‐

ings and other situations which indicate anovertaking restriction but which are not sign‐posted to this effect.

Depending on the equipment version, an addi‐tional symbol with distance information may also

Seite 155

Displays CONTROLS


be displayed to indicate the end of the overtakingrestriction display.

Safety note

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is adanger of accidents. Adapt your driving style tothe traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situa‐tion and intervene actively if the situation war‐rants it.

OverviewCamera

The camera is located on the front side of therear-view mirror.Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the areain front of the rear-view mirror.

Displaying Speed Limit InfoGeneralDepending on the equipment, Speed Limit Infois displayed permanently in the instrument clus‐ter or via iDrive.

Display via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"

3. "Displays"4. "Driver assistance"5. "Driving"6. "Speed Assistance"7. "Info on speed limits"8. "Show current limit"

DisplayGeneralSupplementary signs and overtaking restrictionsare displayed together when Speed Limit Info isswitched on.Depending on the equipment version, an addi‐tional symbol with distance information may alsobe displayed to indicate that a change in speedlimit is ahead. Depending on the equipment,temporary speed limits may also be displayed;for example, speed limits at roadworks or trafficmanagement systems.

Speed Limit InfoPresent speed limit.

Speed Limit Info unavailable.

The display flashes red if the detected speedlimit has been exceeded.

Overtaking restriction displayNo overtaking.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Displays


End of overtaking restriction.

Additional signs

Symbols Description Speed limit with time limit.

Speed limit only applies in wetconditions.

Speed limit only applies insnowy conditions.

Speed limit only applies in foggyconditions.

Speed limit applies to exit onleft.

Speed limit applies to exit onright.

SettingsVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Driving"5. "Speed Assistant"6. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Warning when speeding": activate/deac‐tivate the flashing of the Speed Limit Infodisplay in the instrument cluster and theHead-Up Display when the detectedspeed limit is exceeded.

▷ "Show speeding": the speed limit detec‐ted by the Speed Limit Info is indicated bya mark in the speedometer in the instru‐ment cluster.

System limitsThe function may be restricted and may displayincorrect information in the following situations,for example:▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ If signs are fully or partially obscured by ob‐

jects, stickers or paint.▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead.▷ In the case of bright oncoming light or strong

reflections.▷ When the windscreen in front of the rear-view

mirror is covered with condensation, dirt,stickers, etc.

▷ If the camera has overheated due to exces‐sively high temperatures and has been tem‐porarily deactivated.

▷ As a result of incorrect detection by the cam‐era.

▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigationsystem or road data are incorrect.

▷ In the case of speed limits that depend or thetime of day or day of the week.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐tem.

▷ If there are deviations in relation to navigation,for example due to changes in road routing.

▷ In the case of electronic road signs.▷ When overtaking buses or trucks with road

sign stickers.▷ If traffic signs do not correspond to the stand‐

ard.▷ If signs are detected that apply to a parallel

road.▷ In the case of country-specific signs or road

layouts.▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐

diately after vehicle delivery.

Seite 157

Displays CONTROLS


Selection listsGeneralThe instrument cluster or the Head-Up Displaycan show lists for certain functions and can beused for operation where applicable.▷ Entertainment source.▷ Current audio source.▷ Telephone.If applicable, the relevant menu is opened on theControl Display.

Operating the listButton Function

Display selection lists in the in‐strument cluster.

Turn the knurled wheel to se‐lect the desired setting.Press the knurled wheel to con‐firm the setting.The list that is currently selec‐ted can be displayed in the in‐strument cluster again by turn‐ing the knurled wheel.

Journey dataPrincipleAn overview of the current journey data, for ex‐ample average consumption or mileage, can beshown in the instrument cluster and on the Con‐trol Display.

Display in the instrument clusterThe journey data can be displayed as a widget inthe revolution counter. Selecting and settingwidgets in the instrument cluster, see page 147.

Display on the Control DisplayVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driving information"3. "Journey data"The route covered in coasting mode is also dis‐played on the Control Display.

Resetting journey dataThe intervals at which the values are reset canbe adjusted.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driving information"3. "Journey data"4. "Values since"5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Start of journey ( )": the values are resetautomatically if the vehicle is at a standstillfor approximately four hours.

▷ "Refuel ( )": the values are reset automati‐cally after refuelling with a significantamount of fuel.

▷ "Ex works ( )": the values since leaving thefactory are displayed.

▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the lastmanual reset are displayed. The valuescan be reset at any time.

Resetting average valuesmanuallyPrincipleThe following interval can be reset manually atany time: "Individual ( )"

Seite 158

CONTROLS Displays


ResettingVia the button on the turn indicator lever:

1. Press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until the widget for the journeydata is selected.

2. Press and hold the button on the turn indica‐tor lever.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driving information"3. "Journey data"4. "Values since"5. "Reset individual"The values are reset. The interval setting for re‐setting the values is changed if applicable:"Individual ( )"

Sport displaysPrincipleThe sport displays primarily assist a sporty driv‐ing style.

Display on the Control DisplayGeneralThe following information is displayed:▷ Engine oil temperature.▷ Acceleration force.▷ Charging pressure.

▷ Torque.▷ Power.

Showing sport displays on theControl DisplayVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driving information"3. "Sport displays"

Display in the instrument clusterThe sport displays can be shown as a widget inthe instrument cluster, see page 147.The following information is displayed:▷ Acceleration force.▷ Torque.▷ Power.

Vehicle statusGeneralThe status can be displayed or actions per‐formed for some systems.

Calling up the vehicle statusVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"

Overview of the information▷ "Flat Tyre Monitor": status of the runflat

indicator, see page 323.▷ "Tyre Pressure Monitor": status of the

Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 317.▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic oil meas‐

urement, see page 339.▷ "AdBlue": BMW Diesel with BluePerform‐

ance, see page 334.

Seite 159

Displays CONTROLS


▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐sages are stored in the background and canbe shown on the Control Display. Displayingof saved Check Control messages, seepage 148.

▷ "Service requirements": display of theservice requirements, see page 153.

▷ "Teleservice Call": Teleservice Call.

Head-Up DisplayPrincipleThe system projects important information, suchas the speed, into the driver's field of vision.The driver can register this information withouthaving to divert attention from the road.

GeneralFollow the instructions on cleaning the Head-UpDisplay, see page 363.

Overview

Switching on/offVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Head-up display"5. "Head-up display"

DisplayOverviewThe following information is displayed in theHead-Up Display:▷ Speed.▷ Navigation instructions.▷ Check Control messages.▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.▷ Driver Assistance Systems.▷ Sport displays.Some of this information is only shown brieflywhen needed.

Selecting the viewVarious views are available in the Head-Up Dis‐play.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Head-up display"5. "Display mode"6. Select the desired setting:

▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-UpDisplay are active.

▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-UpDisplay are active. Individual displayssuch as Check Control messages can beselected individually.

The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Editing INDIVIDUALVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Head-up display"

Seite 160

CONTROLS Displays


5. "Configure INDIVIDUAL"6. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Adjusting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adapted to theambient light.The basic setting can be adjusted manually.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Head-up display"5. "Brightness"6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐

ness is obtained.7. Press the Controller.The brightness of the Head-Up Display can alsobe adjusted with the instrument lighting if thelow-beam headlights are switched on.

Adjusting the heightVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Head-up display"5. "Height"6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is

obtained.7. Press the Controller.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Adjusting the rotationThe Head-Up Display view can be rotated.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Head-up display"5. "Rotation"6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is

reached.7. Press the Controller.

Additional settingsVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Displays"4. "Head-up display"5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Speed Assistant": call up settings forspeed assistance.

▷ "Selection lists displayed in": set whetherthe selection lists are displayed in the in‐strument cluster or in the Head-Up Dis‐play.

▷ "Sport displays": show revolution counterand shift lights in the Head-Up Display.▷ "Off": the sport displays are not shown

in the Head-Up Display.▷ "In SPORT mode": the sport displays

are only shown in the SPORT drivingmode.

▷ "Always": the sport displays are per‐manently shown in the Head-Up Dis‐play.

▷ "Reduced height": if some of the informa‐tion is not in the driver's field of view, theinformation can be displayed in the lowerpart of the Head-Up Display.

Seite 161

Displays CONTROLS


Visibility of the displayThe visibility of the display on the Head-Up Dis‐play can be affected by the following:▷ Seat position.▷ Objects placed on the Head-Up Display

cover.▷ Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters.▷ Wet road.▷ Unfavourable lighting conditions.If the picture is distorted, have the basic settingschecked by a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

Special windscreenThe windscreen constitutes part of the system.The shape of the windscreen enables a sharpimage to be projected.A film in the windscreen prevents double imagesoccurring.For this reason, it is highly recommended for thespecial windscreen to be renewed by a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop if re‐quired.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Displays


LightsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Light and lightingSwitch in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to thesteering wheel.

Symbol FunctionRear fog light.

Night Vision, see page 191.

Lights off.Daytime driving lights.

Symbol FunctionSide lights.

Automatic driving lights control.Adaptive light functions.

Low-beam headlights.

Instrument lighting.

Parking light, right.

Parking light, left.

Automatic driving lightscontrolPrincipleDepending on ambient brightness, the systemswitches the low-beam headlights on or off auto‐matically, for example in a tunnel, at twilight andin rain or snow.

GeneralThe headlights may also come on when the sunis low against a blue sky.If the low-beam headlights are switched on man‐ually, the automatic driving lights control is deac‐tivated.

Seite 163

Lights CONTROLS


ActivatingPress the button on the light switch ele‐ment.

The LED in the button illuminates.The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the low-beamheadlights are switched on.

System limitsThe automatic driving lights control is no substi‐tute for using your own judgement to assess thelight conditions.The sensors are unable, for example, to recog‐nise fog or hazy weather. In such situations,switch on the light manually.

Side lights, low-beamheadlights and parkinglightGeneralIf the driver's door is opened when drive-readystate is switched off, the exterior lights areswitched off automatically.

Side lightsGeneralThe side lights can only be switched on in thelow speed range.

Switching onPress the button on the light switch ele‐ment.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster is illuminated.

The vehicle is illuminated all round.

You should not leave the side lights on for exten‐ded periods of time, since the vehicle batterycould discharge and it may no longer be possibleto switch on drive-ready state.

Switching offPress the button on the light switch ele‐ment or switch on the drive-ready state.

After switching on the drive-ready state, the au‐tomatic driving lights control is activated.

Low-beam headlightsSwitching on

Press the button on the light switch ele‐ment.

The low-beam headlights illuminate if drive-ready state is switched on.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster is illuminated.

To switch on the low-beam headlights as soonas the standby state is switched on, press thebutton again.

Switching offDepending on the country specifications, thelow-beam headlights may be switched off in thelow speed range.

Press the button on the light switch ele‐ment.

Parking lightsWhen parking the vehicle, it is possible to switchon a parking light on one side.

Button FunctionParking light, right on/off.

Parking light, left on/off.

Seite 164

CONTROLS Lights


Welcome lightsGeneralDepending on the equipment version, the exte‐rior lights of the vehicle can be individually adjus‐ted.


1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Exterior lighting"4. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Welcome lights"When the vehicle is unlocked, individuallight functions are switched on for a limi‐ted time.

▷ "Door handle lights"The door handles and the ground in frontof the doors are illuminated for a limitedtime.

Headlight courtesy delayfeatureGeneralIf the high-beam headlights are activated withstandby state switched on, the low-beam head‐lights remain on for a certain amount of time.

Setting the durationVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Exterior lighting"4. "Home lights"5. Select the desired setting.

Daytime driving lightsGeneralThe daytime driving lights illuminate if drive-ready state is switched on.

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries daytime driving lights are com‐pulsory, in which case the daytime driving lightscannot be deactivated.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Exterior lighting"4. "Daytime driving lights"The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Dynamic ECO light functionGeneralThe brightness of the low-beam headlights is re‐duced, depending on the speed and distancefrom the vehicle in front.


The LED in the button illuminates.Activating ECO PRO drive mode, see page 145.

Adaptive light functionsPrincipleAdaptive light functions makes it possible to illu‐minate the road responsively.

Seite 165

Lights CONTROLS


GeneralThe adaptive light functions consist of one sys‐tem or multiple systems, depending on theequipment version:▷ Adaptive Headlights, see page 166.▷ Variable light distribution, see page 166.▷ Cornering light, see page 166.▷ Roundabout light, see page 167.


The LED in the button illuminates.The adaptive light functions are active whendrive-ready state is switched on.

Adaptive HeadlightsGeneralThe beams from the headlights follow the roadahead in response to the steering angle andother parameters.So as not to dazzle oncoming vehicles, theAdaptive Headlights do not swivel to the oppo‐site side of the road when stationary.If the headlights are converted, see page 169,the Adaptive Headlights may only function to alimited extent.

Anticipatory headlights forbendsThe beams are adapted to the direction of theroad ahead even before entering or leaving abend.

Headlights for S-bendsThe beams are kept as straight as possible whendriving around S-bends.

Headlights for hairpin bendsThe cornering light is also switched on beforeentering hairpin bends.

Variable light distributionPrincipleThe variable light distribution enables even bet‐ter illumination of the carriageway.

GeneralThe light distribution is automatically adapted tothe speed.If equipment includes a navigation system, thelight distribution is automatically adapted de‐pending on the navigation data and speed.

City lightThe illuminated area of the low-beam headlightsis extended on the sides.

Motorway beam patternThe illumination width of the low-beam head‐lights is expanded.

Cornering lightIn sharp turns up to a specified speed, for exam‐ple in hairpin bends or when turning off, a corner‐ing light is added that illuminates the inside areaof the bend.The cornering light is activated automatically de‐pending on the steering angle or use of the turnindicators.The cornering light may be activated automati‐cally when driving in reverse, irrespective of thesteering angle.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Lights


Roundabout lightShortly before driving onto a roundabout, thecornering light on both sides is switched on. Theedge of the road is better illuminated. Shortly be‐fore leaving a roundabout, the cornering light onboth sides is switched off again.

Adaptive headlight beamthrow adjustmentThe adaptive headlight beam throw adjustmentcompensates for acceleration and braking ma‐noeuvres to prevent oncoming vehicles from be‐ing dazzled and to ensure optimum illuminationof the road.

High-beam assistancePrincipleHigh-beam assistance detects other road usersin good time and activates or deactivates thehigh beam depending on the traffic situation.

GeneralHigh-beam assistance ensures that the high-beam headlights are switched on when the trafficsituation allows. The high-beam headlights arenot switched on by the system in the low speedrange.The system responds to the lights from oncom‐ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and toambient lighting, for example in built-up areas.The high-beam headlights can be switched onand off manually at any time.If the vehicle is equipped with dazzle-free high-beam assistance, the high-beam headlights arenot switched off for oncoming vehicles or vehi‐cles driving ahead of you; instead, the areas ofthe beam that would otherwise dazzle the on‐coming traffic or traffic driving ahead are masked

off. In this case, the blue indicator lamp contin‐ues to illuminate.If the headlights are converted, see page 169,high-beam assistance may only function to alimited extent.

Activating1. Press the button on the light switch

element.The LED in the button illuminates.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the low-beamheadlights are switched on.

The system will switch automatically betweenlow-beam and high-beam headlights.

The blue indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster illuminates if the high beam isswitched on by the system.

High-beam assistance is deactivated by switch‐ing the high beams on and off manually, seepage 135.To reactivate high-beam assistance, press thebutton on the turn indicator lever.

Seite 167

Lights CONTROLS


Deactivating

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

System limitsHigh-beam assistance cannot replace the driv‐er's own judgement as to when to use the high-beam headlights. Therefore activate the dippedheadlights manually if the situation requires it.In the following situations, the system will not op‐erate or its operation will be impaired and yourintervention may be required:▷ In extremely unfavourable weather conditions

such as fog or heavy precipitation.▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as

pedestrians, cyclists or horseback riders orcarts, and when trains or ships are close tothe road, or when animals are crossing theroad.

▷ On narrow bends, on steep hilltops or in de‐pressions, when there is crossing traffic or ifthe view of oncoming vehicles on a motorwayis obstructed.

▷ In poorly-lit towns or where there are high re‐flective signs.

▷ When the windscreen in front of the rear-viewmirror is covered with condensation, dirt,stickers, labels, etc.

Laser high-beamheadlightsPrincipleThe beam throw of the high-beam headlights isincreased for even better illumination of the roadsurface.

GeneralWhen high-beam headlights are switched on, la‐ser high-beam headlight is switched on automat‐ically in addition to LED high-beam headlightfrom a speed of approximately 60 km/h, approxi‐mately 37 mph.Depending on the country variant, additional in‐formation can be found on the laser informationnotice on the headlights.

Fog lightsRear fog lightOperating requirementsBefore the rear fog light is switched on, the low-beam headlights must be switched on.

Switching on/offPress the button.

The yellow indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster is illuminated when the rearfog light is switched on.

If automatic driving lights control, see page 163,has been activated, the low-beam headlightsswitch on automatically when the rear fog light isswitched on.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Lights


Left-hand/right-hand trafficGeneralWhen driving in countries where vehicles driveon the opposite side of the road to your vehicle'scountry of registration, you will need to preventyour headlights from dazzling oncoming vehicles.

Switching over the headlightsVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Exterior lighting"4. "Right/left-hand traffic"5. Select the desired setting.

System limitsThe high-beam assistance may only function toa limited extent.The availability of the adaptive light functionsmight be restricted.

Instrument lightingOperating requirementsThe brightness can only be adjusted when theside lights or the low-beam headlights areswitched on.

AdjustingThe brightness can be set usingthe knurled wheel.

Interior lightGeneralDepending on equipment, the interior light, thefootwell lights, door entry lighting, ambient light‐ing and loudspeaker lighting are controlled auto‐matically.

OverviewButtons in the vehicle

Interior light

Reading lights

Switching the interior light on/offPress the button.

To switch off permanently: press and hold thebutton for approximately 3 seconds.The interior light in the rear can be switched onand off independently. The button is located onthe roof lining in the rear.

Switching the reading lightson/off

Press the button.

Seite 169

Lights CONTROLS


Ambient lightingGeneralDepending on the equipment, the lighting forsome of the interior lights can be set.

Switching on/offThe ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐cle is unlocked and switched off when the vehi‐cle is locked.If the ambient light was deactivated using iDrive,it is not switched on when the vehicle is un‐locked.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Interior lighting"4. "Ambient light"The selected setting is saved for the currentlyused driver profile.

Selecting the colour schemeVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Interior lighting"4. "Colour"5. Select the desired setting.

Adjusting the brightnessVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Interior lighting"4. "Brightness"5. Select the desired setting.

Dynamic lightVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Interior lighting"4. "Dynamic light"5. Select the desired setting.Individual actions, for example incoming calls oropen doors, are indicated by light effects.

Dimmed during the journeyVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Interior lighting"4. "Dimmed for night driving"The lighting in the interior is dimmed for certainlights during journeys in the dark.The selected setting is saved for the currentlyused driver profile.

Bowers & Wilkins DiamondSurround Sound SystemGeneralSome speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.The brightness can be set individually.The loudspeaker lighting is switched off whenthe loudspeakers are muted.

Switching on/offThe loudspeaker lighting is switched on whenthe vehicle is unlocked and switched off whenthe vehicle is locked.Via iDrive:


Seite 170

CONTROLS Lights


3. "Interior lighting"4. "Bowers & Wilkins"The selected setting is saved for the currentlyused driver profile.

Adjusting the brightnessVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Interior lighting"4. "Brightness"5. Select the desired setting.

Seite 171

Lights CONTROLS


SafetyVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed in


Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver2 Front airbag, front passenger3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag5 Knee airbag

Front airbagsFront airbags protect the driver and front pas‐senger in the event of a head-on collision wherethe protection of the seat belts alone would nolonger be sufficient.

Side airbagIn a side-on crash, the side airbag supports thebody at the side in the chest and pelvic area.

Head airbagThe head airbag supports the head in the eventof a side-on crash.

Seite 172

CONTROLS Safety


Knee airbagDepending on the equipment version:The knee airbag supports the legs in the event ofa head-on collision.

Protective effectGeneralAirbags are not activated in every collision, for ex‐ample in minor accidents and rear-end collisions.

Notes on achieving optimum airbageffectiveness

WARNINGIf the seat position is wrong or the deploymentarea of the airbag is restricted, the airbag sys‐tem cannot provide the intended protection ormay cause additional injuries when it deploys.There is a danger of injury or even death. Ob‐serve the following to achieve optimum protec‐tive effect.

▷ Keep your distance from the airbags.▷ Always grip the steering wheel on the steer‐

ing wheel rim. Place your hands in the3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to minimisethe risk of injury to hands or arms when theairbag deploys.

▷ Make sure that the front-seat passenger issitting correctly, in other words with feet orlegs in the footwell, not resting on the dash‐board.

▷ Make sure that vehicle occupants keep theirhead away from the side airbag.

▷ Do not position any other persons, animals orobjects between the airbags and persons.

▷ Keep the dashboard and windscreen in thearea of the passenger's side free, for exampledo not attach adhesive foil or covers and donot fit brackets for navigation devices or mo‐bile telephones.

▷ Do not attach anything to the airbag coverswith adhesive; never cover them or modifythem in any way.

▷ Do not use the front airbag cover on the frontpassenger's side as a tray.

▷ Covers, seat covers, cushions or other ob‐jects not specifically suitable for seats with in‐tegral side airbags must not be fitted to thefront seats.

▷ Do not hang items of clothing such as coatsor jackets over the backrests.

▷ Do not modify individual components of thesystem or its wiring in any way. This also ap‐plies to the covers of the steering wheel, thedashboard and seats.

▷ Do not dismantle the airbag system.Even if all these notes are complied with, de‐pending on the circumstances in which an acci‐dent occurs, certain injuries as a result of contactwith the airbag cannot be entirely ruled out.The noise caused by the deployment of an air‐bag may lead to temporary hearing loss for vehi‐cle occupants sensitive to noise.

Operational readiness of theairbag systemSafety notes

WARNINGIndividual components of the airbag systemmay be hot after airbag deployment. There is adanger of injury. Do not touch individual com‐ponents.

WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly can lead to a fail‐ure, a malfunction or accidental deployment ofthe airbag system. If there is a malfunction, theairbag system might not deploy as intended inan accident, in spite of the accident being ofthe appropriate severity. There is a danger of

Seite 173

Safety CONTROLS


injury or even death. Have the airbag systemtested, repaired or removed and disposed of bya Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Display in the instrument clusterWhen drive-ready state is switched on,the warning lamp in the instrument clus‐ter briefly illuminates in order to show the

operational readiness of the entire airbag systemand the belt tensioners.

Malfunction▷ The warning lamp does not illuminate

after drive-ready state is switched on.▷ The warning lamp is permanently illu‐

minated.Have the system checked.

Not for Australia/NewZealand: Key switch forfront passenger airbagsPrincipleWhen a child restraint system is used on thefront passenger seat, the front and side airbagson the front passenger side can be deactivatedusing the key switch for front passenger airbags.

GeneralThe front and side airbags for the front passen‐ger can be deactivated and reactivated using theintegrated key from the remote control.

Overview

The key switch for front passenger airbags is lo‐cated on the outside of the dashboard.

Deactivating the front passengerairbags

1. Insert the key and press inwards where nec‐essary.

2. While the key is pressed inwards, turn it tothe OFF position as far as it will go. Once thestop position has been reached, remove thekey.

3. Make sure that the key switch is in the endposition so that the airbags are deactivated.

The front passenger airbags are deactivated.The driver's airbags remain active.If a child restraint system is no longer fitted in thefront passenger seat, reactivate the front passen‐ger airbags so that they are triggered as intendedin the event of an accident.The airbag status is displayed on the indicatorlamp on the roof lining, see page 175.

Seite 174

CONTROLS Safety


Activating the front passengerairbags

1. Insert the key and press inwards where nec‐essary.

2. While the key is pressed inwards, turn it tothe ON position as far as it will go. Once thestop position has been reached, remove thekey.

3. Make sure that the key switch is in the endposition so that the airbags are activated.

The front passenger airbags are reactivated andcan deploy correctly if the need arises.

Indicator lamp for frontpassenger airbagsThe indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐bags in the roof lining shows the operating statusof the front passenger airbags.After switching on the drive-ready state, the lightilluminates briefly and then shows whether theairbags are activated or deactivated.

Display FunctionIf the front passenger airbag isactivated, the indicator lamp illu‐minates for a short period andthen extinguishes.

When front passenger airbagsare deactivated, the indicatorlamp remains illuminated.

Active pedestrianprotectionPrincipleThe active pedestrian protection system raisesthe bonnet if the vehicle's front end collides witha pedestrian. Sensors underneath the bumperare used for detection.

GeneralWhen the pedestrian protection system is trig‐gered, it creates deformation space underneaththe bonnet for the subsequent head impact.

Safety notes

WARNINGThe system can trigger inadvertently if contactis made with individual components of thehinges and bonnet locks. There is a danger ofinjury or damage to property. Do not touch indi‐vidual components of the hinges and bonnetlocks.

WARNINGChanges to the pedestrian protection systemcan lead to a failure, a malfunction or accidentaltriggering of the pedestrian protection system.There is a danger of injury or even death. Donot modify individual components of the pe‐destrian protection system or its wiring in anyway. Do not dismantle the system.

WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly can lead to a fail‐ure, a malfunction or accidental triggering of thesystem. If there is a malfunction, the systemmight not trigger as intended in an accident, inspite of the accident being of the appropriateseverity. There is a danger of injury or even

Seite 175

Safety CONTROLS


death. Have the system tested, repaired or re‐moved and disposed of by a Service Partner ofthe manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the system has triggered or is damaged, itsfunctions will be restricted, or will no longerwork at all. There is a danger of injury or evendeath.If the system has triggered or is damaged, haveit checked and renewed at a Service Partner ofthe manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

NOTEOpening the bonnet when the pedestrian pro‐tection system has triggered can result in dam‐age to the bonnet or the pedestrian protection.There is a danger of damage to property. Donot open the bonnet after the Check Controlmessage is displayed. Have a check performedby a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

System limitsThe active pedestrian protection system is onlytriggered at speeds between approximately30 km/h, approximately 18 mph and 55 km/h, ap‐proximately 34 mph.For safety reasons, the system may also triggerin rare instances where impact with a pedestriancannot be excluded beyond all doubt, for exam‐ple in the following situations:▷ Collision with objects such as a skip or a

boundary post.▷ Collision with animals.▷ Stone impact.▷ Driving into a snow drift.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is shown.The system has been triggered or isfaulty.

Immediately drive at moderate speed to a Serv‐ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop tohave the system checked and repaired.

Intelligent SafetyPrincipleIntelligent Safety enables Driver Assistance Sys‐tems to be operated centrally.

GeneralDepending on the equipment, Intelligent Safetyconsists of one or more systems which can helpto avoid the risk of a collision.▷ Front-end collision warning with light braking

function, see page 178.▷ Avoidance assistant, see page 181.▷ Junction warning with City braking function,

see page 184.▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐

tion, see page 188.▷ Night Vision with person and animal recogni‐

tion, see page 191.▷ Lane Departure Warning, see page 195.▷ Lane Change Warning, see page 198.▷ Side collision warning, see page 202.▷ Road priority warning, see page 206.▷ Wrong-way driving warning, see page 209.

Seite 176

CONTROLS Safety


Safety notes


WARNINGDisplays and warnings do not relieve you ofyour personal responsibility. System limitationscan mean that warnings or system responsesare not issued or are issued too late, incorrectlyor without justification. There is a danger of ac‐cidents. Adapt your driving style to the trafficconditions. Observe the traffic situation and in‐tervene actively if the situation warrants it.

WARNINGDue to system limitations, individual functionsmay not work properly when tow-starting/towing with activated Intelligent Safety Sys‐tems. There is a danger of accidents. Switch offall Intelligent Safety Systems before tow-start‐ing/towing.

OverviewButton in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety

Switching on/offSeveral Intelligent Safety Systems are automati‐cally active at the start of each journey. SeveralIntelligent Safety Systems are active dependingon the last setting.

Button StatusButton illuminates green: all IntelligentSafety Systems are switched on.

Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐ligent Safety Systems are switchedoff or are currently not available.

Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐gent Safety Systems are switched off.

Press the button:The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐

tems is shown.If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switchedoff, all systems are now switched on."Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on theequipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can beconfigured individually. The individual settingsare activated and saved for the currently useddriver profile. As soon as a setting is changed inthe menu, all settings in the menu are activated.

Press the button repeatedly. The set‐ting switches between the following:

"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems areswitched on. Basic settings are activated for thesub-functions, for example the setting for warn‐ing time."INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems areswitched on according to the individual settings.Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot beswitched off individually.

Press and hold the button:

Seite 177

Safety CONTROLS


All Intelligent Safety Systems are switched off.

Front-end collision warningwith light braking functionPrincipleThe system can help avoid accidents. If an acci‐dent cannot be avoided, the system helps to re‐duce the collision speed.The system warns of the possible risk of collisionand brakes automatically, as necessary.

GeneralThe system is controlled using the following sen‐sors, depending on the equipment:▷ Camera in the area of the rear-view mirror.▷ Radar sensor in front bumper.From speeds of approximately 5 km/h, 3 mph,the system provides a two-stage warning of anypossible risk of collision with vehicles. The timingof these warnings may vary depending on thecurrent driving situation.When deliberately moving closer to a vehicle, thefront-end collision warning and braking interven‐tion are activated later to avoid unjustified systemresponses.Depending on the equipment, the Driver Atten‐tion Camera detects the driver's view behaviourin the instrument cluster. The system alsochecks whether there are any visual impairmentspresent. The view behaviour and visibility condi‐tions also affect the point at which the warningsare issued.

Safety notes

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is adanger of accidents. Adapt your driving style to

the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situa‐tion and intervene actively if the situation war‐rants it.




Intelligent Safety

Seite 178

CONTROLS Safety


Camera


With radar sensor

The radar sensor is in the lower area of the frontbumper.Keep the radar sensor clean and unobstructed.

Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe system is automatically activated at the startof each journey.

Switching on/off manuallyPress the button.The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐

tems is shown.If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switchedoff, all systems are now switched on.

"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on theequipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can beconfigured individually. The individual settingsare activated and saved for the currently useddriver profile. As soon as a setting is changed inthe menu, all settings in the menu are activated.

Press the button repeatedly.The setting switches between the

following:"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems areswitched on. Basic settings are activated for thesub-functions."INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems areswitched on according to the individual settings.Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot beswitched off individually.

Press and hold the button.All Intelligent Safety Systems are

switched off.




Setting the warning timeVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Safety and warnings"5. "Front collision warning"6. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Early"

Seite 179

Safety CONTROLS


▷ "Medium"▷ "late": only acute warnings are displayed.

The selected time is saved for the currently useddriver profile.

Warning with braking functionDisplayIf there is a risk of collision with a detected vehi‐cle, a warning symbol is shown in the instrumentcluster and, if applicable, in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol MeasureSymbol illuminates red: advancewarning.Brake and increase the distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acousticsignal sounds: acute warning.Brake and perform an evasive ma‐noeuvre, if necessary.

Advance warningAn advance warning is shown, for example if adanger of collision is anticipated or there is a veryshort distance to a vehicle ahead.The driver must intervene personally if there isan acute warning.

Acute warning with braking functionAn acute warning is given when the vehicle is ap‐proaching another object at a high differentialspeed and there is an immediate risk of a colli‐sion.The driver must intervene personally if there isan acute warning. Depending on the driving sit‐uation, the acute warning may be supported by abrief jolt in the brakes.If the warning time setting is "late", the jolt doesnot occur.If necessary, the system can also assist by brak‐ing the vehicle automatically if there is a risk of acollision.

An acute warning can be triggered even withouta previous advance warning.

Brake interventionThe warning prompts the driver to intervene ac‐tively. When the brake is operated during a warn‐ing, the maximum necessary braking force is ap‐plied. Braking assistance requires that the brakepedal is depressed sufficiently quickly and firmlybeforehand.The system can also assist by braking the vehi‐cle automatically if there is a risk of a collision.At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to astop.City braking function: brake intervention takesplace at up to approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph.With radar sensor: brake intervention takes placeat up to approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.At speeds above approx. 210 km/h, 130 mph,the braking intervention takes the form of a briefjolt. There is no automatic deceleration.The brakes are only applied if driving stability hasnot been impaired, for example by deactivation ofDynamic Stability Control DSC.Braking can be discontinued either by depress‐ing the accelerator pedal or by actively movingthe steering wheel.The detection of objects may be limited. Takeinto account the detection range limits and thefunctional limitations.

System limitsSafety note

WARNINGThe system may not respond at all, or may re‐spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐tion due to limits of the system. There is a dan‐ger of accidents or damage to property.Observe the information on the system limitsand intervene actively if necessary.

Seite 180

CONTROLS Safety


Detection range

The detection ability of the system is limited.Only objects detected by the system are takeninto account.

Upper speed limitAt speeds over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph, thesystem is temporarily disabled. As soon as thespeed drops back below this value, the systemresponds once again according to its settings.

Detection rangeThe detection ability of the system is limited.For this reason, the system may fail to respondor only respond after a delay.It is possible that the following are not detected,for example:▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching it at

high speed.▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or braking heav‐

ily.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead.

Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations, for example:▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ On sharp bends.▷ When Driving Stability Control Systems are

limited or deactivated, for example DSC OFF.

▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐screen in front of the rear-view mirror is soiledor covered.


▷ Depending on the equipment version: if theradar sensors are soiled or covered.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engineusing the start/stop button.

▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐diately after vehicle delivery.

▷ When there is sustained glare due to oncom‐ing light, for example the sun is low in the sky.

Sensitivity of the warningsThe greater the sensitivity of the warning set‐tings, for example warning time, the more warn‐ings will be displayed. As a result, there may bean increased number of premature or unjustifiedwarnings and reactions.

Avoidance assistantPrincipleThe system supports the driver in certain situa‐tions when there is a need to avoid something,for example people or obstacles that appear sud‐denly.

GeneralThe system issues warnings and intervenes toprovide support if there is a possibility to performan evasive manoeuvre to the side. Sensors mon‐itor and detect the space around the vehicle. Thesystem then utilises the detected free space toperform the evasive manoeuvre by steering thevehicle safely and precisely in the directionspecified by the driver.

Seite 181

Safety CONTROLS


Safety notes



OverviewRadar sensorsThe radar sensors are in the bumpers.

Front bumper in middle.

Front bumper at side.

Rear bumper.Keep the bumpers clean and unobstructed in thearea of the radar sensors.

Camera


Operating requirements▷ Person warning with braking function, see

page 188, is switched on.

Seite 182

CONTROLS Safety


▷ Front-end collision warning with light brakingfunction, see page 178, is switched on.

▷ The sensors detect adequate space aroundthe vehicle.

Switching on/offThe system is automatically activated at the startof each journey.

Warning with avoidanceassistanceDisplay in the instrument clusterIf there is a risk of collision with a detected vehi‐cle, a warning symbol is shown in the instrumentcluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol MeasureSymbol illuminates red: advancewarning.Brake and increase the distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acousticsignal sounds: acute warning for ob‐stacles.Brake and perform an evasive ma‐noeuvre, if necessary.

Symbol flashes red and an acousticsignal sounds: acute warning forpeople.Brake and perform an evasive ma‐noeuvre, if necessary.

Acute warning with avoidanceassistanceAn acute warning is given when the vehicle is ap‐proaching another object at a high differentialspeed and there is an immediate risk of a colli‐sion.The driver must intervene personally if there isan acute warning. The system provides supportfor the driver's evasive manoeuvres if there is arisk of collision.

An acute warning can be triggered even withouta previous advance warning.



Detection range

The detection ability of the system is limited.Only objects detected by the system are takeninto account.

For this reason, the system may fail to respondor only respond after a delay.It is possible that the following are not detected:▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching it at

high speed.▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or braking heav‐

ily.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead.

Function restrictionThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations, for example:

Seite 183

Safety CONTROLS


▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ On sharp bends.▷ When Driving Stability Control Systems are

limited or deactivated, for example DSC OFF.▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐

screen in front of the rear-view mirror is dirtyor covered.

▷ If the camera has overheated due to exces‐sively high temperatures, and has been tem‐porarily deactivated.




▷ When there is sustained glare effect due tooncoming light, for example the sun is low inthe sky.

Junction warning with Citybraking functionPrincipleThe system can help to avoid accidents withcrossing traffic at junctions and crossroads. If anaccident cannot be avoided, the system helps toreduce the collision speed.The system warns of the possible risk of collisionin the urban speed range and brakes automati‐cally, as necessary.

GeneralThe system is controlled using the following sen‐sors:▷ Camera in the area of the rear-view mirror.▷ Side radar sensors in the front bumper.▷ Radar sensor in the middle of the front

bumper

A warning is given at junctions and crossroads ifthere is a risk of collision with crossing traffic.From speeds of approximately 10 km/h, 6 mph,the system provides a two-stage warning of anypossible risk of collision with vehicles. The timingof these warnings may vary depending on thecurrent driving situation.The Driver Attention Camera in the instrumentcluster detects the driver's view behaviour. Thesystem also checks whether there are any visualimpairments present. The view behaviour andvisibility conditions also affect the point at whichthe warnings are issued.

Detection rangeVehicles that cross the vehicle's direction oftravel can be detected by the system as soon asthese vehicles enter the detection range of thesystem.

Safety notes



Seite 184

CONTROLS Safety




Intelligent Safety

Camera


Radar sensorsThe radar sensors are located in the frontbumper.


Front bumper in middle.Keep the radar sensors clean and unobstructed.




Seite 185

Safety CONTROLS





switched off.





1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Safety and warnings"5. "Front collision warning"6. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Early"▷ "Medium"▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.

The selected time is saved for the currently useddriver profile.

Warning with braking functionDisplayIf there is a risk of collision with a detected vehi‐cle, a warning symbol is shown in the instrumentcluster and, if applicable, in the Head-Up Display.

Sym‐bol

Measure

Risk of collision with crossing vehiclefrom right.

Risk of collision with crossing vehiclefrom left.

Risk of collision with vehicle with un‐identifiable direction of travel.

Advance warning:Symbol illuminated in red: advancewarning in the case of vehicles cross‐ing your own direction of travel.The driver must intervene personally,for example by braking.

Acute warning:Symbol flashes red and an acousticsignal sounds: acute warning in thecase of vehicles crossing your owndirection of travel.Brake and perform an evasive ma‐noeuvre, if necessary.

Advance warningAn advance warning is displayed, for example, ifthere is an impending risk of a collision with acrossing vehicle.The driver must intervene personally if there isan acute warning.

Acute warning with braking functionAn acute warning is displayed if there is an immi‐nent risk of a collision with a crossing vehicle.

Seite 186

CONTROLS Safety


The driver must intervene personally if there isan acute warning. If necessary, the system canassist by braking the vehicle automatically ifthere is a risk of a collision.An acute warning can be triggered even withouta previous advance warning.

Brake interventionThe warning prompts the driver to intervene ac‐tively.The system can also assist by braking the vehi‐cle automatically if there is a risk of a collision.The vehicle can be braked until it comes to astop.The brakes are only applied if driving stability hasnot been impaired, for example by deactivation ofDynamic Stability Control DSC.Braking can be discontinued either by depress‐ing the accelerator pedal or by actively movingthe steering wheel.The detection of objects may be limited. Takeinto account the detection range limits and thefunctional limitations.



Upper speed limitThe system reacts to crossing vehicles if yourown speed is below approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph.

Detection range

The detection ability of the system is limited.For this reason, the system may fail to respondor only respond after a delay.

It is possible that the following are not detected,for example:▷ Crossing vehicles concealed by buildings, for

example.▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or braking heav‐

ily.▷ Crossing two-wheeled vehicles.▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.

Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations, for example:▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ On sharp bends.▷ When Driving Stability Control Systems are

limited or deactivated, for example DSC OFF.▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐

screen in front of the rear-view mirror is soiledor covered.


▷ If the radar sensors are soiled or covered.▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine

using the start/stop button.▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐

diately after vehicle delivery.

Seite 187

Safety CONTROLS



Sensitivity of the warningsThe greater the sensitivity of the warning set‐tings, for example warning time, the more warn‐ings will be displayed. As a result, there may bean increased number of premature or unjustifiedwarnings and reactions.

Person warning with Citylight braking functionPrincipleThe system can help to avoid accidents with pe‐destrians and cyclists. If an accident cannot beavoided, the system helps to reduce the collisionspeed.The system warns of the possible risk of collisionin the urban speed range and brakes automati‐cally, as necessary.

GeneralAt speeds above approx. 5 km/h, 3 mph, the sys‐tem warns of the possible risk of collision withpedestrians and cyclists.Pedestrians and cyclists are taken into account ifthey are located within the detection range of thesystem.The system is controlled using the following sen‐sors, depending on the equipment:▷ Camera in the area of the rear-view mirror.▷ Radar sensor in front bumper.

Detection range

The detection zone in front of the vehicle con‐sists of two parts:▷ Central zone, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.▷ Extended zone, arrow 2, to the right and left

of the central area.There is a risk of collision if persons are in thecentral zone. A warning is only given of personsin the extended zone if they are moving towardsthe central zone.

Safety notes



Seite 188

CONTROLS Safety




Intelligent Safety

Camera


With radar sensor

The radar sensor is in the lower area of the frontbumper.Keep the radar sensor clean and unobstructed.





following:"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems areswitched on. Basic settings are activated for thesub-functions."INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems areswitched on according to the individual settings.

Seite 189

Safety CONTROLS


Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot beswitched off individually.


switched off.




Warning with braking functionDisplayIf there is a risk of collision with a detected pe‐destrian or a cyclist, a warning symbol is shownin the instrument cluster and, where applicable,in the Head-Up Display.

A red symbol is displayed and an acous‐tic warning sounds.

Take action yourself immediately by braking orswerving.

Brake interventionThe warning prompts the driver to intervene ac‐tively. When the brake is operated during a warn‐ing, the maximum braking force is applied. Brak‐ing force assistance requires that the brake pedalis depressed sufficiently quickly and firmly be‐forehand.In addition, the system can assist with brake in‐tervention if there is the risk of a collision.At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to astop.

The brakes are only applied if driving stability hasnot been impaired, for example by deactivation ofDynamic Stability Control DSC.Braking can be discontinued either by depress‐ing the accelerator pedal or by actively movingthe steering wheel.The detection of objects may be limited. Takeinto account the detection range limits and thefunctional limitations.



Upper speed limitThe system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists ifyour own speed is below approx. 80 km/h,50 mph.

Detection rangeThe detection ability of the system is limited.As a result, the system may fail to give warningsor may give warnings late.It is possible that the following are not detected,for example:▷ Partially concealed pedestrians.▷ Pedestrians who are not detected as such,

because of the viewing angle or outline.▷ Pedestrians outside the detection range.▷ Pedestrians less than approximately 80 cm,

32 in tall.

Seite 190

CONTROLS Safety


Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality insome situations, for example:▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ On sharp bends.▷ If vehicle stability control systems are deacti‐

vated, for example DSC OFF.▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐







▷ In the dark.

Night Vision with personand animal recognitionPrincipleNight Vision with person and animal recognitionis a night vision system.An infrared camera records the area in front ofthe vehicle and warns of people and animals onthe road. Warm objects with a shape similar tohuman beings or animals are detected by thesystem. The thermal image can be shown in theControl Display as needed.Depending on equipment, the detected objectsare illuminated with the Dynamic Marker Light,see page 194, for better detection.

GeneralThermal image

The heat radiated by objects in the camera's fieldof view is shown.Warm objects are shown light and cold objectsdark.Recognition depends on the temperature differ‐ential in relation to the background and on theheat radiation of the object. Objects with a lowtemperature difference in relation to the environ‐ment or which are only radiating low levels ofheat can therefore only be detected to a limiteddegree.

For safety reasons, from speeds of approxi‐mately 5 km/h, 3 mph, and in low ambient light,the image is only shown when the low-beamheadlights are switched on.A still image is intermittently displayed for a frac‐tion of a second.

Person and animal recognition

The object detection and warning system onlyoperates in the dark.

Seite 191

Safety CONTROLS


Objects with a shape similar to a human andwhich are radiating sufficient levels of heat aredetected.The system also detects animals of a certainsize, for example deer.Image on the Control Display with thermal imageswitched on:▷ Persons detected by the system: in light yel‐

low.▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐

low.

Object detection range under good ambient con‐ditions:▷ Person recognition: up to approximately

100 m, 330 ft.▷ Recognition of larger animals: up to approxi‐

mately 150 m, 490 ft.▷ Recognition of animals of average size: up to

approximately 70 m, 230 ft.Environmental influences can restrict the availa‐bility of object detection.If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is ina built-up area, animal detection is temporarilyswitched off.

Safety notes


WARNINGDisplays and warnings do not relieve you ofyour personal responsibility. System limitationscan mean that warnings or system responsesare not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly

or without justification. There is a danger of ac‐cidents. Adapt your driving style to the trafficconditions. Observe the traffic situation and in‐tervene actively if the situation warrants it.


Intelligent Safety

Thermal image

Camera

At low outside temperatures, the camera is auto‐matically heated.

Seite 192

CONTROLS Safety


With the vehicle's lights switched on, the cameralens is cleaned at certain intervals when thewindscreen washer system, see page 137, is op‐erated.

Switching onSwitching on automaticallyThe system is automatically activated at the startof each journey in the dark.

Switching on the thermal imageIn addition to the warning function, the thermalimage of the Night Vision camera can be dis‐played on the Control Display. This function hasno effect on object detection.

Press the button.

The camera image is displayed on the ControlDisplay.

To adjust the thermal imageWhen the thermal image is switched on, it is pos‐sible to adjust the brightness and contrast.Via iDrive:

1. Select brightness or contrast:▷ "Brightness".▷ "Contrast".

2. Set the desired value.

Warning functionDisplay

Symbol MeaningPerson warning.

Animal warning.

Symbol MeaningSystem illuminates red. Advance warning.

Symbol flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds.

Acute warning.

The displayed symbol may vary and shows theside of the carriageway on which the person oranimal has been detected.

Warning in the case of persons oranimals in dangerIf there is a risk of collision with a detected per‐son or animal, a warning symbol is shown in theinstrument cluster and in the Head-Up Display.Although the shape and heat radiation are evalu‐ated, false alarms cannot be ruled out.

Warning zone in front of the vehicle

The warning zone for the person warning con‐sists of two parts:▷ Central zone, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.▷ Extended zone, arrow 2, to the right and left

of the central area.For animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐tween the central or extended zone.The entire zone follows the direction of the vehi‐cle according to the steering angle and changeswith vehicle speed. As vehicle speed increases,the range becomes longer and wider, for exam‐ple.

Seite 193

Safety CONTROLS


Advance warningAn advance warning for persons is displayed if aperson is detected in the central zone directly infront of the vehicle or to the right and left in theextended zone.Advance warning for animals is displayed if ananimal is detected in front of the vehicle.In the event of an advance warning, brake or takeevasive action.

Acute warningAcute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐mal is detected in the immediate vicinity of thevehicle.In the event of an acute warning, immediatelybrake or take evasive action.

Display in the Head-Up DisplayThe warning is displayed simultaneously in theHead-Up Display and in the instrument cluster.

System limitsBasic limitsThe system may have limited functionality insome situations, for example:▷ On steep crests or dips and on tight bends.▷ If the camera is dirty or damaged.▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ At very high outside temperatures.

Limits of person and animalrecognitionIn some situations, it is possible that persons arerecognised as animals and animals as persons.Small animals are not detected by object recog‐nition, even if they can be clearly seen in the im‐age.Detection may be limited in the following circum‐stances, for example:

▷ Where persons or animals are partly or whollyconcealed, in particular their head.

▷ Where persons are not standing upright, forexample if they are lying down.

▷ Cyclists on non-conventional cycles, for ex‐ample recumbent cycles.

▷ If the system has been physically damaged,for example after an accident.

Dynamic Marker LightGeneral

In addition to the warning, detected objects areilluminated with the Dynamic Marker Light.The Dynamic Marker Light is available from aspeed of approx. 20 km/h, 12 mph.The object is illuminated until it is no longer inthe warning zone.The indicator lamp for the high-beam headlightsis illuminated when the Dynamic Marker Light isactivated.The Dynamic Marker Light is a component of theLED or laser headlights.

Operating requirements▷ Automatic driving lights control is active.▷ Low-beam headlights or high-beam head‐

lights are illuminated.▷ No light sources or illuminated road users in

the warning zone.

Seite 194

CONTROLS Safety



1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Safety and warnings"5. "Dynamic Marker Light"

Switching off temporarilyOperate the headlight flasher while the DynamicMarker Light is illuminated. The Dynamic MarkerLight is switched off for the current warning.

Lane Departure WarningPrincipleThe Lane Departure Warning issues a warning ifthe vehicle leaves the road or its lane.

GeneralThis camera-based system warns once a mini‐mum speed has been reached.The minimum speed is country-specific and isdisplayed in the menu for the Intelligent SafetySystems.Warnings are issued by means of a steeringwheel vibration. The strength of the steeringwheel vibration can be adjusted.The system does not issue a warning if the driverindicates before leaving the driving path.If a lane marking is crossed in the speed rangeup to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph, the system in‐tervenes not only by vibrating but also with abrief active steering intervention. The systemthereby helps to keep the vehicle in lane.

Safety notes

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility to assess the course of theroad and the traffic situation. There is a dangerof accidents. Adapt your driving style to thetraffic conditions. Observe the traffic situationand intervene actively if the situation warrants it.In the event of a warning, do not move thesteering wheel with unnecessary force.


Operating requirementsThe lane marking must be detected by the cam‐era in order for the Lane Departure Warning tobe active.


Intelligent Safety

Seite 195

Safety CONTROLS


Camera


Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe Lane Departure Warning is activated auto‐matically at the start of a journey if the functionwas switched on the last time the engine wasstopped.




following:"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems areswitched on. Basic settings are activated for thesub-functions.

"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems areswitched on according to the individual settings.Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot beswitched off individually.


switched off.





1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Safety and warnings"5. "Lane departure warning"6. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Early": the system issues an early warn‐ing whenever a hazardous situation is de‐tected.

▷ "Medium": the system meets standar‐dised safety requirements.

▷ "Reduced": depending on the situation,some warnings are suppressed, for exam‐ple during overtaking manoeuvres withoutusing turn indicators or when deliberatelycrossing driving path lines on bends.

▷ "Off": no warnings are given.The selected setting is saved for the currentlyused driver profile.

Seite 196

CONTROLS Safety


To adjust the strength of thesteering wheel vibrationVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Feedback via steering wheel"5. Select the desired setting.The setting is accepted for all Intelligent SafetySystems and saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Switching steering interventionon/offSteering intervention can be separately switchedon and off for Lane Change Warning or Lane De‐parture Warning.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Safety and warnings"5. "Lane departure warning"6. "Steering intervention"The selected setting is saved for the currentlyused driver profile.

Display in the instrument clusterThe symbol is illuminated green: a lanemarking has been detected on at leastone side of the vehicle and warnings can

be issued.

Warning functionWhen leaving the laneIf the vehicle leaves the lane and the lane mark‐ing is detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐

cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐ting.If the turn indicator is switched on before chang‐ing lanes, no warning is issued.

Steering interventionIf a lane marking is crossed in the speed rangeup to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph, the systemmay intervene not only by vibrating but also witha brief active steering intervention. The steeringintervention helps to keep the vehicle in lane.Steering intervention can be felt at the steeringwheel, and can be overridden manually at anytime.

Warning signalIf the system executes an active steering inter‐vention multiple times within 3 minutes withoutthe driver touching the steering wheel, an acous‐tic warning is emitted. A short warning signalsounds on the second steering intervention. Alonger warning signal sounds from the thirdsteering intervention onwards.A Check Control message is also displayed.The warning signal and Check Control messagetell the driver to pay more attention to the lane.

Cancellation of the warningThe warning is interrupted in the following situa‐tions:▷ Automatically after approximately 3 seconds.▷ On returning to the correct lane.▷ If the vehicle is braking heavily.▷ On indicating.▷ If Dynamic Stability Control DSC intervenes.

Seite 197

Safety CONTROLS




Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations, for example:▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible,

merging/separating or ambiguous lane mark‐ings; for example, in areas where there areroadworks.

▷ If lane markings are covered by snow, ice, dirtor water.

▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.▷ If lane markings are not white.▷ If lane markings are obscured by objects.▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead.▷ When there is sustained glare due to oncom‐

ing light, for example the sun is low in the sky.▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐





A Check Control message may be displayed inthe event of limited functionality.

Lane Change WarningPrincipleThe Lane Change Warning detects vehicles inthe blind spot, or if vehicles are approaching frombehind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issuedin various gradations in these situations.

General

From a minimum speed, two radar sensors in therear bumper monitor the area behind and next tothe vehicle.The minimum speed is shown in the menu forthe Intelligent Safety Systems.The system indicates when vehicles are in theblind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from therear in an adjacent lane, arrow 2.The light in the exterior mirror illuminates at adimmed level.

Before changing lanes with the turn indicatorswitched on, the system issues a warning in theabove situations.The light in the exterior mirror flashes and thesteering wheel vibrates.Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds ofup to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph, the systemcan respond with a brief active steering interven‐tion and thus help to return the vehicle to its lane.The steering intervention is carried out above aminimum speed. This minimum speed is shownon the Control Display in the steering interven‐tion menu, see page 200.

Seite 198

CONTROLS Safety


Safety notes




Intelligent Safety

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located in the rearbumper.Keep the bumpers clean and unobstructed in thearea of the radar sensors.

Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe Lane Change Warning is reactivated auto‐matically at the start of a journey if the functionwas switched on the last time the engine wasstopped.





Seite 199

Safety CONTROLS




switched off.





1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Safety and warnings"5. "Lane change warning"6. Select the desired setting.

"Off": no warning is output for this setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.


1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Feedback via steering wheel"5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is accepted for all Intelligent SafetySystems and saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Vehicles with side collision warning:steering intervention on/offSteering intervention can be separately switchedon and off for Lane Change Warning or Lane De‐parture Warning.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Safety and warnings"5. "Lane change warning"6. "Steering intervention"The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Warning functionLight in the exterior mirror

Advance warningThe dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicateswhen vehicles are in the blind spot or are ap‐proaching from the rear.

Acute warningIf the turn indicator is switched on while a vehicleis in the critical area, the steering wheel vibratesbriefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashesbrightly.

Seite 200

CONTROLS Safety


The warning is terminated when the other vehi‐cle has left the critical area or the turn signal isdeactivated.

Vehicles with side collision warningIf there is no response to the steering wheel vi‐brating and a lane marking is crossed at speedsof up to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph, the systemintervenes if necessary with a brief active steer‐ing intervention. The steering intervention helpsto return the vehicle to its lane. Steering inter‐vention can be felt at the steering wheel, and canbe overridden manually at any time.

Flashing of the lightWhen the vehicle is unlocked, the system per‐forms a self-test by flashing the light.



Upper speed limitAt speeds over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph, thesystem is temporarily disabled.At speeds below approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph,the system once again responds according tothe setting.

Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations, for example:▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is sig‐

nificantly higher than the driver's own speed.

▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,

for example by stickers.▷ When a projecting load is being transported.In vehicles with side collision warning, the steer‐ing intervention may be limited in the followingsituations, for example:▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible,



▷ If lane markings are not white.▷ If lane markings are obscured by objects.▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead.▷ When there is sustained glare due to oncom‐

ing light, for example the sun is low in the sky.▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐





A Check Control message is displayed in theevent of limited functionality.

Warning displaysDepending on the selected setting for warnings,for example the warning time, it is possible formore warnings to be displayed. As a result, theremay be an increased number of premature warn‐ings about critical situations.

Seite 201

Safety CONTROLS


Side collision warningPrincipleThe system helps to avoid potential side colli‐sions.

General

Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor thearea adjacent to the vehicle from a minimumspeed up to approx. 210 km/h, 130 mph.The minimum speed is country-specific and isdisplayed in the menu for the Intelligent SafetySystems.A front camera detects the position of the lanemarkings.If another vehicle is detected adjacent to the ve‐hicle – for example, with the potential of a sidecollision – the system helps the driver to avoid acollision. For this purpose, the system issues awarning in the form of the LED on the exteriormirror flashing and the steering wheel vibrating.The system may execute an active steering in‐tervention.

Safety notes

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is adanger of accidents. Adapt your driving style tothe traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situa‐

tion and intervene actively if the situation war‐rants it.


Operating requirementsThe lane markings must be detected by thecamera in order for the side collision warningwith steering intervention to be active.


Intelligent Safety

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors are in the bumpers.

Seite 202

CONTROLS Safety


Front bumper.


Camera


Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe side collision warning is activated automati‐cally at the start of a journey if the function wasswitched on the last time the engine was stop‐ped.






switched off.

Seite 203

Safety CONTROLS






1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Feedback via steering wheel"5. Select the desired setting.The setting is accepted for all Intelligent SafetySystems and saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Warning functionLight in the exterior mirror

Acute warningIn the event of imminent collision danger, thelight in the exterior mirror flashes and the steer‐ing wheel starts vibrating.

Subsequently, an active steering interventionmay be executed to avoid the collision and tokeep the vehicle safely within its driving lane.Steering intervention can be felt at the steeringwheel, and can be overridden manually at anytime.A Check Control message is shown in the eventof a steering intervention.



Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations, for example:▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is sig‐

nificantly higher than the driver's own speed.▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,

for example by stickers.▷ When a projecting load is being transported.▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible,



▷ If lane markings are not white.▷ If lane markings are obscured by objects.▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead.

Seite 204

CONTROLS Safety



▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐screen in front of the rear-view mirror is soiledor covered.




A Check Control message is displayed in theevent of limited functionality.

Prevention of rear collisionPrincipleThe system responds to vehicles approachingfrom behind.

General

Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitorthe area behind the vehicle.If a vehicle is approaching from behind at appro‐priate speed, the system responds as follows:▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on to

warn the traffic behind if there is potential fora rear collision.

Safety notes



OverviewRadar sensors

The radar sensors are located in the rearbumper.Keep the bumpers clean and unobstructed in thearea of the radar sensors.

Switching on/offThe system is automatically activated at the startof each journey.

Seite 205

Safety CONTROLS


The system is deactivated in the following situa‐tions:▷ When reversing.

System limitsThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations:▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is sig‐

nificantly higher than own speed.▷ If the approaching vehicle is travelling slowly.▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced over or covered,

for example by stickers.▷ When a projecting load is being transported.

Road priority warningPrincipleThe system provides support in situations wherethe signs indicate that the driver must give way.

GeneralThe system uses a camera to evaluate the roadsigns.The navigation system forwards information re‐garding the route to the system.A warning is given if a right-of-way is about to beviolated in the following traffic situations, for ex‐ample:▷ At a junction.▷ At a T-junction.▷ On a slip road.▷ At a roundabout.The system warns in the road speed range of10 km/h, approx. 6 mph to 65 km/h, approx.40 mph.

Safety notes



Operating requirementsThe road priority situation must be unambigu‐ously indicated with road signs.


Intelligent Safety

Seite 206

CONTROLS Safety


Camera


Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe road priority warning is activated automati‐cally at the start of a journey if the function wasswitched on the last time the engine was stop‐ped.







switched off.





1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Safety and warnings"5. "Give way warning"6. ▷ "Early"

▷ "Medium"▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.▷ "Off": no warnings are displayed.Select the desired setting.

The selected setting is saved for the currentlyused driver profile.

Warning functionGeneralThe system warns in two stages:▷ Advance warning: visually by means of a

warning symbol in the instrument cluster.

Seite 207

Safety CONTROLS


▷ Acute warning: visually by means of a warningsymbol in the instrument cluster and with anadditional acoustic signal.

The timing of the warnings may vary dependingon the current driving situation and the set warn‐ing time.The following road signs are taken into accountfor the road priority warning:

Sign MeaningGive way signs:These signs trigger an ad‐vance warning.

Stop signs:These signs trigger an ad‐vance warning and an acutewarning.

Advance warningIf there is a risk that road priority is about to beignored, one of the following symbols appears inthe instrument cluster:

Symbol MeaningGive way.

Stop.

In the event of an advance warning, brake or takeevasive action.

Acute warningIf there is a serious risk that road priority is aboutto be ignored, an acoustic signal sounds and the

following symbol is displayed in the instrumentcluster:

Symbol MeaningStop.

In the event of an acute warning, immediatelybrake or take evasive action.

Display in the Head-Up DisplayDepending on the equipment version, the warn‐ing is displayed in the Head-Up Display at thesame time as in the instrument cluster.



No WarningThe system provides no warning in the followingsituations, for example:▷ In road priority situations without 'Give Way'

or 'Stop' signs.▷ At junctions with active light signal systems,

for example traffic lights.

Function restrictionThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations, for example:▷ If the road signs are ambiguous.

Seite 208

CONTROLS Safety


▷ If the road signs are fully or partially coveredor soiled.

▷ If the road signs are poorly visible or twisted.▷ If the road signs are too small or too large.▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ At steep crests/hilltops or dips.▷ In tight bends.▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐






▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,outdated or not available.

▷ It may not be possible to use the system in allcountries.

Wrong-way driving warningPrincipleThe system issues a warning if you are about todrive the wrong way on motorways, roundaboutsand one-way streets.A warning is shown in the instrument cluster and,where applicable, in the Head-Up Display and anacoustic signal sounds as soon as a road is en‐tered in the wrong direction of travel.

GeneralDepending on the equipment, the system willcheck the traffic situation based on navigationdata and road signs.

The system will take into account road signssuch as the following:▷ No entry.▷ Roundabout.▷ Direction arrows: keep right/left signs.

Safety notes



Operating requirementsThe road layout ahead must be unambiguouslyindicated by road signs.

Seite 209

Safety CONTROLS



Intelligent Safety

Camera


Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe wrong-way driving warning is automaticallyactivated at the start of each journey.

Switching off manuallyIf all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched offtogether via the button, the wrong-way drivingwarning is also switched off.

Press and hold the button:

The wrong-way driving warning and all IntelligentSafety Systems are switched off.




Warning functionA warning is shown in the instrument cluster and,where applicable, in the Head-Up Display and anacoustic signal sounds as soon as a motorway,roundabout or one-way street is entered in thewrong direction of travel.



No WarningThe system provides no warning in the followingsituations, for example:▷ If the road layout is not indicated by road

signs.

Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality in sit‐uations such as the following and an incorrect

Seite 210

CONTROLS Safety


warning, or no wrong-way driving warning at all,may be output:▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ If signs are fully or partially obscured by ob‐

jects, stickers or paint.▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead.▷ In the case of bright oncoming light or strong

reflections.▷ When the windscreen in front of the rear-view

mirror is covered with condensation, dirt,stickers, etc.


▷ As a result of incorrect detection by the cam‐era.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐tem.

▷ If there are deviations in relation to navigation,for example due to changes in road routing.

▷ In the case of electronic road signs.▷ If traffic signs do not correspond to the stand‐

ard.▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐

diately after vehicle delivery.▷ If signs are detected that apply to a parallel

road.▷ In the case of country-specific signs or road

layouts.▷ It may not be possible to use the system in all

countries.

With steering and lanecontrol assistant:emergency stop assistantPrincipleIf the driver is no longer capable of driving, thesystem helps to bring the vehicle safely to astandstill.

GeneralOn motorways or similar roads, the systemsteers the vehicle to the hard shoulder if possi‐ble. On other roads or in heavy traffic, the vehicleis brought to a standstill in the lane it is currentlyin.The emergency stop function is not triggeredautomatically. The emergency stop function canonly be triggered manually by the vehicle occu‐pants.

Overview

Parking brake

Operating requirements▷ The function can be activated from a speed

of around 10 km/h, approx. 6 mph.▷ Lane changes are carried out at speeds of

approx. 70 km/h, 43 mph to 100 km/h,62 mph.

Activating the emergency stopfunction

Briefly press the switch for the parkingbrake to activate the emergency stop func‐

tion.▷ When the switch is released, an automatic

lane change is triggered if necessary.▷ The system takes over vehicle control for a

maximum of 2 minutes.▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on.

Seite 211

Safety CONTROLS


▷ An emergency call is triggered.

Cancelling the emergency stopfunctionAt any time during the process, the driver cancancel the emergency stop function by activelytaking control of the vehicle.For example, the emergency stop function canbe cancelled in the following situations:▷ When steering.▷ On indicating.▷ When accelerating.▷ When the hazard warning lights are switched

off.▷ When the emergency call is cancelled.▷ When the selector lever position is changed

while at a standstill.▷ When the driver's foot is still on the accelera‐

tor pedal when the function is triggered.▷ When the parking brake switch is pressed.

When the vehicle is at a standstillAs soon as the vehicle is at a standstill, the sys‐tem configures the following settings:▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.▷ Parking brake is applied.▷ Interior light is switched on.▷ Central locking system is unlocked.

System limitsOnly use the system if the driver is no longer tooperate the vehicle.The system cannot replace the kind of perform‐ance that would be delivered by a driver who iscapable of driving.

Dynamic brake lightsPrincipleThe brake lights flash to warn road users behindyour vehicle that you are performing an emer‐gency braking manoeuvre. This can reduce therisk of a rear-end collision.

General

▷ Normal braking: brake lights illuminate.▷ Heavy braking: brake lights flash.Shortly before the vehicle comes to a standstill,the hazard warning lights are activated.To switch off the hazard warning lights:▷ Accelerate.▷ Press the hazard warning lights button.

PostCrash – iBrakePrincipleThe system can automatically bring the vehicleto a standstill in certain accident situations with‐out the involvement of the driver. The risk of afurther collision and its consequences canthereby be reduced.

At a standstillAfter the vehicle has come to a halt, the brake isreleased automatically.

Seite 212

CONTROLS Safety


Harder vehicle brakingIn certain situations, it may be necessary to bringthe vehicle to a standstill more quickly.To do this, for a short time the braking pressureapplied when stepping on the brake pedal mustbe higher than the braking pressure achieved bythe automatic braking function. This action inter‐rupts the automatic braking process.

Cancelling automatic brakingIn certain situations, it may be necessary to can‐cel automatic braking, for example for an evasivemanoeuvre.Cancel automatic braking:▷ By depressing the brake pedal.▷ By depressing the accelerator pedal.

Attentiveness assistantGeneralThe system can detect decreasing attentivenessor the onset of fatigue in the driver on long mo‐notonous journeys, for example on motorways. Inthis situation, it is recommended that you take abreak.

Safety note

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility to assess your physicalcondition correctly. Increasing inattention or fa‐tigue might not be detected, or may not be de‐tected in good time. There is a danger of acci‐dents. Make sure that the driver is rested andalert. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ditions.

FunctionThe system is switched on every time drive-ready state is switched on.After commencement of the journey, the systemadapts to the driver so that an decrease in atten‐tion or fatigue can be detected.This process considers the following criteria:▷ Personal driving style, for example, steering.▷ Driving conditions, for example, time of day,

duration of journey.▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of

the driver with a Driver Attention Camera, forexample head position.

The system is active from approx. 70 km/h,43 mph and can also display a recommendationto take a break.

Recommendation to take a breakAdjustingThe attentiveness assistant is automatically ac‐tive every time drive-ready state is switched onand can thus display break recommendations.Break recommendations can also be switchedon or off and adjusted via iDrive.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Break recommendation"5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Off": no break recommendation is is‐sued.

▷ "Standard": the break recommendation isissued with a defined value.

▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation isissued earlier.

Seite 213

Safety CONTROLS


DisplayIf the driver's attention drops or he/she becomestired, a message is shown on the Control Displaywith the recommendation to take a break.The following settings can be selected duringthe display:▷ "Do not ask again"▷ "Places to stop"▷ "Remind me later"

The break recommendation is repeated after20 minutes.

After a break, another break recommendationcannot be displayed until after approximately45 minutes at the earliest.

System limitsThe system may have limited functionality in sit‐uations such as the following and an incorrectwarning, or no warning at all, may be output:▷ If the time is set incorrectly.▷ When the speed is predominantly below ap‐

prox. 70 km/h, 43 mph.▷ If a sporty driving style is adopted, for exam‐

ple sharp acceleration or fast cornering.▷ In active driving situations, for example fre‐

quent lane changes.▷ In poor road conditions.▷ In strong crosswinds.The system is reset approximately 45 minutesafter the vehicle is stopped, for example whentaking a break during a long motorway journey.

Seite 214

CONTROLS Safety


Driving Stability Control SystemsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Anti-lock Brake System,ABSABS prevents the wheels from locking when thebrakes are applied.Steering control is retained even in the event offull braking, thereby enhancing active roadsafety.ABS is ready to operate each time the engine isstarted.

Brake assistWhen the brake pedal is depressed quickly, thesystem automatically applies maximum brakingpower assistance. By doing so, the braking dis‐tance is kept as short as possible in full brakingsituations. The advantages offered by the Anti-lock Brake System ABS can also be utilised tothe full.The pressure on the brake should be maintainedfor the duration of the full-braking process.

Adaptive brake assistIn conjunction with Active Cruise Control, thissystem ensures that the brake responds evenmore quickly when braking in critical situations.

Drive-off assistantPrincipleThe system provides support when driving off onupward gradients.

Driving off1. Hold the vehicle in place by depressing the

foot brake.2. Release the foot brake and drive off without

delay.The vehicle is held for approximately 2 secondsafter the foot brake has been released.Depending on the vehicle's load, the vehicle mayroll backwards a little.

Dynamic Stability ControlDSCPrincipleThe system reduces engine power output andapplies the brakes on individual wheels therebyhelping, within the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics, to keep the vehicle safely on course.

GeneralDSC detects the following unstable driving con‐ditions, for example:▷ Loss of traction at the rear which can lead to

oversteer.

Seite 215

Driving Stability Control Systems CONTROLS


▷ Loss of grip of the front wheels which canlead to understeer.

Safety notes

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐not respond independently and appropriately inall traffic conditions. There is a danger of acci‐dents. Adapt your driving style to the trafficconditions. Observe the traffic situation and in‐tervene actively if the situation warrants it.

WARNINGWhen driving with a roof load, for example witha roof rack, the higher centre of gravity canmean that driving safety is no longer guaran‐teed in critical driving situations. There is a dan‐ger of accidents or damage to property. Do notdeactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC whendriving with a roof load.


DSC OFF

Deactivate/activate DSCGeneralDriving stability during acceleration and corneringis restricted if DSC is deactivated.To assist driving stability, re-activate DSC assoon as possible.

Deactivating DSCHold the button down until DSC OFF isdisplayed in the instrument cluster and

the DSC OFF indicator lamp is illuminated.

Activating DSCPress the button.DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamps are extinguished.

DisplayIn the instrument clusterDSC OFF is displayed in the instrument clusterwhen DSC is deactivated.

Indicator and warning lampsIf the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC isdeactivated.

If the indicator lamp is flashing: DSC isregulating the acceleration and brakingforces.

If the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC hasfailed.

Seite 216

CONTROLS Driving Stability Control Systems


Dynamic Traction ControlDTCPrincipleDTC is a variant of Dynamic Stability ControlDSC and is optimised for forward momentum.In particular road conditions, for example roadson which snow has not been cleared or uncon‐solidated ground, the system ensures maximumforward momentum but with somewhat limiteddriving stability.

GeneralActivating DTC provides maximum traction. Driv‐ing stability during acceleration and cornering islimited.Activating DTC briefly may be useful in thefollowing situations:▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-

covered roads.▷ Starting in deep snow or on a loose surface.▷ Driving with snow chains.


DSC OFF

Activate/deactivate DTCActivating DTC

Press the button.TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp isilluminated.

Deactivating DTCPress the button again.TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator

light are extinguished.

DisplayDisplay in the instrument clusterWhen DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayedin the instrument cluster.

Indicator and warning lampsThe indicator lamp is illuminated: DTChas been activated.

Automatic programme changeIn certain situations, DSC is activated automati‐cally:▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐

tion ACC is activated.▷ In the event of a braking intervention by the

Intelligent Safety Systems.▷ In the event of a flat tyre.

xDrivePrinciplexDrive is the four-wheel drive system of the vehi‐cle. The interaction between xDrive and otherdrive control systems, such as Dynamic StabilityControl DSC, further optimises traction and driv‐

Seite 217

Driving Stability Control Systems CONTROLS


ing dynamics. xDrive distributes the drive forcesvariably between the front and rear axles accord‐ing to the driving situation and road surface con‐ditions.The drive experience switch makes it possible tochange the four-wheel drive distribution fromtraction-based to sport-based.

Efficient4x4Efficient4x4 reduces consumption by using thefour-wheel drive system according to require‐ments.

M Sport differentialThe active M Differential blocks the rear axistransmission steplessly, depending on the drivesituation. This prevents the spinning of a singlerear wheel in order to provide optimum tractionin all driving situations.The driver is responsible for a driving style ap‐propriate to the situation.

Integral Active SteeringPrincipleThe Integral Active Steering increases agility andenables more direct steering behaviour.

GeneralIntegral Active Steering is a combination of a var‐iable steering ratio and rear-wheel steering.The variable steering ratio amplifies the steeringangle when manoeuvring, thus making the steer‐ing more direct. The rear-wheel steering increa‐ses manoeuvrability at low speeds by turning therear wheels slightly in the opposite direction tothe front wheels.At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned inthe same direction as the front wheels. This re‐sults in, for example better directional stabilityand a smoother change of direction.

In critical driving situations, for example over‐steer, Integral Active Steering can stabilise thevehicle through selective steering of the rearwheels before the driver intervenes.

ConfigurationThe system offers various configurations.

Drive mode Integral Active SteeringCOMFORTECO PRO

Comfortable, for optimumtravel comfort

SPORT Dynamic, for higher agility

The different configurations are assigned to thedifferent drive modes of the drive experienceswitch, see page 143.

Operation with snow chainsTo ensure that wheels can move as requiredwhen using snow chains, the rear-wheel steeringof the Integral Active Steering must be switchedoff when snow chains are fitted.Setting operation with snow chains, seepage 316.

MalfunctionIf a malfunction occurs, the steering wheel mustbe turned further, whilst at high speeds, the vehi‐cle responds more sensitively to steering wheelmovements.The stabilising function may be deactivated.Drive cautiously and think well ahead.Have the system checked by a Service Partnerof the manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

Seite 218

CONTROLS Driving Stability Control Systems


Driver Assistance SystemsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Manual Speed LimiterPrincipleThe system can be used to set a speed limit sothat speed restrictions are not exceeded.

GeneralThe system enables speeds from a value of30 km/h/20 mph and above to be set as a speedlimit. Below the set speed limit, the vehicle canbe driven without restriction.

OverviewButtons on the steering wheel

Button FunctionSystem on/off, see page 219.

Speed Limit Assist, see page 231:adopt the suggested speed manually.Store current speed.

Left control box, rocker switch:Changing the speed limit, seepage 220.

OperationSwitching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The current speed is adopted as the speed limit.When switching on at a standstill or driving at lowspeed, 30 km/h/20 mph is set as the speed limit.The speedometer marker is set to the corre‐sponding speed.When activating the speed limit it is possible thatDynamic Stability Control DSC will be switchedon and the drive mode switched to COMFORT.

Switching offPress the button on the steering wheel.

The system switches off automatically in thefollowing situations, for example:▷ When switching the engine off.▷ When switching on Cruise Control.▷ When activating some programs using the

drive experience switch.The displays turn off.

InterruptingThe system is interrupted when reverse gear isengaged or the transmission is in neutral.

Seite 219

Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS


Change speed limit

Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards ordownwards until the desired speed limit is set.▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the

resistance point, the speed limit is increasedor decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐yond the resistance point, the speed limitchanges to the next multiple of 10 km/h onthe km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mphon the mph display in the speedometer.

If the set speed limit has been reached or unin‐tentionally exceeded, for example when drivingdownhill, there is no active brake intervention.If you set a speed limit while driving which is be‐low the current speed, the vehicle coasts downto the set speed limit.Vehicles with Active Cruise Control ACC andSpeed Limit Assist, see page 231: a change inthe speed limit detected by Speed Limit Assistcan be adopted for the Speed Limiter as a newspeed limit.The current speed can also be stored by press‐ing the button:


Exceeding the speed limitThe system gives a warning if the travellingspeed exceeds the set speed limit.You can intentionally exceed the speed limit.There is no warning in such a case.

To exceed the set speed limit intentionally, fullydepress the accelerator pedal.The limit automatically becomes active again assoon as the current speed falls below the setspeed limit.

Warning when the speed limit isexceededVisual warning

If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐tor lamp in the instrument cluster flashesfor as long as you exceed the set speed

limit.

Acoustic warning▷ A signal sounds if you inadvertently exceed

the set speed limit.▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the

driven speed during the journey, the warningsounds after a little time.

▷ If you intentionally exceed the speed limit byfully pressing the accelerator pedal, no warn‐ing is given.

Displays in the instrumentclusterDisplay in the speedometer

▷ Green marker: system is ac‐tive.

▷ Grey mark: the system is inter‐rupted.

▷ No marker: system is switchedoff.

Indicator lamp▷ If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the

system is switched on.▷ If the indicator lamp is flashing: set

speed limit is exceeded.

Seite 220

CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems


▷ Grey indicator lamp: the system is interrup‐ted.

Cruise ControlPrincipleThis system allows a desired speed to be set us‐ing the buttons on the steering wheel. The de‐sired speed is then maintained by the system.To do this, the system automatically acceleratesand brakes the vehicle as necessary.

GeneralDepending on the vehicle setting, the character‐istics of Cruise Control may change in certainareas, for example acceleration in ECO PROdrive mode is less pronounced.

Safety notes


WARNINGUsing the system in the following situationsmay increase the risk of an accident, for exam‐ple:▷ On stretches of road with many corners

and bends.▷ In heavy traffic.▷ If the road is icy, if there is fog or snow, if

conditions are wet or on a loose road sur‐face.

There is a danger of accidents or damage toproperty. Only use the system if it is possible todrive at a constant speed.

WARNINGThe desired speed may be accidentally set in‐correctly or called up by mistake. There is adanger of accidents. Adjust the desired speedto the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic sit‐uation and intervene actively if the situationwarrants it.


Button FunctionCruise Control on/off, see page 221.

To resume Cruise Control with lastsetting, see page 223.

To interrupt Cruise Control, seepage 222.


Left control box, rocker switch:Setting the speed, see page 222.

Switching Cruise Control on/offSwitching on


The indicator lamps are illuminated in the instru‐ment cluster and the speedometer marker is setto the current speed.Cruise Control is active. The driven speed ismaintained and stored as the desired speed.

Seite 221



Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, ifnecessary.


The displays turn off. The desired speed saved isdeleted.

Interrupts Cruise ControlInterrupting manually

Press the button while the system is ac‐tivated.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system interrupts automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ If the driver brakes.▷ If the selector lever is moved out of selector

lever position D.▷ If Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated

or Dynamic Stability Control DSC deactiva‐ted.

▷ If Dynamic Stability Control DSC intervenes.

To set the speedMaintaining and saving the speed

While the system is interrupted, press the rockerswitch up or down once.If the system is switched on, the current speed ismaintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed, see page 223,on the speedometer.Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, ifnecessary.The speed can also be stored by pressing thebutton.

Press the button.

Changing the speed

Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards ordownwards until the desired speed is set.If the system is active, the displayed speed isstored and the vehicle reaches the stored speedwhen the road is clear.▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the

resistance point, the desired speed is in‐creased or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐yond the resistance point, the desired speedchanges to the next multiple of 10 km/h onthe km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mphon the mph display in the speedometer.The maximum speed which can be set de‐pends on the vehicle.

▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistancepoint and holding it there accelerates or de‐celerates the vehicle without pressing the ac‐celerator pedal.The speed is maintained after releasing therocker switch. Pressing beyond the resist‐ance point accelerates the vehicle more rap‐idly.

Seite 222



Resuming Cruise ControlIf Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be resumedby calling up the saved speed.Before calling up the saved speed, make surethat the difference between the current speedand the saved speed is not excessively large.Otherwise, there may be inadvertent braking oracceleration.

While the system is interrupted, pressthe button.

Cruise Control is resumed with the saved values.The saved speed value is deleted and can nolonger be called up in the following instances:▷ When the system is switched off.▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.


▷ Green indicator: system is ac‐tive, the indicator shows thedesired speed.

▷ Grey mark: system is interrup‐ted; the mark shows thestored speed.

▷ No marker: system is switched off.

Indicator lamp▷ Green indicator lamp: the system is

active.▷ Grey indicator lamp: the system is in‐

terrupted.▷ No indicator lamp: the system is switched off.

Displays in the Head-Up DisplaySome information from the system can also beshown in the Head-Up Display.

The symbol is displayed when the de‐sired speed set has been reached.

System limitsThe desired speed is also maintained on a down‐hill stretch. The vehicle may drive slower than thedesired speed on uphill gradients if the enginepower is not sufficient.In ECO PRO drive mode, it is possible that thevehicle will drive faster or slower than the desiredspeed setting in some situations, for example ondownward or upward gradients.

Active Cruise Control withStop & Go ACCPrincipleThis system allows you to set a desired speedand a desired distance from the vehicle in front,using the buttons on the steering wheel.When the road ahead is clear, the system main‐tains the desired speed by braking or accelerat‐ing the vehicle automatically, as required.If there is a vehicle driving in front, the systemadapts your own vehicle's speed in order tomaintain the set distance from the vehicle ahead.The speed is adapted as far as the given situa‐tion allows.

GeneralA radar sensor is fitted in the front bumper and acamera on the rear-view mirror for detecting ve‐hicles driving in front.Depending on the vehicle setting, the character‐istics of Cruise Control may change in certainareas, for example acceleration in ECO PROdrive mode is less pronounced.The distance can be set in several stages, and isdependent on the individual speed for reasons ofsafety.

Seite 223



If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill andsets off again shortly afterwards, the system canrecognise this within the given context.

Safety notes






WARNINGThere is a danger of accidents if the differencein speed relative to other vehicles is excessivelyhigh. This may occur, for example, in thefollowing situations:▷ When quickly approaching a slowly mov‐

ing vehicle.▷ If another vehicle suddenly veers into the

vehicle's own lane.▷ When quickly approaching stationary vehi‐

cles.There is a danger of injury or even death. Ob‐serve the traffic situation and intervene activelyif the situation warrants it.


Button FunctionWith steering and lane control assis‐tant:Cruise Control on/off, see page 225.

With steering and lane control assis‐tant:Select the function.

Without steering and lane control as‐sistant:Cruise Control on/off, see page 225.


With steering and lane control assis‐tant:To interrupt Cruise Control, seepage 226.To resume Cruise Control with lastsetting, see page 228.

Seite 224



Button FunctionWithout steering and lane control as‐sistant:To resume Cruise Control with lastsetting, see page 228.

Without steering and lane control as‐sistant:To interrupt Cruise Control, seepage 226.

To increase the distance, seepage 227.Switch distance control on/off.

To reduce the distance, seepage 227.Switch distance control on/off.

Left control box, rocker switch:Setting the speed, see page 227.

Radar sensor

The radar sensor is located on the front in thebumper.Keep the radar sensor clean and unobstructed.

Camera


Area of useThe system can be used to optimum effect onwell-constructed roads.The minimum speed that can be set is30 km/h/20 mph.The maximum speed that can be set is210 km/h/130 mph.Higher speeds can be set by switching to CruiseControl without distance control.The system can also be activated when the vehi‐cle is at a standstill.

Switching Cruise Control on/offand interruptingWith steering and lane controlassistant: Assisted Driving

GeneralThe button is used to switch the setfunction on and off.

The button is used to set the primaryfunction.

Seite 225



Setting the function

1. When the system is active, press thebutton until the desired function is selected inthe function bar. The Assisted Driving func‐tion bar is shown at the bottom of the instru‐ment cluster.

▷ Cruise Control with distance con‐trol.

▷ Cruise Control with distance con‐trol and steering and lane control assis‐tant.

The selected function is shown in green.The setting is saved for the currently useddriver profile.

Switching onWith steering and lane control assistant:


2. Set Cruise Control if necessary.Without steering and lane control assistant:


The indicator lamps are illuminated in the instru‐ment cluster and the speedometer marker is setto the current speed.Cruise Control is active. The driven speed ismaintained and stored as the desired speed.Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, ifnecessary.

Switching offWhen switching off with the vehicle at a stand‐still, depress the brake pedal at the same time.Press the following button on the steering wheelagain:

Without steering and lane control assis‐tant.

With steering and lane control assistant.

The displays turn off. The desired speed saved isdeleted.

Interrupting manuallyWhen the system is activated, press thefollowing button on the steering wheel:



If interrupting the system when the vehicle is at astandstill, depress the brake pedal at the sametime.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system interrupts automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ If the driver brakes.▷ If the selector lever is moved out of selector

lever position D.▷ If Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated

or Dynamic Stability Control DSC deactiva‐ted.

▷ If Dynamic Stability Control DSC intervenes.▷ If the vehicle is stationary and the seat belt is

unfastened and the driver's door is opened.▷ If the system has not detected any objects for

an extended period of time, for example onroads with little traffic and without definedboundaries.

▷ If the detection zone of the radar is disrupted,for example, due to contamination or heavyrainfall.

▷ After an extended stationary period, if the ve‐hicle was decelerated to a standstill by thesystem.

Seite 226



To set the speedMaintaining and saving the speed

While the system is interrupted, press the rockerswitch up or down once. The system is activa‐ted.

The current speed is maintained and stored asthe desired speed.The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐eter.Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, ifnecessary.The speed can also be stored by pressing thebutton.

Press the button.

Changing the speed

Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards ordownwards until the desired speed is set.

If the system is active, the displayed speed isstored and the vehicle reaches the stored speedwhen the road is clear.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to theresistance point, the desired speed is in‐creased or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐yond the resistance point, the desired speedchanges to the next multiple of 10 km/h onthe km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mphon the mph display in the speedometer.

Hold the rocker switch in one position to repeatthe action.

Setting the distanceGeneralThe distance setting is saved for the currentlyused driver profile.

Safety note

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility. System limitations maymean that braking is performed too late. Thereis a danger of accidents or damage to property.Pay close attention to the traffic conditions atall times. Adapt the distance to traffic andweather conditions, also comply with the pre‐scribed safe distance by braking if necessary.

Reducing the distancePress the button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The selected distance, see page 228, is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Increasing the distancePress the button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The selected distance, see page 228, is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Seite 227



Resuming Cruise ControlIf Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be resumedby calling up the saved speed.Before calling up the saved speed, make surethat the difference between the current speedand the saved speed is not excessively large.Otherwise, there may be inadvertent braking oracceleration.With the system interrupted, press the followingbutton on the steering wheel:



Cruise Control is resumed with the saved values.The saved speed value is deleted and can nolonger be called up in the following instances:▷ When the system is switched off.▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.

Switching between CruiseControl with/without distancecontrolSafety note

WARNINGThe system does not respond to traffic travel‐ling in front of you, but maintains the savedspeed. There is a danger of accidents or dam‐age to property. Adjust the desired speed tothe traffic conditions and brake if necessary.

Switching the Cruise Control modeSwitch Cruise Control without distance controlon and off:

▷ Press and hold the button.

▷ Press and hold the button.

Without steering and lane control assistant:switch on distance control:

▷ Press the button.

▷ Press the button.With steering and lane control assistant: switchon distance control:

Press the button.

A Check Control message is displayed afterswitching.


▷ Green indicator: system is ac‐tive, the indicator shows thedesired speed.

▷ Grey mark: system is interrup‐ted; the mark shows thestored speed.

▷ No marker: system is switched off.

Vehicle distanceThe selected distance to the vehicle ahead isdisplayed.

Symbol DescriptionDistance 1

Distance 2

Seite 228



Symbol DescriptionDistance 3Corresponds to approximatelyhalf of the value of the speed‐ometer reading, expressed inmetres. Selected when the sys‐tem is switched on for the firsttime.

Distance 4

System interrupted.

No display of distance controlbecause the accelerator pedal isbeing pressed.

Detected vehicle

Symbol DescriptionGreen symbol:Vehicle ahead detected. Thesystem maintains the set dis‐tance to the vehicle in front.

The vehicle symbol in the distance displaymoves away as soon as the detected vehiclepulls off.To accelerate, activate ACC, for example bybriefly pressing the accelerator pedal or rockerswitch.

Indicator and warning lamps

Symbol DescriptionGreen indicator lamp: the sys‐tem is active.No indicator lamp: the system isswitched off.

Vehicle symbol flashes:The requirements for operationof the system are no longer be‐ing met.The system has been deactiva‐ted but will continue to brakeuntil you actively take over bydepressing the brake or acceler‐ator pedal.

Vehicle symbol and distance barflash red and an acoustic signalsounds:Brake and perform an evasivemanoeuvre, if necessary.

Displays in the Head-Up DisplayDesired speedSome information from the system can also beshown in the Head-Up Display.

The symbol is displayed when the de‐sired speed set has been reached.

Distance informationThe symbol is shown if the distance fromthe vehicle in front is too short.

The distance information is active under thefollowing circumstances:▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.▷ Display in the Head-Up Display selected, see

page 160.▷ Distance too close.

Seite 229



▷ Speed above approximately 70 km/h,40 mph.

System limitsDetection range

The system's detection capability and automaticbraking capacity are limited.For example, two-wheeled vehicles may not bedetected.

DecelerationThe system does not decelerate in the followingsituations:▷ For pedestrians or similar slow road users.▷ For red traffic lights.▷ For crossing traffic.▷ For oncoming vehicles.

Vehicles pulling out

A vehicle driving ahead of you is only detectedwhen it is fully in your driving path.If another vehicle suddenly pulls out in front ofyou, the system might not be able to re-establish

the selected distance of its own accord. In somecircumstances, it may also not be possible to re‐store the selected distance if you are driving sig‐nificantly faster than vehicles in front, for examplewhen rapidly approaching a lorry. If a vehicle isclearly detected in front of you, the systemprompts you to intervene by braking, and if nec‐essary by taking evasive action.

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for cornering, itwill be reduced slightly in the bend. However, thesystem does not detect bends in advance. Forthis reason, moderate your speed when corner‐ing.The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐tions can arise on tight bends where a vehicledriving in front will not be detected or will be de‐tected very late.

When your vehicle is approaching a bend, theangle of the bend may cause the system to re‐spond temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. Ifthe system responds by decelerating the vehicle,you may compensate for this by acceleratingbriefly. When the accelerator pedal is released

Seite 230



again, the system will resume control of the vehi‐cle's speed.

Driving offThe vehicle cannot drive off automatically insome situations, for example:▷ On steep upward gradients.▷ Before bumps or rises in the road.In such cases, depress the accelerator pedal.

WeatherThe following restrictions may apply if theweather or lighting conditions are unfavourable:▷ Impaired detection of vehicles.▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have already

been detected.Examples of unfavourable weather or lightingconditions:▷ Wet roads.▷ Snowfall.▷ Slush.▷ Fog.▷ Oncoming light.Pay attention when driving and respond to theprevailing traffic conditions. If necessary, inter‐vene actively, for example by braking, steering ormanoeuvring.

Engine powerThe desired speed is also maintained on a down‐hill stretch. The vehicle may drive slower than thedesired speed on uphill gradients if the enginepower is not sufficient.In ECO PRO drive mode, it is possible that thevehicle will intentionally drive faster or slowerthan the desired speed setting in some situa‐tions, for example on downward or upward gradi‐ents.

MalfunctionThe system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐sor is not correctly aligned, for example followingparking damage.A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐tem has failed.Have the system checked by a Service Partnerof the manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.The function for detecting and responding tostationary vehicles when approaching may belimited in the following situation:▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐

diately after vehicle delivery.▷ Failure or soiling of the camera. A Check

Control message is shown.

Speed Limit AssistPrincipleWhen the systems in the vehicle (Speed LimitInfo, for example) detect a change in the speedlimit on the route, it is possible to adopt this newspeed limit value for the following systems:▷ Manual Speed Limiter.▷ Cruise Control.▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func‐

tion.The speed value is proposed as a new desiredspeed for adopting. The relevant system mustbe activated for the speed value to be adopted.Depending on the equipment, the destinationsystem and the country specifications, it may bepossible for the value to be adopted automati‐cally.

Seite 231



Safety notes




Button FunctionAdopt the suggested speed manually.

Left control box, rocker switch:Set the speed; see Cruise Control.

Switching on/off and settingVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Driving"5. "Speed Assistant"6. "Info on speed limits"

Select the desired setting:

▷ "Adjust automatically": the detectedspeed limit is adopted automatically.

▷ "Adjust manually": the detected speedlimit can be adopted manually.

▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐its are displayed in the instrument clusterwithout being adopted.

▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist is switched off.

Displays in the instrumentclusterA message is displayed in the instrument clusterif the system and the Cruise Control areswitched on.

Symbol FunctionThe indicator lamp is illuminatedgreen, together with the symbol forthe speed control system:Speed Limit Assist is active anddetected speed limits can beadopted manually for the displayedsystem.

The indicator lamp is illuminatedgreen, together with the symbol forthe speed control system:Speed Limit Assist is active anddetected speed limits can beadopted automatically for the dis‐played system.

Detected change in speed limit de‐tected with immediate effect.Distance data behind the symbolindicates there might be a changein the speed limit up ahead.

Indicator lamp is illuminated green:the detected speed limit can beadopted with the SET button.As soon as the speed limit hasbeen adopted, a green tick is dis‐played.

Seite 232



Adopting the detected speedlimit automaticallyIn automatic mode, a detected speed limit is au‐tomatically adopted for Cruise Control.

Press the button to switch back to thelast value set.

Adopting the detected speedlimit manuallyIn manual mode, a detected speed limit can bemanually adopted for Cruise Control.

As soon as the SET symbol lights up,press the button.

Adjusting to the routePrincipleThe system can be set so as to adapt the speedautomatically to the route.For example, the speed is reduced in thefollowing situations if necessary:▷ Before turning off.▷ Before a roundabout.▷ Before a bend.


1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Driving"5. "Speed Assistant"6. "Adjust to route details"

Setting the speed adjustmentIt is possible to set whether the speed limitshould be accepted exactly, or with a toleranceof –15 km/h, –10 mph to +15 km/h, +10 mph.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Driving"5. "Speed Assistant"6. "Adjust speed limits"7. Confirm the desired setting.

System limitsSpeed Limit Assist based on the Speed LimitInfo system.Take into account the Speed Limit Info systemlimits, see page 157.Depending on the country, displayed speed lim‐its may not be available for acceptance, or onlyavailable with restrictions, for example with speedinformation from the navigation system.Cruise Control without distance control: depend‐ing on the system, it may not be possible toadopt speed limits automatically.Speed limits that are ahead may only be adoptedfor Active Cruise Control.Automatic speed adopting and route control areonly available in a few countries.

Steering and lane controlassistantPrincipleThe system helps the driver keep the vehicle inlane. To do this, the system assists by perform‐ing steering movements, for example when cor‐nering.

GeneralThe system detects the position of the lanemarkings and the vehicle driving in front usingfive radar sensors and a camera.

Seite 233



Depending on the speed, the system orientatesitself using the lane markings and vehicles drivingin front.Sensors on the steering wheel detect whetherthe steering wheel is being touched.

Safety note



Button FunctionSteering and lane control assistant in‐cluding traffic-queue assistant on/off,see page 235.

Set the function, see page 235.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors are in the bumpers.

Front bumper in middle.



Camera


Operating requirements▷ Speed under 210 km/h/130 mph.▷ The driving path is sufficiently wide.

Seite 234



▷ Above 70 km/h, approx. 43 mph: lane mark‐ing detected.

▷ Below 70 km/h, approx. 43 mph: lane markingor a vehicle ahead detected.

▷ Hands on the steering wheel.▷ Sufficient corner radius.▷ Driving in the centre of the lane.▷ Turn indicator switched off.▷ The sensor system calibration process is

complete.▷ Cruise Control with distance control is active.▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.The following systems must also be active:▷ Front-end collision warning.▷ Person warning.▷ Side collision warning.

Switching on/offAssisted Driving

PrincipleThe ASSIST button switches the system on andoff. The MODE button is used to set the primaryfunction.

Setting the function

1. When the system is active, press thebutton until the desired function is selected inthe function bar. The Assisted Driving func‐tion bar is shown at the bottom of the instru‐ment cluster.

▷ Cruise Control with distance con‐trol.

▷ Cruise Control with distance con‐trol and steering and lane control assis‐tant.

The selected function is shown in green.

The setting is saved for the currently useddriver profile.

Switching on


2. Adjust the steering and lane controlassistant if necessary.

Steering wheel symbol illuminates grey.System is on standby and does not makeany steering movements.

System activates automatically when all operat‐ing requirements are met, see page 234.

Steering wheel symbol illuminates green.The system is active.

When the system switched on, the person warn‐ing with City braking function and the side colli‐sion warning are active.


The display is no longer illuminated.The system does not execute any supportingsteering movements.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system interrupts automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ At a speed above 210 km/h/130 mph.▷ When the steering wheel is released.▷ If the driver brakes.▷ When the steering wheel is turned sharply.▷ When leaving your own lane.▷ With the turn indicator switched on.▷ When the lane is too narrow.

Seite 235



▷ If no lane marking has been detected for acertain time and there is no vehicle driving infront.

▷ If Active Cruise Control is interrupted.▷ If the seat belt on the driver's side is unfas‐

tened.Steering wheel symbol illuminates grey.System is on standby and does not makeany steering movements.

System activates automatically when all operat‐ing requirements are met, see page 234.

Displays in the instrumentclusterSymbol Description

Steering wheel symbol grey:System on standby.

Steering wheel symbol green:System is activated.

Yellow flashing steering wheelsymbol:Lane marking driven over.The steering wheel vibrateswhere applicable.

Yellow steering wheel symboland an acoustic signal, if applica‐ble:System interruption is imminent.

Steering wheel symbol flashesred, signal sounds:System is switching off.

Green steering wheel symboland lane marking symbol:The system is helping the driverkeep the vehicle in lane.

Symbol DescriptionSteering wheel symbol yellow:Hands are not around the steer‐ing wheel. System remains ac‐tive.

Red steering wheel symbol,acoustic signal:Hands are not around the steer‐ing wheel. System interruption isimminent.The system reduces the speedto a standstill if applicable.It is possible that the system willnot execute any supportingsteering movements.

Indicatorlamp

Description

Cruise Control with distancecontrol and steering and lanecontrol assistant:Green indicator lamp: the sys‐tem is active.No indicator lamp: the system isswitched off.

Displays on the steering wheel

The two LEDs above the button fields are illumi‐nated in the same way as the displays in the in‐strument cluster:▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.

Seite 236



▷ Red: system is deactivated.

The steering wheel displays can be configured ifrequired.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Driving"5. "Steering Assistance"6. Confirm the desired setting.

Displays in the Head-Up DisplayAll the system information can also be displayedin the Head-Up Display.

Lane change assistantPrincipleThe system provides the driver with additionalsupport when changing lanes on multi-laneroads.

Operating requirements▷ Operating requirements of the steering and

lane control assistant are met, see page 234.▷ Depending on country specifications: driving

on a road without pedestrians or cyclists andwith physical barriers to oncoming vehicles,such as crash barriers.

▷ Lane marking detected.▷ Maximum speed 180 km/h, approx. 110 mph.▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.

Switching the function on/offLane change assistance can be switched on/off.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"

4. "Driving"5. "Steering Assistance"6. "Lane Change Assistant"

Changing lanes1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits a lane

change.2. Push and hold the turn indicator lever, see

page 135, in the desired direction as far asthe resistance point to indicate briefly.After a short period, steering assistance inthe desired direction is noticeable.

After the lane change, the system helps thedriver keep the vehicle in lane.

Cancelling a lane changeIf the turn indicator lever is released too soon, thesystem helps the driver to keep in the originallane.

Seite 237



Displays in the instrument cluster

Symbol DescriptionGreen steering wheel symbol.Green line for lane marking onthe appropriate side.Green arrow symbol for lane-changing.The system carries out a lanechange.

Green steering wheel symbol.Green line for lane marking onthe appropriate side.No arrow symbol for lane-changing on the display.The system detected the lanechange request. Lane changenot currently possible.

Depending on country specifica‐tions:Green steering wheel symbol.Green line for lane marking onthe appropriate side.Grey arrow symbol for lane-changing.Lane change not possible; oper‐ating requirements not met.

System limitsGeneralThe system cannot be activated or used sensiblyin certain situations.

Safety note


Hands on the steering wheelIn the following situations, contact between thedriver's hands and the steering wheel is not de‐tected by the sensors:▷ Driving when wearing gloves.▷ Covers on the steering wheel.

Narrow lanesThe system cannot be activated or used sensiblywhen driving in narrow lanes, for example in thefollowing situations:▷ At road works.▷ Where there are emergency lanes.▷ In built-up areas.

WeatherThe following restrictions may apply if theweather or lighting conditions are unfavourable:▷ Impaired detection of vehicles and lane mark‐

ings.▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have already

been detected.Examples of unfavourable weather or lightingconditions:▷ Wet roads.▷ Snowfall.▷ Slush.▷ Fog.▷ Oncoming light.

Seite 238



Pay attention when driving and respond to theprevailing traffic conditions. If necessary, inter‐vene actively, for example by braking, steering ormanoeuvring.

Park Distance Control PDCPrinciplePDC provides assistance when parking the vehi‐cle. Objects in front of or behind the vehicle as itslowly approaches are indicated by means ofacoustic signals and a display on the Control Dis‐play.Depending on the equipment version: obstaclesat the side of the vehicle that are detected by thePark Assistant sensors may also be reported bythe flank protection, see page 242, function.

GeneralThe ultrasonic sensors for measuring distancesare located in the bumpers, and if applicable onthe side of the vehicle.Their range is approximately 2 m, 6 ft, dependingon the obstacle and environment.An acoustic warning sounds in the event of animminent collision at a distance of approx. 70 cm,27 in, from the object.In the case of objects behind the vehicle, theacoustic warning is given sooner, at a distance ofapprox. 1.50 m, 5 ft.

Safety notes

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐not respond independently and appropriately inall traffic conditions. There is a danger of acci‐dents. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation and in‐tervene actively if the situation warrants it.

WARNINGIf the vehicle is travelling at high speed whenPark Distance Control PDC is activated, theremay be a delayed warning because of physicalconditions. There is a danger of injury or dam‐age to property. Avoid approaching an object atspeed. Avoid moving off at speed while ParkDistance Control PDC is not yet active.


Park Assistant button

Ultrasonic sensorsUltrasonic sensors of the PDC,for example in the bumpers.

Operating requirementsTo ensure full functional capability:▷ Do not cover sensors, for example by stick‐

ers, bicycle rack.▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.

Seite 239



Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe system switches on automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ If selector lever position R is engaged while

the engine is running.▷ Depending on the equipment version: when

approaching detected obstacles, if the speedis below approximately 4 km/h, 2.5 mph. Theactivation distance depends on the individualsituation.

Automatic switch-on when obstacles are detec‐ted can be activated and deactivated.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Parking"5. If applicable: "Automatic PDC activation"6. "Automatic PDC activation"The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.Depending on the equipment version, a respec‐tive camera view is switched on additionally.

Switching off automatically whenmoving forwardsThe system switches off when a certain distanceor speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manuallyPress the Park Assistant button.

▷ On: the LED is illuminated.▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.The image from the rear-view camera is shownwhen reverse gear is engaged and the Park As‐sistant button is pressed.

WarningAcoustic signals

GeneralAn intermittent sound indicates the position of anobject accordingly as the vehicle approaches it.For instance, if an object is identified to the rearleft of the vehicle, the acoustic signal is emittedfrom the rear left loudspeaker.The shorter the distance to an object, the shorterthe intervals become.If the distance to a detected object is less thanapproximately 25 cm, 10 in, a continuous tonesounds.If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐hicle at the same time, and they are at a distanceof less than approximately 25 cm, 10 in, an alter‐nating continuous tone sounds.With the vehicle at a standstill, the intermittentsound is switched off after a short period of time.

Volume controlThe PDC acoustic signal volume can be adjus‐ted.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Parking and Manoeuvring"5. "Volume PDC signal"6. Set the desired value.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Seite 240



Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object isshown on the Control Display. Objects that arefurther away are already displayed before anacoustic signal is given.

The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.The recording range of the sensors is shown ingreen, yellow and red if obstacles are detectedwithin the range.Driving path lines are displayed for better estima‐tion of the space required.If the rear-view camera image is shown, it is pos‐sible to change over to PDC or, if required, to an‐other view with obstacle markings:

1. If necessary, push the Controller to the left.2. For example "Parking sensors"Crossing traffic warning, see page 259: depend‐ing on the equipment, the PDC display alsowarns about vehicles approaching from the sidesat the front and rear.

Depending on the equipmentversion: emergency brakingfunction, Active PDCPrincipleThe emergency brake function of PDC initiatesemergency braking in the event of imminent col‐lision danger.

GeneralDue to the system limits, a collision cannot beprevented under all circumstances.

The function is available at speeds below walkingspeed when driving or rolling in reverse.Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts thebraking intervention.After emergency braking to a stop, it is possibleto continue a slow approach to the obstacle. Toapproach, lightly depress the accelerator.If the accelerator is depressed more firmly, thevehicle pulls away as normal. Manual braking ispossible at any time.The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of PDCand Park Assistant.

Safety note

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you of your per‐sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐tion correctly. There is a danger of accidents.Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.Additionally, look directly to check the traffic sit‐uation and the area around the vehicle and in‐tervene actively in the corresponding situations.

Activating/deactivating the systemVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Parking"5. If applicable, "Active PDC emerg

intervention"6. "Active PDC emerg intervention"The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Seite 241



Depending on the equipmentversion: flank protectionPrincipleThe system warns about obstacles at the side ofthe vehicle.

GeneralThe system uses the ultrasonic sensors of PDCand Park Assistant.

Display

Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides ofthe vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.▷ Coloured markings: warning that obstacles

have been detected.▷ Grey markings, hatched surface: no obstacles

have been detected.▷ No markings, black surface: the area adjacent

to the vehicle has not yet been detected.

Limits of flank protectionThe system only shows stationary obstacles thatwere previously detected by the sensors whendriving past.The system does not detect whether an obstaclesubsequently moves. The markings are shown inblack after a certain time when the vehicle is sta‐tionary. The area next to the vehicle must be de‐tected again.



Limits of the ultrasoundmeasurementCertain conditions and objects may push ultra‐sound measurement to its limits, including thefollowing:▷ Small children and animals.▷ Persons wearing certain types of clothing, for

example a coat.▷ External interference of the ultrasound, for ex‐

ample by passing vehicles or loud machines.▷ Sensors which are dirty, iced-up, damaged or

incorrectly adjusted.▷ Certain weather conditions, for example high

humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extremeheat or strong wind.

▷ The trailer drawbars and tow hitches of othervehicles.

▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ Moving objects.▷ Higher protruding objects, for example pro‐

jecting walls.▷ Objects with corners, edges and smooth sur‐

faces.▷ Objects with fine surfaces or structures, for

example fences.▷ Objects with porous surfaces.▷ Small and low objects such as boxes.▷ Obstacles and people at the edge of the lane.

Seite 242



▷ Soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam.▷ Plants or shrubs.▷ Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs,

may enter the sensors' blind areas before orafter a continuous tone is given.

▷ The system does not take into account loadsprojecting beyond the outline of the vehicle.

False alarmsUnder the following conditions, the system mayissue a warning even though there is no obstaclein the detection range:▷ In heavy rain.▷ If the sensors are very soiled or covered with

ice.▷ If the sensors are covered with snow.▷ On rough road surfaces.▷ On uneven surfaces, for example speed

bumps.▷ In large, rectangular buildings with smooth

walls, for example underground car parks.▷ In washing bays and car washes.▷ Due to dense exhaust gases.▷ Due to other ultrasonic sources, for example

sweeping machines, steam-jet cleaners orneon lights.

To reduce false alarms, for example in automaticcar washes, switch off, see page 240, automaticactivation of PDC when obstacles are detected ifnecessary.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is shown.

A white symbol is shown and the capturearea of the sensors is shown in dark col‐our on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by aService Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Without Surround View:rear-view cameraPrincipleThe rear-view camera provides assistance whenreverse parking or manoeuvring. It does this byshowing an image of the area behind the vehicleon the Control Display.

Safety note


OverviewDepending on the equipment:button in the vehicle


Seite 243



Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle strip ofthe boot lid.Dirt can impair the quality of the image. Clean thecamera lens if required.

Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe system is automatically switched on if selec‐tor lever position R is engaged while the engineis running.

Automatic switching off whenmoving forwardsThe system switches off when a certain distanceor speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if necessary.

Depending on the equipment:switching on/off manually

Press the Park Assistant button.

▷ On: the LED is illuminated.▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.The parking assistance functions are shown onthe Control Display.

Switching the view via iDriveIf the rear-view camera view is not displayed,change the view via iDrive:

1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the left.

2. "Rear view camera"The image from the rear-view camera is shown.

Operating requirements▷ The rear-view camera is switched on.▷ The boot lid is completely closed.▷ Keep the detection area of the camera clear.

Projecting loads or carrier systems that arenot connected to a trailer socket can restrictthe detection area of the camera.

Assistance functionsGeneralA number of assistance functions can be activesimultaneously.The assistance functions can be activated man‐ually.

1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right.2. With the corresponding equipment:

"Camera picture"3. ▷ "Parking guidance lines".

Driving path lines and turning circle linesare shown, see page 245.

▷ "Obstacle marking".Depending on the equipment, the obsta‐cles detected by Park Distance ControlPDC are displayed, see page 245, bymarkings.

Seite 244



Parking aid lines

Driving path lines

The driving path lines help you to estimate thespace required when parking and manoeuvringon a level road surface.The driving path lines are dependent on thesteering angle and are continuously adapted tothe steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

The turning circle lines can only be shown in thecamera image together with driving path lines.The turning circle lines show the course of thesmallest possible turning circle on a level roadsurface.Once the steering wheel has been turned be‐yond a certain angle, only one turning circle lineis displayed.

Parking with the help of driving path andturning circle lines1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning

circle line is within the boundaries of the park‐ing space.

2. Turn the steering wheel so that the greendriving path line covers the correspondingturning circle line.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the equipment, obstacles behindthe vehicle are detected by the Park DistanceControl PDC sensors.Obstacle markings can be shown in the imagefrom the rear-view camera.The colour incrementation corresponds to themarkings of Park Distance Control PDC.

Setting brightness and contrastvia iDriveWith rear-view camera switched on:

1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right.2. "Camera picture"3. ▷ "Brightness"

▷ "Contrast"4. Set the desired value.

Seite 245



System limitsDeactivated cameraIf the camera is deactivated, for example whenthe boot lid is opened, the camera image is dis‐played as grey hatching.

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles and higher, protruding ob‐jects such as ledges cannot be detected by thesystem.Depending on the equipment installed, some as‐sistance functions also consider Park DistanceControl PDC data.Observe the notes in the chapter on Park Dis‐tance Control PDC.The objects shown on the Control Display maybe closer than they appear. Do not estimate thedistance to objects based on the display.

Surround View with ParkAssistant PlusPrincipleThe system provides assistance with parking andmanoeuvring. It does this by displaying an imageof the area all around the vehicle on the ControlDisplay.

GeneralSeveral cameras capture the area from variousselectable perspectives. In addition, assistancefunctions, for example help lines, can be shownin the display.The following camera perspectives can be dis‐played:▷ Automatic camera perspective, see

page 247: the system automatically showsthe appropriate camera perspective depend‐ing on the particular driving situation.

▷ Rear-view camera, see page 247: for repre‐senting the areas behind the vehicle.

▷ Flank view right and left, see page 250: forrepresenting the areas to the side of the vehi‐cle.

▷ Camera perspective movable using iDrive.Free camera, see page 247.

▷ Panorama View, see page 250: for repre‐senting crossing traffic, for example at junc‐tions and exits, depending on which gear iscurrently engaged.

Depending on the view, the vehicle surroundingsor a partial area are displayed.

Safety note




Panorama View

Seite 246



Cameras

Front camera

Rear-view camera

One camera is located under each exterior mirrorhousing.

Dirt on the camera lenses can impair the qualityof the image. Clean the camera lenses if re‐quired.

Switching on/offSwitching on automaticallyThe system is automatically switched on if selec‐tor lever position R is engaged while the engineis running.

The camera perspective appropriate for the cor‐responding driving situation is shown.

Switching on/off manuallyPress the Park Assistant button.

▷ On: the LED is illuminated.▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.

Automatic switching off whenmoving forwardsThe system switches off when a certain distanceor speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if necessary.

Camera perspectivesOverview

1 Function bar, left2 Selection window3 Flank view4 Automatic camera perspective5 Movable, free camera perspective6 Camera image7 Function bar, right8 Rear-view camera

Selection windowIn the selection window, the individual cameraperspectives can be selected using iDrive.

Seite 247



Flank viewThe flank view can be selected for the right orleft vehicle side.This view helps positioning the vehicle at thekerb or in the case of other obstacles at the sideby displaying the side surroundings.The flank view looks from the rear to the front. Inthe case of danger, it automatically focuses onpossible obstacles.

Automatic camera perspectiveThe automatic camera perspective displays asteering-dependent view into the respective driv‐ing direction.This perspective adjusts to the respective drivingsituation.As soon as obstacles are detected, the viewswitches to a fixed presentation of the area infront or behind the bumper or, if necessary, to aflank view.

Movable, free camera perspectiveIf the movable camera perspective is selected, acircular path is shown on the Control Display.By turning the Controller or using the touch func‐tion, defined perspectives along the circular pathcan be selected.The current perspective is marked with a camerasymbol.With BMW Gesture Control: the movable cameraperspective can be moved along the circular pathusing BMW Gesture Control, see page 61.To leave the circular path, tilt the Controller tothe side and press it or tap the active camerasymbol on the touch screen.

Rear-view cameraThis view shows the image of the rear-view cam‐era.

Function bars

Function bar, rightAssistance functions can be activated, seepage 248, and settings made using the functionbar on the right. To do this, tilt the Controller tothe right if necessary.▷ "Park Assist", see page 253.▷ "Reversing Assistant", see page 257.▷ "Camera picture"

▷ "Brightness", see page 251.▷ "Contrast", see page 251.▷ "Parking guidance lines", see

page 249.▷ "Obstacle marking", see page 249.

▷ "Settings": to perform settings, for exam‐ple to use the activation points with Panor‐ama View.

Function bar, leftIt is possible to select various views directly usingthe function bar on the left. To do this, tilt theController to the left if necessary.▷ Automatic camera perspective, see

page 248.▷ "Free camera", see page 248.▷ "Car wash", see page 249.

Assistance functionsGeneralA number of assistance functions can be activesimultaneously.The following assistance functions can be activa‐ted manually:▷ "Parking guidance lines".▷ "Obstacle marking".▷ "Car wash".The following assistance functions are shownautomatically:

Seite 248



▷ Flank protection, see page 250.▷ Door opening angle, see page 250.

Parking aid lines

Driving path lines

The driving path lines help you to estimate thespace required when parking and manoeuvringon a level road surface.The driving path lines are dependent on thesteering angle and are continuously adapted tothe steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

The turning circle lines can only be shown in thecamera image together with driving path lines.The turning circle lines show the course of thesmallest possible turning circle on a level roadsurface.Once the steering wheel has been turned be‐yond a certain angle, only one turning circle lineis displayed.

Parking with the help of driving path andturning circle lines1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning

circle line is within the boundaries of the park‐ing space.

2. Turn the steering wheel so that the greendriving path line covers the correspondingturning circle line.

Obstacle marking

Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by thePark Distance Control PDC sensors.Obstacle markings can be shown in the cameraimage.The colour incrementation corresponds to themarkings of Park Distance Control PDC.

Washing bay view

The washing bay view provides assistance whendriving into washing bays by displaying the vehi‐cle's own tyre tracks.

Seite 249



Flank protection

PrincipleThe system warns about obstacles at the side ofthe vehicle.

Display

Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides ofthe vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.▷ No markings: no obstacles have been detec‐

ted.▷ Coloured markings: warning that obstacles

have been detected.

Limits of the flank protectionThe system only shows stationary obstacles thatwere previously detected by the sensors whendriving past.The system does not detect whether an obstaclesubsequently moves. As a result, the markings inthe display are no longer shown at standstill aftera particular length of time. The area next to thevehicle must be detected again.

Door opening angle

PrincipleIf obstacle marking is activated, the systemshows any fixed, stationary obstacles that are re‐stricting the opening angle of the doors.The system does not issue warnings about ap‐proaching road users.

In selector lever position P, the maximum open‐ing angles of the doors are shown.

As soon as the vehicle moves, the parking assis‐tance lines are displayed instead of the openingangles.

Limits of the displayFor technical reasons, the display of the areaaround the vehicle is distorted.Even if the symbols for the door opening angleson the Control Display are not covering any otherobjects, pay attention to the following when park‐ing beside other objects:The perspective means that protruding objectsat a higher level may be closer than they appearon the Control Display.

Panorama ViewPrinciple

The system provides you with an advance viewof crossing traffic at blind exits and junctions.

Seite 250



GeneralRoad users hidden by obstacles at the side areonly detected very late from the driver's seat. Toimprove the view, the cameras at the front andrear show traffic in the areas at either side.Yellow lines in the screen display indicate thefront and rear ends of the vehicle.The camera image is subject to different levels ofdistortion in some areas, and is thus not suitablefor estimating distances.

Display on the Control DisplayPress the button with the engine running.

The image from the relevant camera is displayed,depending on the driving direction:▷ "Front": image from the front camera.▷ "Rear": image from the rear camera.Depending on the equipment, the crossing trafficwarning, see page 259, can warn about ap‐proaching vehicles by means of radar sensors.

With navigation system: activationpoints

PrinciplePositions at which the Panorama View is toswitch on automatically can be saved as activa‐tion points provided that a GPS signal is beingreceived.

GeneralUp to ten activation points can be saved.Activation points can be used for the front cam‐era when driving forward.

Saving activation points1. Drive to the position at which the system is to

be switched on, and stop.

2. Press the button.3. Tilt the Controller to the right.

4. "Save activation point".The current position is shown.

5. "Add point".Activation points are, where possible, saved withthe town/city and street, otherwise with the GPScoordinates.

Using activation pointsThe use of activation points can be switched onand off.

1. Press the button.2. Tilt the Controller to the right.3. "Settings"4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically

when set activation points are reached."

Displaying activation points

1. Press the button.2. Tilt the Controller to the right.3. "Show activation points"

A list of all activation points is shown.

Renaming or deleting activation points

1. Press the button.2. Tilt the Controller to the right.3. "Show activation points"

A list of all activation points is shown.4. Select an activation point if necessary.5. ▷ "Rename"

▷ "Delete point"▷ "Delete all activation points"

Setting brightness and contrastWhen Surround View or Panorama View isswitched on, it is possible to adjust the bright‐ness and contrast.

Seite 251



Via iDrive:

1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right.2. "Camera picture"3. ▷ "Brightness"

▷ "Contrast"4. Set the desired value.

Functional limitationsThe system can only be used to a limited extentin the following situations:▷ In poor light conditions.▷ With soiled cameras.▷ With a door open.▷ With the boot lid open.▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in.Grey hatched areas with a symbol, for exampleopened door, in the camera display identify areasthat are not currently shown.

System limitsNon-visible areasDue to the angle of view, the area under the ve‐hicle cannot be seen by the cameras.

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles and higher, protruding ob‐jects such as ledges cannot be detected by thesystem.Some assistance functions also consider ParkDistance Control PDC data.Observe the notes in the chapter on Park Dis‐tance Control PDC, see page 239.The objects shown on the Control Display maybe closer than they appear. Do not estimate thedistance to objects based on the display.

MalfunctionThe failure of a camera is shown on the ControlDisplay.

A yellow symbol is shown and the cap‐ture area of the failed camera is shown inblack on the Control Display.

Remote 3D ViewPrincipleThe BMW Connected App and the camera im‐ages from Surround View can be used to showthe areas around the vehicle on a mobile device,for example a smartphone.The function shows a view of the current situa‐tion.

Operating requirements▷ Data transfer must be activated, see page 70.▷ The BMW Connected App must be installed

on the mobile device.

Switching the function on/offVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "General settings"4. "Data privacy"5. “Configure data access”6. "Data for BMW ConnectedDrive"7. “Remote 3D View”

Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality ormay not be available at all in the following situa‐tions, for example:▷ In poor light conditions.▷ With soiled cameras.▷ With a door or the boot lid open. Dark areas in

the display indicate areas that are not detec‐ted by the system.

▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in.

Seite 252



▷ When other camera functions are run in thevehicle.

▷ If the vehicle is moving faster than at walkingspeed.

▷ It may not be possible to use the function inall countries.

▷ For reasons related to data protection, thefunction can only be run three times in twohours.

Park AssistantPrinciple

The system supports the driver in the followingsituations:▷ When parking sideways parallel to the road:

parallel parking.▷ Depending on the equipment version: when

reverse parking perpendicular to the road:perpendicular parking. The system lines upwith the middle of the parking space whenparking perpendicular to the road.

▷ Depending on the equipment version: whendriving out of parallel parking spaces, seepage 256.

▷ Depending on the equipment version: whenreversing out, for example in the case of tightparking spaces or narrow roads, see revers‐ing assistant, see page 257.

GeneralOperationOperation of the Park Assistant is divided intothree steps:▷ Switching on and activating.▷ Parking space search.▷ Parking.The status of the system and the actions re‐quired are shown on the Control Display.Ultrasonic sensors measure parking spaces onboth sides of the vehicle.

Steptronic transmissionThe Park Assistant calculates the ideal parkingline and takes over the following functions duringa parking operation:▷ Steering.▷ Accelerating and braking.▷ Changing gear.The parking operation takes place automatically.

Safety notes


NOTEThe Park Assistant may steer across or up ontokerbs. There is a danger of damage to property.Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐tively if the situation warrants it.

Seite 253



In addition, the safety notes for Park DistanceControl PDC, see page 239, apply.



Ultrasonic sensors

The system uses the four side ultrasonic sen‐sors, arrows, and the ultrasonic sensors of ParkDistance Control PDC in the bumpers to meas‐ure parking spaces and distances to obstacles.

Operating requirementsUltrasonic sensorsTo ensure full functional capability:▷ Do not cover the sensors, for example with

stickers.▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.

For measuring parking spaces▷ The vehicle must be driving forwards in a

straight line at speeds up to approximately35 km/h, approximately 22 mph.

▷ Maximum distance to the row of parked vehi‐cles: 1.5 m, approximately 5 ft.

Suitable parking spaceGeneral:▷ Gap behind an object that is at least 0.5 m,

1.7 ft long.▷ Gap between two objects, each at least

0.5 m, 1.7 ft long.Parking parallel to the road:▷ Minimum length of gap between two objects:

own vehicle length plus approximately 0.8 m,2.6 ft.

▷ Minimum depth: approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft.Depending on the equipment version: perpen‐dicular parking:▷ Minimum length of gap: own vehicle width

plus approximately 0.7 m, 2.3 ft.▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.

Drivers must estimate the depth of perpen‐dicular parking spaces themselves. Due totechnical limits, the system is only able togauge the depth of perpendicular parkingspaces approximately.

For parking▷ Doors and boot lid are closed.▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened.

Switching on and activatingSwitching on with the button

Press the Park Assistant button.The LED is illuminated.

It is possible to display the current status of theparking space search on the Control Display.

Seite 254



Park Assistant is automatically activated.

Switching on with reverse gearEngage reverse gear.It is possible to display the current status of theparking space search on the Control Display.To activate: "Park Assist"

Switching on via iDriveRear-view camera display or PDC view must beactive.

1. Tilt the Controller to the right.2. Activate the Park Assistant on the Control

Display: "Park Assist"

Display on the Control DisplaySystem is activated/deactivated

Sym‐bol

Meaning

Grey: system not available.White: system available but not acti‐vated.

System is activated.

Parking space search is active.

Parking space search and status ofthe system

▷ Symbol P on the vehicle diagram: Park Assis‐tant is activated and the parking space searchis active.

▷ Suitable parking spaces are shown on theControl Display on the edge of the roadwaynext to the vehicle symbol. When Park Assis‐tant is active, suitable parking spaces arehighlighted and an acoustic signal sounds.Switching the acoustic signal on/off, seepage 256.

▷ When perpendicular or parallel parkingspaces are clearly detected, the system auto‐matically sets the appropriate parkingmethod. A selection menu is displayed forparking spaces that are large enough for bothparallel and perpendicular parking. In thiscase, select the desired parking methodmanually.

▷ Parking operation active.Steering has been taken over.

▷ The parking space search is active wheneverthe vehicle is driving forwards at low speed,even with deactivated system. If the systemis deactivated, the displays on the ControlDisplay are shown grey.

Parking with the Park AssistantDriving into a parking space1. Switch on and activate Park Assistant.

To do this, engage reverse gear and activatethe system on the Control Display or pressthe Park Assistant button, see page 254.

Park Assistant is activated.2. Drive past the line of parked vehicles at a

speed up to approximately 35 km/h, 22 mphand at a distance of maximum 1.5 m, 5 ft.The status of the parking space search andpossible parking spaces are shown on theControl Display, see page 255.

Seite 255



3. Confirm the suggested parking space for theparking process: select the parking space onthe Control Display.The system takes over the steering.

4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐play.At the end of parking, the selector lever posi‐tion P is engaged.The end of the parking is displayed on theControl Display.

5. Straighten up the parking position, if applica‐ble.

Cancelling manuallyYou can cancel the Park Assistant at any time:▷ Press the Park Assistant button.

▷ "Park Assist" Select the symbol on theControl Display.

Cancelling automaticallyThe system automatically cancels in thefollowing situations:▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or

steers the vehicle.▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces, if

necessary.▷ Any obstacles difficult to negotiate, for exam‐

ple kerbs.▷ With obstacles that suddenly emerge.▷ If Park Distance Control PDC shows gaps

that are too small.▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐

tempts or parking time is exceeded.▷ When changing to other functions on the

Control Display.▷ If the boot lid is open.▷ When doors are open.▷ If the parking brake is applied.▷ When accelerating.

▷ If the brake pedal remains pressed for a rela‐tively long period when the vehicle is station‐ary.

▷ When the driver's seat belt is unfastened.A Check Control message is shown.

ResumingYou can continue a cancelled parking process, ifapplicable.To do this, reactivate the Park Assistant, seepage 254, and follow the instructions on theControl Display.

Switching offThe system can be switched off manually:

Press the Park Assistant button.

Switching the acoustic signal forsuitable parking spaces on/offVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driver assistance"4. "Parking and Manoeuvring"5. "Park Assist"6. "Sound if parking space detected"The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Depending on the equipmentversion: leaving a parking spacewith the Park AssistantPrincipleThe system makes it easier to drive out of paral‐lel parking spaces.

Seite 256



General

Steptronic transmissionThe Park Assistant calculates the optimum lineto take when driving out of the space and takesover the following functions during the manoeu‐vre:▷ Steering.▷ Accelerating and braking.▷ Changing gear.The vehicle manoeuvres automatically until it isin a position where the driver can drive out of thespace without any further steering movements.

Operating requirements▷ The vehicle has been parked using the Park

Assistant.▷ An obstacle is detected in front of the vehicle.▷ The parking space is at least 0.8 m, approx.

2.6 ft longer than the vehicle.

Driving out of a parking space1. Switch on drive-ready state.2. Steptronic transmission:

When the vehicle is stationary, press the ParkAssistant button or engage reverse gear toswitch on the Park Assistant.

3. Tilt the Controller to the right.4. Activate the Park Assistant on the Control

Display: "Park Assist"5. Steptronic transmission:

The system takes over the manoeuvre. Amessage is displayed at the end of the ma‐noeuvre.

6. Make sure that it is safe to leave the parkingspace in the current traffic conditions anddrive off as usual.The Park Assistant is switched off automati‐cally.

Depending on the equipmentversion: reversing assistantPrincipleThe system supports the driver when reversing,for example when driving out of tight parkingspaces or narrow roads.The vehicle saves the driving movements for thelast stretch of road before the vehicle is parked.The vehicle can reverse along this saved stretchwith automated steering.

GeneralThe system takes over the steering when revers‐ing along the saved stretch.The driver is responsible for operating the accel‐erator pedal and the brake.

Operating requirements▷ To save the stretch of road, drive forwards

without interruption.▷ A maximum of 50 metres/approx. 55 yards

can be saved.▷ To save the stretch of road, do not drive

faster than 36 km/h/approx. 22 mph.▷ The stretch of road that is to be reversed

along must be at least 30 cm/12 in wider thanthe vehicle.

Reversing with automated steering1. When the vehicle is stationary and the drive-

ready state is switched on, engage reversegear or press the Park Assistant button.

2. Tilt the Controller to the right.3. "Reversing Assistant"

The system takes over the steering.The possible route is displayed on the Con‐trol Display.

4. Take your hands off the steering wheel andcarefully drive off using the accelerator pedaland brake.

Seite 257



When reversing, pay attention to the vehiclesurroundings and observe the PDC informa‐tion. Brake if necessary.

5. Follow the instructions on the Control Displayas applicable.

6. Stop when you reach normal road traffic atthe latest and take over control of the vehicle,for example by engaging a forward gear.At the end of the saved stretch of road, a sig‐nal sounds and a message appears prompt‐ing you to take over control of the vehicle.

Cancelling the systemThe system automatically cancels in situationssuch as the following:▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or

steers the vehicle.▷ When a forward gear is engaged.▷ If the vehicle is stationary for several minutes.▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐

versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐ing angle.

Limits of the reversing assistant▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you

suddenly encounter an obstacle, stop imme‐diately and take over control of the vehicle.

▷ The maximum speed when reversing is limi‐ted to approx. 9 km/h/6 mph.If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warningis issued and the function may be cancelled.


WARNINGThe system may not respond at all, or may re‐spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐tion due to limits of the system. There is a dan‐ger of accidents or damage to property.

Observe the information on the system limitsand intervene actively if necessary.

No parking assistanceThe Park Assistant does not provide assistancein the following situations:▷ On sharp bends.▷ In angled parking spaces.

Functional limitationsThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations, for example:▷ On uneven road surfaces, for example gravel

roads.▷ On slippery ground.▷ On steep upward or downward gradients.▷ If leaves have collected or snow has drifted or

been piled up in the parking space.▷ If an already measured parking space

changes.▷ If there are ditches or sudden drops, for ex‐

ample a quayside.

Limits of the ultrasoundmeasurementCertain conditions and objects may push ultra‐sound measurement to its limits, including thefollowing:▷ Small children and animals.▷ Persons wearing certain types of clothing, for

example a coat.▷ External interference of the ultrasound, for ex‐

ample by passing vehicles or loud machines.▷ Sensors which are dirty, iced-up, damaged or

incorrectly adjusted.▷ Certain weather conditions, for example high

humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extremeheat or strong wind.

▷ The trailer drawbars and tow hitches of othervehicles.

Seite 258



▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ Moving objects.▷ Higher protruding objects, for example pro‐

jecting walls.▷ Objects with corners, edges and smooth sur‐

faces.▷ Objects with fine surfaces or structures, for

example fences.▷ Objects with porous surfaces.▷ Small and low objects such as boxes.▷ Obstacles and people at the edge of the lane.▷ Soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam.▷ Plants or shrubs.▷ Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs,

may enter the sensors' blind areas before orafter a continuous tone is given.

▷ The system does not take into account loadsprojecting beyond the outline of the vehicle.

In some cases, parking spaces may be detectedthat are not suitable or suitable parking spacesmay not be detected.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is shown.The Park Assistant has failed. Have the systemchecked by a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

Crossing traffic warningPrincipleAt blind exits or when reversing out of perpendic‐ular parking spaces, the system detects otherroad users approaching from the side earlier thanis possible from the driver's seat.

General

Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitorthe area behind the vehicle.The system indicates when other road users areapproaching.

Depending on the equipment, the area in front ofthe vehicle is also monitored. For this purpose,two further radar sensors are located in the frontbumper.

Safety note



Seite 259




Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located in the rearbumper.

Depending on the equipment, there are two ad‐ditional radar sensors in the front bumper.

Keep the bumpers clean and unobstructed in thearea of the radar sensors.

Switching on/offActivating/deactivating the system

1. Press the Park Assistant button.2. Tilt the Controller to the right.3. "Settings"4. "Cross-traffic alert"5. "Cross-traffic alert"Or via iDrive:


3. "Driver assistance"4. "Parking and Manoeuvring"5. "Cross-traffic alert"6. "Cross-traffic alert"

Switching on automaticallyIf the system was activated on the Control Dis‐play, it is switched on automatically as soon asPark Distance Control PDC or Panorama View isactive and a gear is engaged.The system is switched on at the rear when re‐verse gear is engaged.Depending on the equipment, the system isswitched on at the front when a forward gear isengaged.

Switching off automaticallyThe system switches off automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ If walking speed is exceeded.▷ When a certain distance is exceeded.▷ During active parking with the Park Assistant.

WarningGeneralThe Control Display shows the correspondingdisplay, an acoustic signal may sound and thelight in the exterior mirror flashes.

Seite 260



Light in the exterior mirror

The light in the exterior mirror flashes if other ve‐hicles are detected by the rear sensors when thevehicle is moving backwards.

Display in the Park Distance ControlPDC view

In the Park Distance Control PDC view, the rele‐vant boundary area flashes red if the sensors de‐tect vehicles.

Display in the camera view

The relevant boundary area, arrow 1, in the cam‐era view flashes red if the sensors detect vehi‐cles.

Yellow lines, arrow 2, indicate the bumper of yourvehicle.

Acoustic warningIn addition to the visual display, a warning signalsounds when your own vehicle is moving in thecorresponding direction.

System limitsThe system may have limited functionality in thefollowing situations:▷ If the approaching vehicle is travelling very

fast.▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.▷ On sharp bends.▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,

for example by stickers.▷ When a projecting load is being transported.▷ If crossing objects are moving very slowly.▷ If there are other objects in the field of view of

the sensors that conceal the crossing traffic.

Seite 261



Driving comfortVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Adaptive suspensionPrincipleThe system reduces unwanted vehicle move‐ments when a dynamic driving style is used orwhen driving on uneven roads.

GeneralDepending on the road conditions and the driv‐ing style, this enhances driving dynamics anddriving comfort.

ConfigurationThe system offers various damper configura‐tions.The damper configurations are assigned to thedifferent drive modes of the drive experienceswitch, see page 143.

Drive mode Damper configurationCOMFORTECO PRO

Balanced

SPORTSPORT PLUS

Firm

Active Roll StabilisationPrincipleThe system reduces body lean that occurs whencornering at high speed or taking sudden evasiveaction.

GeneralThe side incline of the vehicle is compensatedby continual adjustments on the front and rearaxle. Thus, the vehicle is constantly stabilised.Agility and driving comfort are increased in alldriving conditions.

ConfigurationThe system offers various configurations.The configurations are assigned to the differentdrive modes of the drive experience switch, seepage 143.

Drive mode ConfigurationCOMFORTECO PRO

Comfortable

SPORTSPORT PLUS

Firm

M Dynamic ProfessionalPrincipleM Dynamic Professional is an actively controlledsport suspension. The system increases drivingcomfort at the same time as minimising bodylean when cornering.M Dynamic Professional contains the followingsystems:▷ Lowered sport suspension.

Seite 262

CONTROLS Driving comfort


▷ Adaptive suspension.▷ Active Roll Stabilisation.▷ Integral Active Steering.

GeneralInformation available from the navigation systemor the driving style analysis, for example, is usedfor the active control.This information influences the control of thefollowing systems, particularly in the ADAPTIVEdriving mode, see page 145:▷ Adaptive suspension, see page 262.▷ Active Roll Stabilisation, see page 262.▷ Integral Active Steering, see page 218This increases the agility and comfort of the ve‐hicle further.The function may be limited if the navigation datais invalid, outdated or not available, for example.Depending on the equipment, the rear-axle lock‐ing differential can be adapted to the respectivetraction conditions as necessary.

Performance ControlPerformance Control increases the agility of thevehicle.Individual wheels are braked to increase agilityfor a sporty driving style. The resulting brakingeffect is largely compensated for by a simultane‐ous engine control action.

Seite 263

Driving comfort CONTROLS


ClimateVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Interior air qualityThe air quality in the vehicle is improved by thefollowing components:▷ Emissions-tested interior.▷ Microfilter.▷ Air-conditioning system for regulating tem‐

perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.Depending on the equipment:▷ Microfilter/activated carbon filter.▷ Ionisation.▷ Fragrancing.▷ Automatic air recirculation control AUC.▷ Independent ventilation.

Automatic air conditioningOverviewButtons in the vehicle

Climate functions

Button FunctionTemperature, see page 265.

Air-conditioning mode, seepage 266.

Maximum cooling, seepage 266.

AUTO programme, seepage 266.

Recirculated-air mode, seepage 267.

Air flow, manual, see page 268.

Air distribution, manual, seepage 268.

Defrost the windscreen and re‐move condensation, seepage 269.

Seite 264

CONTROLS Climate


Button FunctionRear window heating, seepage 269.

Active seat ventilation, seepage 118.

Seat and armrest heating, seepage 117.

To call up the air conditioningmenu, see page 265.For the following settings, for ex‐ample: upper body temperatureadjustment, independent venti‐lation.

Calling up the air conditioningmenu

Press the button upwards.

The air conditioning menu is displayed.Air conditioning functions such as the followingare available via the Climate menu:▷ Heating/ventilation.▷ Air quality.▷ Seats/surfaces.▷ Independent ventilation/Auxiliary heating.It is possible to make individual settings for someair conditioning functions; for example, switchingon/off, setting the intensity.

Switching on/offSwitching onPress any button, with the following exceptions:▷ Menu.▷ Rear window heating.▷ Lower side of air flow button.▷ Seat heating.▷ Seat ventilation.

Switching off▷ Complete system:

Press and hold the button on thedriver's side until the component

switches off.▷ On the front passenger side:

Press and hold the button on thepassenger side.

TemperaturePrincipleThe automatic air conditioning adjusts to the settemperature as quickly as possible, using maxi‐mum cooling or heating power if necessary. Thetemperature is then maintained.

AdjustingPress the upper or lower side of thebutton to set the desired temperature.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Heating/ventilation"5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"6. "Temperature:"7. Set the desired temperature.Avoid switching between different temperaturesettings in rapid succession. The automatic airconditioning may not have sufficient time to es‐tablish the temperature selected.

Ventilation temperatureGeneralThe temperature of the ventilation in the upperbody area can be adjusted.

Seite 265

Climate CONTROLS


The temperature is adjusted on an individual ba‐sis, for example towards the blue for colder andtowards the red for warmer.The ventilation air flow in the upper body areaprovides noticeable heating or cooling depend‐ing on the set temperature.The set interior temperature for driver and frontseat passenger is not changed by this.


1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Heating/ventilation"5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"6. "Temperature adjustment"7. Set the desired temperature.

▷ Towards blue: cooler.▷ Towards red: warmer.

Cooling functionPrincipleInterior air is cooled and dried, then reheated tosuit the temperature setting.The interior can only be cooled when drive-readystate is switched on.

Switching on/offPress down the button.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Heating/ventilation"5. "Climate control (A/C)"

The cooling function is switched on when theengine is running.Depending on the weather conditions, the wind‐screen and side windows may mist over for ashort time when the drive-ready state has beenswitched on.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally in the AUTO programme.When the automatic air conditioning is in opera‐tion, condensation develops and exits under‐neath the vehicle.

Maximum cooling effectPrincipleWhen drive-ready state is switched on, the sys‐tem is set to lowest temperature, optimum airflow and recirculated-air mode.

GeneralThe function is available at an outside tempera‐ture above approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and whendrive-ready state is switched on.

Switching on/offPress the button.The LED is illuminated when the sys‐

tem is switched on.

The air flows from the side nozzles for the upperbody area. Therefore open the side nozzles.The air flow can be adapted when the pro‐gramme is active.

AUTO programPrincipleThe AUTO programme cools, ventilates or heatsthe interior automatically.The air flow, air distribution and temperature areregulated automatically depending on the interiortemperature, the selected temperature settingand the selected intensity setting.

Seite 266

CONTROLS Climate


Switching on/offPress the button.The LED is illuminated when the AUTO

programme is switched on.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Heating/ventilation"5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"6. "Automatic programme"Depending on the selected temperature, inten‐sity AUTO programme and external influences,the air is directed towards the windscreen, theside windows upper body and into the footwell.The cooling function, see page 266, is switchedon automatically in the AUTO programme.A condensation sensor also controls the pro‐gramme so that window condensation is avoidedas much as possible.The AUTO programme is automatically switchedoff when the air distribution is set manually.

IntensityWith the AUTO programme switched on, the in‐tensity can be adjusted. This changes the auto‐matic control for the air flow and air distribution.

Press top or bottom side of button: re‐duce or increase intensity.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Heating/ventilation"5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"6. "Level"7. Set the desired intensity.

The air flow and air distribution are controlled au‐tomatically in line with the selected intensity.The selected intensity is shown on the displayfor automatic air conditioning.

Automatic air recirculationcontrol AUCPrincipleAutomatic air recirculation control AUC detectspollutants in the outside air. The supply of out‐side air is shut off and the interior air is recircula‐ted.

GeneralWhen the system is activated, a sensor detectspollutants in the outside air and controls theshut-off automatically.When the system is deactivated, outside airflows into the interior continuously.Continuous recirculated-air mode deterioratesthe air quality in the interior and condensation onthe windows increases.


1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Air quality"5. "Automatic"If there is condensation, shut down recirculated-air mode or remove the condensation, seepage 269.

Recirculated-air modePrincipleIf the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasantodour or contains pollutants, the supply to the in‐terior of the vehicle can be shut off. The air insidethe vehicle is then recirculated.

Seite 267

Climate CONTROLS


OperationPress the button repeatedly to call upan operating mode.

The LED is illuminated when the recirculated-airmode is switched on. The outside air supply ispermanently shut off.

Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Air quality"5. Select the desired setting:

▷ "Fresh air"▷ "Air recirculation"

The recirculated-air mode automatically switchesoff after a given time depending on the ambientconditions, to avoid condensation.Continuous recirculated-air mode deterioratesthe air quality in the interior and condensation onthe windows increases.If there is condensation, shut down recirculated-air mode or remove the condensation, seepage 269.

To adjust the air flow manuallyPrincipleThe air flow for air conditioning can be set man‐ually.

GeneralTo be able to adjust the air flow manually, firstswitch off the AUTO program.

OperationPress upper or lower side of button: re‐duce or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display forautomatic air conditioning.

In order to protect the battery the air flow rate ofthe automatic air conditioning is reduced, if nec‐essary.

To adjust the air distributionmanuallyPrincipleThe air distribution for air conditioning can be setmanually.

OperationPress the button repeatedly to select aprogramme:

▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell.▷ Upper body area and footwell.▷ Footwell.▷ Windows and footwell.▷ Windows.▷ Windows and upper body.▷ Upper body area.The selected air distribution is shown on the dis‐play for automatic air conditioning.If there is condensation, remove it, seepage 269.

SYNC programmePrincipleThe following settings on the driver's side can betransferred to the front passenger's side:▷ Temperature.▷ Air flow.▷ Air distribution.▷ AUTO programme.

Seite 268

CONTROLS Climate



1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Synchronise"The programme is switched off automatically ifsettings are changed on the front passenger'sside or in the rear passenger compartment.

Defrosting the windscreen andremoving condensationPrincipleIce and condensation are quickly removed fromthe windscreen and the front side windows.

Switching on/offPress the button.The LED is illuminated when the sys‐

tem is switched on.

Point the side nozzles at the side windows if nec‐essary. The air flow can be adjusted manuallywhen the system is switched on.

If there is condensation on the window,press the button on the driver's side or

switch on the cooling function to use the advan‐tages of the condensation sensor. Ensure that aircan flow towards the windscreen.

Rear window heatingPress the button. The LED is illumina‐ted.

The function is available when the engine is run‐ning.The rear window heating is switched off auto‐matically after a certain period of time.

Microfilter/activated carbon filterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐coming air.The activated carbon filter also removes gaseouspollutants from the outside air entering the vehi‐cle.Have this combined filter replaced during vehiclemaintenance, see page 344.

VentilationPrincipleThe direction of the air flows can be set individu‐ally.

Setting the ventilationGeneralThe direction of the air flows can be set for director indirect ventilation.

Direct ventilationAlign the air flow directly onto the vehicle occu‐pants. The air flow provides noticeable heating orcooling depending on the set temperature.

Indirect ventilationDo not align the air flow directly onto the vehicleoccupants. The vehicle interior is cooled orheated indirectly depending on the set tempera‐ture.

Seite 269

Climate CONTROLS


Ventilation at front

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐rows 1.

▷ Knurled wheel for steplessly opening andclosing the side nozzles, arrows 2.

Independent ventilation/auxiliary heatingPrincipleThe system consists of independent ventilationand auxiliary heating. It allows the temperature ofthe interior to be adjusted before the journeystarts. The interior is ventilated or heated de‐pending on the set temperature and ambienttemperature. When doing so, the system usesany available residual heat from the engine or thevehicle's fuel for generating heat.

GeneralThe system can be switched on and off directlyor for a preselected departure time.The switch-on time is calculated based on theoutside temperature. The system will switch onin good time before the preselected departuretime.If ambient temperatures are below 0 ℃/32 ℉,water vapour condenses and wets the groundunderneath the vehicle.

Safety notes

DANGERA blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to enterthe vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain pollu‐tants which are colourless and odourless. In en‐closed spaces, the exhaust fumes can alsobuild up outside the vehicle. There is a dangerof fatal injury. Keep the exhaust pipe clear andensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch onthe auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces, for ex‐ample closed garages.

WARNINGWhen the auxiliary heating is operating, hightemperatures can be generated under thebody, for example because of the exhaust sys‐tem. If flammable materials come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system, these ma‐terials can catch fire. There is a risk of fire.Make sure that no flammable materials, for ex‐ample leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil or otherflammable objects, can come into contact withvehicle parts when the auxiliary heating is oper‐ating. Switch off the auxiliary heating before re‐fuelling.

Operating requirements▷ Vehicle is in idle or standby state and not in

drive-ready state.▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.

When activated, the independent ventilation/auxiliary heating uses power from the vehiclebattery. As a result, the maximum activationtime is restricted to protect the battery. Afterthe engine is started or after driving a shortdistance, the system will be available again.

▷ Auxiliary heating: sufficient fuel in the tank.

Seite 270

CONTROLS Climate


If the fuel level is low and the vehicle isparked on a slant, the function of the auxiliaryheating may be limited.

▷ Ensure that the date and time are set cor‐rectly in the vehicle.

▷ Open the side nozzles to allow the air to enterthe passenger compartment.



The air conditioning menu is displayed.Individual settings can be performed for certainair conditioning functions.

Switching on/off directlyGeneralThe system can be switched on or off in variousways.The system switches off automatically after acertain period of time. It continues to run for ashort time after it has been switched off.

Using the buttonIf the vehicle is in standby state, the independentventilation can be switched on or off via the but‐tons of the automatic air conditioning.Press any button, except:▷ Rear window heating.▷ Lower side of air flow button.▷ Seat heating.▷ Seat ventilation.▷ Menu.The system switches off after leaving and lock‐ing the vehicle.

Via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"

3. "Climate comfort"4. "Auxiliary ventilation" or "Auxiliary heating/

ventilation"5. "Activate now"

Using BMW display key

Switching on1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display

key.2. "Precondit. setting"3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.4. "Activate now"5. "Start"

Switching off1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display

key.2. "Precondit. setting"3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.4. "Stop"

Display

Symbol Description Symbol on the display for

automatic air conditioning.Illuminated: auxiliary heatingis switched on.Flashing: the residual heatof the engine is being used.

Symbol on the display forautomatic air conditioning.Flashing: independent venti‐lation is switched on.

Seite 271

Climate CONTROLS


Departure timePrincipleTo ensure a pleasant interior temperature in thevehicle at the start of the journey, it is possible toset different departure times.▷ One-off departure time: the time can be set.

System is switched on once.▷ Departure time with day of the week: time

and day of the week can be set.The system is switched on in good time be‐fore the set departure time on the requireddays of the week.

The departure time is preselected in two steps:▷ Set departure times.▷ Activate departure time.

Setting the departure time

Via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Auxiliary ventilation" or "Auxiliary heating/

ventilation"5. "Departure schedule"6. Select the required departure time.7. Setting the departure time.8. Select the day of the week if necessary.

Using BMW display key1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display

key.2. "Precondit. setting"3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.4. Select the required departure time.5. Setting the departure time.6. Select the day of the week if necessary.7. "OK"

Activating the departure time

Operating requirementsIf a departure time is to influence activation of theauxiliary heating/independent ventilation, the rel‐evant departure time must be activated first.

Via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Auxiliary ventilation" or "Auxiliary heating/

ventilation"5. "Preconditioning for departure"6. Activate the required departure time.


key.2. "Precondit. setting"3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.4. Tap the symbol.5. Activate the required departure time.

Display , Symbol on the automatic air condition‐

ing system signals that a departure time hasbeen activated.

Standing air conditioningvia Remote Engine StartPrincipleStanding air conditioning cools or warms the in‐terior to a comfortable temperature before start‐ing to drive. In addition, the system cools, venti‐lates or heats automatically depending on theinternal, external and set desired temperature.Any snow and ice can be easier to remove.

Seite 272

CONTROLS Climate


The system starts the engine automatically forthis purpose and lets it run for a limited time.

Safety notes

DANGERA blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to pollutethe area around the vehicle or enter it. The ex‐haust fumes contain pollutants which are col‐ourless and odourless. In enclosed spaces orspaces with inadequate ventilation, the exhaustfumes can also build up outside the vehicle.There is a danger of fatal injury. Keep the ex‐haust pipe clear and ensure sufficient ventila‐tion. Do not switch on the standing air condi‐tioning in enclosed or poorly ventilated spaces,for example closed garages.

WARNINGWhen the standing air conditioning is operating,high temperatures can be generated under thebody, for example because of the exhaust sys‐tem. If flammable materials come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system, these ma‐terials can catch fire. There is a risk of fire.Make sure that no flammable materials, for ex‐ample leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil or otherflammable objects, can come into contact withvehicle parts when the standing air conditioningis operating.

Enabling automatic engine startThe automatic engine start must be enabled be‐fore using the system.This enables the engine to switch on automati‐cally in order to control the interior climate.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"

4. "Aux. climate control/ventilation"5. If applicable, "Remote Engine Start"6. "Engine start for climate control"7. Confirm the disclaimer.

Acknowledgement signals of thevehicleThe system switch-on is acknowledged by twoflashes.The side lights remain switched on while thesystem is switched on.



The air conditioning menu is displayed.Individual settings can be performed for certainair conditioning functions.

Switching on/off directlyGeneralThe system can be switched on or off directly invarious ways:▷ Via iDrive.▷ Via remote control.▷ Via BMW display key.The system switches off automatically after ap‐prox. 15 minutes.For safety reasons, the system can only beswitched on twice in succession. The system willbe available again once the drive-ready state hasbeen activated and deactivated again.

Via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"

Seite 273

Climate CONTROLS


4. "Aux. climate control/ventilation"5. "Activate now"

Using remote controlThe system can be switched on and off usingthe remote control.

Press the remote control button threetimes within 1 second

After the remote control is pressed, it will takearound 3 seconds for the engine to switch on.

To switch the system off, press the button againthree times.

Using BMW display key

Switching on1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display

key.2. "Precondit. setting"3. Tap the symbol.4. "Activate now"5. "Start"

Switching off1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display

key.2. "Precondit. setting"3. Tap the symbol.4. "Stop"

Display

Symbol Description Symbol on the BMW display

key for the automatic airconditioning.The symbol flashes whenthe Remote Engine Start isswitched on.

Climate control for a specifieddeparture timeGeneralTo ensure a pleasant interior temperature in thevehicle at the start of the journey, it is possible toset scheduled departure times in the system.▷ One-off departure time: the scheduled depar‐

ture time can be set.The system is switched on as a one-off.

▷ Departure time with day of the week: thescheduled departure time and day of theweek can be set.The system is switched on 10 minutes be‐fore the set departure time on the requireddays of the week.

The departure time is preselected in two steps:▷ Set departure times.▷ Activate departure time.The system is switched on around 10 minutesbefore the set departure time and remains on forup to 5 minutes after the set departure time.For safety reasons, the system can only beswitched on twice in succession. The system willbe available again once the drive-ready state hasbeen activated and deactivated again.Observe the information regarding intended useof the vehicle, see page 10.

Setting the departure time

Via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Aux. climate control/ventilation"5. Select the required departure time.6. Setting the departure time.7. Select the day of the week if necessary.

Seite 274

CONTROLS Climate



key.2. "Precondit. setting"3. Tap the symbol.4. Select the required departure time.5. Setting the departure time.6. Select the day of the week if necessary.7. "OK"

Activating the departure time

Operating requirementsIf a desired departure time is to control when thesystem is switched on, the relevant departuretime must be activated first.

Via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Climate comfort"4. "Aux. climate control/ventilation"5. Activate the required departure time.

, Symbol on the automatic air condition‐ing system signals when a departure time is ac‐tive


key.2. "Precondit. setting"3. Tap the symbol.4. Activate the desired departure time:

Tap the symbol. , Symbol on the automatic air condition‐

ing system signals that a departure time hasbeen activated.

Operating air conditioningfunctions using spokencommandsGeneral▷ Instructions for the voice control system, see

page 58.▷ When using spoken commands for operation,

it is possible to switch between voice control,iDrive and buttons.

▷ To have possible voice commands readaloud: ›Voice commands‹ or ›Help‹.

Saying voice commandsMost air conditioning functions can be operatedusing spoken commands from the vehicle inte‐rior, for example:▷ Activating the air conditioning sys‐

tem: ›Activate climate control‹.▷ Deactivating the automatic recirculated-air

function: ›Deactivate automatic airrecirculation‹.

▷ Specifying a particular tempera‐ture: ›Temperature [...] at ...‹.

Seite 275

Climate CONTROLS


Interior equipmentVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Integrated universal remotecontrolPrincipleThe universal remote control integrated in therear-view mirror can be used to operate up to3 functions of radio controlled systems, for ex‐ample garage door drives or lighting systems.

GeneralThe integrated universal remote control replacesup to 3 different hand-held remotes. For opera‐tion, the buttons on the rear-view mirror must beprogrammed with the desired functions. The rel‐evant system is needed to programme the hand-held remote.Before you sell the vehicle, delete the savedfunctions beforehand for your own security.

Safety note

WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenoperating radio-controlled systems, for examplea garage door, with the integrated universal re‐mote control. There is a danger of injury ordamage to property. When programming andoperating, make sure that the area of move‐ment of the particular system is kept clear. Alsofollow the safety notes supplied with the hand-held transmitter.

CompatibilityThis symbol on the packaging or in theoperating instructions of the system tobe operated indicates that the system is

generally compatible with the integrated univer‐sal remote control.A list of compatible hand-held transmitters isavailable on the Internet: www.homelink.com

HomeLink is a registered trademark of GentexCorporation.

Controls on the rear-view mirror

▷ Buttons, arrow 1.▷ LED, arrow 2.

Seite 276

CONTROLS Interior equipment


▷ Hand-held transmitter arrow 3; required forprogramming.

ProgrammingGeneral1. Switch on standby state.2. Initial operation:

Simultaneously press and hold the two outerbuttons on the rear-view mirror for approxi‐mately. 10 seconds until the LED on the rear-view mirror flashes green rapidly. All currentprogramming for the buttons on the rear-viewmirror is deleted.

3. Press the button on the rear-view mirror to beprogrammed. The LED on the rear-view mir‐ror flashes orange slowly.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the systemto be operated approximately 2 to 8 cm, 1 to3 in, away from the buttons on the rear-viewmirror. The distance required depends on thehand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button for the desiredfunction on the hand-held transmitter.

6. Release the buttons as soon as the LEDflashes green more rapidly or illuminates. Thegreen light indicates that the button on therear-view mirror has been programmed.Flashing green more rapidly indicates thatthis is an alternating-code radio system.If the LED does not start to flash more rapidlyafter a maximum of 60 seconds, change thedistance between the rear-view mirror andhand-held transmitter and repeat the step.Several attempts at various distances may benecessary. Wait at least 15 seconds betweenattempts.

7. To programme other functions on other but‐tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be operated with the buttonson the rear-view mirror.

Special instruction for alternating-code radio systemsIf the system cannot be operated after repeatedprogramming, check whether the system to beoperated is equipped with an alternating-coderadio system.To do this, consult in the user manual of the sys‐tem or hold down the programmed button on therear-view mirror for longer. If the LED on therear-view mirror first flashes rapidly and then illu‐minates constantly for 2 seconds, the system isequipped with an alternating-code radio system.The flashing and illuminating of the LED are re‐peated for approximately 20 seconds.For systems with an alternating-code radio sys‐tem, the integrated universal remote control andthe system must also be synchronised.Please find information on the synchronisation inthe user manual of the system to be set.To make synchronisation easier, enlist the assis‐tance of a second person.Synchronise integrated universal remote controlwith system:

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the radioremote-controlled system.

2. Program the corresponding button on therear-view mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronisation buttonon the system being set. The next step mustbe carried out within approximately 30 sec‐onds.

4. Hold down the programmed button on therear-view mirror for 3 seconds and then re‐lease. Repeat this step as needed up to threetimes to complete synchronisation. Whensynchronisation is completed, the program‐med function is run.

Seite 277

Interior equipment CONTROLS


Reprogramming individualbuttons1. Switch on standby state.2. Press and hold the button on the rear-view

mirror to be programmed.3. As soon as the LED on the rear-view mirror

flashes slowly orange, keep the hand-heldtransmitter for the system to be operated ap‐proximately 2 to 8 cm, 1 to 3 in away from thebuttons on the rear-view mirror. The distancerequired depends on the hand-held transmit‐ter.

4. Also press and hold the button for the de‐sired function on the hand-held transmitter.

5. As soon as the LED on the rear-view mirrorflashes faster or illuminates, release both but‐tons. The faster flashing or illumination showsthat the button on the rear-view mirror hasbeen programmed. The system can then beoperated with the button on the rear-viewmirror.If the LED does not start to flash faster after amaximum of 60 seconds, change the dis‐tance and repeat the programming fromstep 4 onwards. Several attempts at variousdistances may be necessary. Wait at least15 seconds between attempts.

Operation

WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenoperating radio-controlled systems, for examplea garage door, with the integrated universal re‐mote control. There is a danger of injury ordamage to property. When programming andoperating, make sure that the area of move‐ment of the particular system is kept clear. Alsofollow the safety notes supplied with the hand-held transmitter.

The system, for example the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the rear-view mir‐

ror when the drive-ready state or standby state isswitched on. To do this, press and hold the but‐ton within the reception range of the system, un‐til the function is triggered. The LED on the rear-view mirror illuminates constantly when the radiosignal is being transmitted.

Deleting saved functionsSimultaneously press and hold the two outerbuttons on the rear-view mirror for approxi‐mately. 10 seconds until the LED flashes rapidlygreen. All saved functions are deleted. It is notpossible to clear functions individually.

Sun visorGlare protectionFold the sun visor downwards or upwards.

Glare protection from the sideFolding out1. Fold the sun visor downwards.2. Remove the sun visor from the bracket and

pivot it sideways to the side window.

Folding upTo close the sun visor, follow the reverse se‐quence.

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is situated in the sun visor behinda cover. The mirror light switches on when thecover is opened.

Seite 278



AshtraysFront centre consoleOpening1. Press the cover.

2. The ashtray is located in one of the cuphold‐ers. Fold the cover of the ashtray upwards.

Emptying

With the cover closed, pull the ashtray out of thecupholder.

LighterSafety notes

WARNINGContact with the hot heating element or the hotfitting of the lighter can cause burns. Flamma‐ble materials can catch fire if the lighter is drop‐ped or is held against other objects. There is adanger of fire and injury. Take hold of thelighter by its handle. Ensure that children do notuse the lighter as there is a risk of burns.

NOTEIf metallic objects fall into the socket, they cancause a short circuit. There is a danger of dam‐age to property. After using the socket, put thelighter or socket cover back on.

Front centre console

Press the cover.

The lighter is located between the cupholders.

Seite 279



OperationPress in the cigarette lighter.The cigarette lighter can be re‐moved when it pops back out.

Power socketsPrincipleThe cigarette lighter attachment can be used asa socket for electrical devices when standbystate or drive-ready state is switched on.

GeneralThe total load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volts.To avoid damage to the socket, do not insert anincompatible plug.

Safety notes

WARNINGDevices and cables, for example portable navi‐gation devices, that are located in the deploy‐ment range of the airbags may impede airbagdeployment or be flung around the vehicle inte‐rior when the airbag is deployed. There is adanger of injury. Make sure that devices andcables are not in the deployment range of theairbags.

NOTEBattery chargers for the vehicle battery mayoperate with high voltages and high currentswhich can overload or damage the 12-volt on-board network. There is a danger of damage toproperty. Only connect battery chargers for thevehicle battery to the jump-starting connec‐tions in the engine compartment.

NOTEIf metallic objects fall into the socket, they cancause a short circuit. There is a danger of dam‐age to property. After using the socket, put thelighter or socket cover back on.

Front centre armrest

There is a socket in the centre armrest.

Front centre console

Press the cover.

A socket is located between the cupholdersPull off the cover.

Seite 280



USB interfaceGeneralComply with the notes on connecting mobile de‐vices to the USB interface in the chapter on USBconnections, see page 74.

In the centre armrest

A USB interface is in the centre armrest.

In the centre console

NOTEObjects in the storage compartment, for exam‐ple large USB connectors, can block or damagethe cover on opening and closing. There is adanger of damage to property. When openingand closing, make sure that the area of move‐ment of the cover is kept clear.

Press the cover.

A USB interface is in the centre console.

Seite 281



Storage compartmentsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Storage facilitiesGeneralThe following storage facilities are located in theinterior:▷ Glove box on the passenger side, see

page 282.▷ Pockets in the doors, see page 283.▷ Storage compartment in the centre console,

see page 283.▷ Centre armrest, see page 283.▷ Pockets on the back rests of the front seats.

Safety notes

WARNINGLoose objects or devices connected by a cableto the vehicle, for example mobile telephones,may be flung around the interior during thejourney, for example in an accident or duringbraking and evasive manoeuvres. There is adanger of injury. Ensure that loose objects ordevices connected by cable to the vehicle aresecured in place in the interior.

NOTEAnti-slip mats can damage the dashboard.There is a danger of damage to property. Donot use anti-slip mats.

Glove box on thepassenger sideSafety note

WARNINGThe glove box projects into the interior when itis opened. Objects in the glove box may beflung around the interior during the journey, forexample in an accident or during braking andevasive manoeuvres. There is a danger of in‐jury. Immediately close the glove box after us‐ing it.

Opening

Pull the handle.The lighting in the glove box comes on.

ClosingFold the cover up.

Seite 282

CONTROLS Storage compartments


LockingThe glove box can be locked with an integratedkey. This prevents access to the glove box.After the glove box has been locked, the remotecontrol without the integrated key can be handedover, for example if the car is being parked by avalet service.

Pockets in the doorsGeneralThere are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety note

WARNINGFragile objects, for example glass bottles orglasses, can break in the event of an accident.Shards may scatter throughout the interior.There is a danger of injury or damage to prop‐erty. Do not use any fragile objects while driv‐ing. Only stow fragile objects in closed storagecompartments.

Storage compartment inthe centre consoleOpening

Press the cover.

ClosingPull back the cover on the handle strip.

Front centre armrestGeneralThere is a storage compartment in the centrearmrest between the seats.

Opening

Press the button.

ClosingPush cover downwards until it engages.

Cupholder frontSafety note

NOTEUnsuitable containers in the cupholder and hotdrinks can damage the cupholders and in‐crease the risk of injury in an accident. There isa danger of injury or damage to property. Uselightweight, sealable containers that are shat‐terproof. Do not transport hot drinks. Do notforce objects into the cupholder.

Seite 283

Storage compartments CONTROLS


Opening

Press the cover.

There are two cupholders in the centre console.

ClosingPull back the cover on the handle strip.

Coat hooksSafety notes

WARNINGItems of clothing on the coat hooks can impairvisibility when driving. There is a danger of acci‐dents. Hang items of clothing from the coathooks so they do not obstruct visibility whendriving.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the coat hooks can present adanger, for example if objects are flung aroundin the event of braking and evasive manoeu‐vres. There is a danger of injury and damage toproperty. Only hang lightweight objects, for ex‐ample items of clothing, on the coat hooks.

GeneralThe clothes hooks are on the door pillar in therear.

Seite 284

CONTROLS Storage compartments


BootVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

LoadsSafety notes

WARNINGA high gross vehicle weight can make the tyresto overheat, causing internal damage and asudden loss of tyre inflation pressure. Handlingcharacteristics can be negatively influenced, forexample reduced directional stability, longerbraking distance and modified steering charac‐teristics. There is a danger of accidents. Pleasecomply with the permitted load index of thetyre, and do not exceed the permitted gross ve‐hicle weight.

WARNINGIf the permitted total weight and the permittedaxle loads are exceeded, the operational safetyof the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. There isa danger of accidents. Do not exceed the per‐mitted total weight and permitted axle loads.

WARNINGLoose objects or devices connected by a cableto the vehicle, for example mobile telephones,may be flung around the interior during thejourney, for example in an accident or duringbraking and evasive manoeuvres. There is adanger of injury. Ensure that loose objects ordevices connected by cable to the vehicle aresecured in place in the interior.

WARNINGIncorrectly stowed objects may slip or be flunginto the interior, for example in an accident, dur‐ing braking or evasive manoeuvres. Vehicle oc‐cupants could be struck and injured. There is adanger of injury. Stow and secure objects andthe load correctly.

NOTELiquids in the boot may cause damage. Thereis a danger of damage to property. Ensure thatno liquids leak out into the boot.

Stowing and securing atransported load▷ Wrap protective material around any sharp

corners and edges on the load.▷ Heavy transported loads: stow as far forward

and as low down as possible, ideally directlybehind the rear backrests.

▷ Very heavy transported loads: stow as far for‐ward and as low down as possible, ideally di‐rectly behind the rear backrests. If there areno passengers on the back seat, insert bothouter seat belts into the respective oppositebuckles.

Seite 285

Boot CONTROLS


▷ Fully fold down the rear backrests if a largeload is to be stowed.

▷ Small and lightweight transported loads: canbe secured with retaining straps, a luggagenet or other suitable straps.

▷ Large and heavy transported loads: securewith lashing straps.

Lashing eyes in the bootGeneralEquipment for securing the transported load,such as lashing straps, tensioning straps or lug‐gage nets, must be secured to the lashing eyesin the boot.

Lashing eyes

Four lashing eyes are located in the boot for se‐curing the loads.

NetSmaller objects can be stowed in the net on theright-hand side. Move the net down to transportlarger objects.

Side storage compartment,leftGeneralThere is a storage compartment on the left sideof the boot.

Opening

Pull the handle.

Extending the bootPrincipleThe boot can be extended by folding down therear backrest.

GeneralThe rear backrest is split 50–50.

Safety notes

WARNINGRisk of entrapment when folding down the rearbackrest. There is a danger of injury or damageto property. Before folding down, make surethat the area of movement of the rear backrestand the head restraint is kept clear.

Seite 286

CONTROLS Boot


WARNINGIf a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecuredcargo may be flung into the interior, for examplein the event of an accident or during braking orevasive manoeuvres. There is a danger of in‐jury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest islocked after it has been folded back.

WARNINGIf the seat adjustment or child seat installationis incorrect, the child restraint system may havelimited stability or may not be stable at all.There is a danger of injury or even death. Makesure the child restraint system is firmly posi‐tioned against the backrest. Wherever possible,adapt the backrest angle of all the relevant seatbackrests and adjust the seats correctly. Makesure that the seats and their backrests are cor‐rectly engaged or locked. If possible, adjust theheight of the head restraints, or remove them.

NOTEVehicle parts can be damaged when foldingdown the rear backrest. There is a danger ofdamage to property. When folding down, makesure that the area of movement of the rearbackrest including head restraint is kept clear.

Folding down the rear backrestFrom the boot

Pull the lever in the boot.▷ Left lever: left backrest folds forwards.▷ Right lever: right backrest folds forwards.

Folding back the rear backrestFold the rear backrest back into seat position andengage.

Seite 287

Boot CONTROLS


288


DRIVING HINTSDriving precautions ................................................................................. 290Saving fuel ................................................................................................ 295


Driving precautionsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Running inGeneralMoving parts must adapt to one another.The following notes will help to maximise the ve‐hicle's lifetime and efficiency.

Safety note

WARNINGNew parts and components can cause safetyand Driver Assistance Systems to respond witha delay. There is a danger of accidents. Afternew parts have been installed or if the vehicle isnew, drive moderately and intervene at an earlystage if necessary. Please comply with running-in procedures for the corresponding parts andcomponents.

Engine, gearbox and differentialUp to 2000 km, 1200 milesDo not exceed the maximum engine revs andspeed:

▷ With petrol engines, 4500 rpm and 160 km/h,approximately 100 mph.

▷ With diesel engines, 3500 rpm and 150 km/h,approximately 93 mph.

Generally avoid kick-down and driving under fullload.

From 2000 km, 1200 miles onwardsEngine and road speeds can be gradually in‐creased.

TyresDue to the manufacturing process, new tyres donot provide maximum grip immediately.Drive moderately for the first 300 km, approxi‐mately 200 miles.

Brake systemBrake discs and pads only achieve their full ef‐fectiveness after approximately 500 km,300 miles. Drive moderately during this running-in period.

After fitting new partsComply with the running-in procedures again ifthe components previously referred to are re‐newed.

Seite 290

DRIVING HINTS Driving precautions


General driving informationClosing the boot lidSafety note

WARNINGWhen open, the boot lid protrudes above thevehicle, and in the event of an accident, brakingor evasive manoeuvres, it can endanger vehicleoccupants and other road users, or damage thevehicle. Exhaust fumes may also enter the pas‐senger compartment. There is a danger of in‐jury or damage to property. Do not drive withthe boot lid open.

Driving with the boot lid openIf there is no alternative to driving with the tail‐gate open:▷ Close all windows.▷ Turn up the blower to a high setting.▷ Maintain a moderate speed.

Hot exhaust system

WARNINGDuring vehicle operation, high temperaturesmay occur under the vehicle body, for exampledue to the exhaust system. If flammable materi‐als, for example leaves or grass, come into con‐tact with hot parts of the exhaust system, thesematerials can catch fire. There is a danger of in‐jury or damage to property. Never remove theheat shields fitted here or apply underseal tothem. Make sure that when driving, idling orparking, no flammable materials can come intocontact with hot vehicle parts. Do not touch thehot exhaust system.

Exhaust gas particle filterPrincipleThe exhaust gas particle filter collects soot parti‐cles. The soot particles are burned at high tem‐peratures to clean the exhaust gas particle filteras necessary.

GeneralThe cleaning process takes a few minutes, dur‐ing which the following may occur:▷ Engine temporarily runs a bit roughly.▷ A slightly higher engine speed is required to

achieve the usual power output.▷ A small amount of smoke from the exhaust,

even after stopping the engine.▷ Noise, for example caused by the radiator fan

running, even some minutes after stoppingthe engine.

It is normal for the radiator fan to keep runningfor several minutes, even after short trips.

Petrol engine: Cleaning the exhaustgas particle filter while drivingVarious driver profiles ensure that the exhaustgas particle filter is self-cleaning. If, in addition tothe self-cleaning function, the exhaust gas parti‐cle filter needs to be actively cleaned while driv‐ing, a Check Control message is displayed.Proceed as follows the next time you drive out‐side of built-up areas for around 30 minutes:▷ Deactivate cruise Control systems.▷ Take your foot off the accelerator repeatedly

and allow the vehicle to roll in overrun mode,see page 296.

▷ If possible, drive at alternating speeds.

Seite 291

Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS


Climate comfort windscreen

The marked area does not have a heat reflectingcoating.Use this area for garage door openers, devicesfor electronic toll recording and other similar de‐vices.

Radio signals

WARNINGCertain vehicle functions may be affected by in‐terference from high-frequency radio signals.Such signals originate from various transmittersystems, for example, from air traffic beaconsor relay stations for mobile telecommunica‐tions.We recommend you consult a Service Partnershould you experience any difficulties in this re‐gard.

Mobile communication in thevehicle

WARNINGThere is a possibility of reciprocal interferencebetween the vehicle electronics and mobileradio devices. Radiation is generated when mo‐bile radio devices are transmitting. There is adanger of injury or damage to property. If possi‐ble, only use mobile radio devices, for examplemobile telephones, in the interior if they areconnected directly to an external antenna in or‐

der to eliminate reciprocal interference and todissipate the radiation from vehicle's interior.

AquaplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water canform between the tyres and the road.This situation, known as aquaplaning, means thatthe tyre can actually lose contact completely withthe road surface and the vehicle can neither besteered nor the brakes properly applied.

WadingGeneralPlease comply with the following when drivingthrough water:▷ Only drive through still water.▷ Only drive through water up to a max. depth

of 25 cm, 9.8 in.▷ Drive through water at a walking speed of no

more than 5 km/h, 3 mph.

Safety note

NOTEDriving through excessively deep water too fastcan result in water entering the engine com‐partment, electrical system or transmission.There is a danger of damage to property. Whendriving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐mum water depth and speed specified above.

Safe brakingGeneralThe vehicle is equipped with the Anti-lock BrakeSystem ABS as standard.Perform full braking in situations that require it.The vehicle remains steerable. Any obstaclescan be avoided by performing steering move‐ments as smoothly as possible.

Seite 292



A pulsing of the brake pedal and hydraulic regu‐lating sounds indicate that the Anti-lock BrakeSystem ABS is regulating.In certain braking situations, the perforated brakediscs can cause functional noise. However, func‐tional noises have no effect on the efficiency andoperational safety of the brakes.

Objects in the range of movement ofthe pedals

WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or block a pedal that has beenpressed. There is a danger of accidents. Stowitems in the vehicle so that they are secure andcannot get into the driver's footwell. Only usefloor mats that are suitable for the vehicle andcan be securely fastened to the floor. Do notuse loose floor mats, and do not place severalfloor mats on top of one another. Make surethat there is sufficient space for the pedals. En‐sure that floor mats are securely reattached af‐ter having been removed, for example forcleaning.

Wet roadsIn damp weather, on gritted roads and in heavyrain, apply the brakes lightly every few kilome‐tres/miles.Ensure that you do not obstruct other road userswhen doing so.The heat generated by braking dries the brakediscs and brake pads, and protects them againstcorrosion.This way, brake power is available immediately,whenever it is needed.

Downhill gradients

GeneralWhen driving on long or steep downhillstretches, use the gear in which the least braking

is required. Otherwise the brake system canoverheat and braking effect is reduced.Engine braking effect can be additionally in‐creased by manually shifting down, even into firstgear, if applicable.

Safety notes

WARNINGEven slight continuous pressure on the brakepedal can cause overheating, brake pad wear oreven brake system failure. There is a danger ofaccidents. Avoid excessive loads on the brake.

WARNINGWhen idling or with the engine switched off,safety-relevant functions are restricted or nolonger available, for example the braking effectof the engine or power assistance for the brak‐ing force and steering. There is a danger of ac‐cidents. Do not drive at idle speed or with theengine switched off.

Corrosion of the brake discCorrosion of the brake discs and contaminationof the brake pads increase in the following cir‐cumstances:▷ Low mileage.▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used.▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.▷ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents.Should corrosion form on the brake discs, thebrakes will tend to respond with a judder effectthat generally cannot be eliminated.

Condensation when vehicle isparkedWhen the automatic air conditioning is in opera‐tion, condensation develops which exits under‐neath the vehicle.

Seite 293

Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS


Roof rackGeneralInstallation is only possible if the vehicle is equip‐ped with a roof strip with flaps.Roof racks are available as special equipment.

Roof strip with flaps

The mounting points are located on the roof stripabove the doors.Fold the cover outwards.

FittingFollow the installation instructions for the roofrack.

Magnetic roof luggage racksMagnetic roof luggage racks cannot be used.

LoadsA loaded roof rack alters the vehicle's road be‐haviour and steering response by shifting its cen‐tre of gravity.When loading and driving, bear the following inmind:▷ Do not exceed the permitted roof and axle

loads or the permitted gross weight.▷ Distribute the roof load evenly.▷ The roof load must not be spread over a large

area.▷ Place heavy items of luggage at the bottom.

▷ Securely fasten the luggage, for example withtensioning straps.

▷ Do not allow objects to protrude into theswing range of the boot lid.

▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐tion, braking or cornering.

Driving on a racing trackThe higher mechanical and thermal loads in‐volved in driving on racing tracks lead to in‐creased wear. This wear is not covered by thewarranty. The vehicle is not conceived for use inmotor sports competitions.The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendsspecial sport tyres, known as high-performancetyres, that have been optimised for use on racingtracks in dry conditions. To find out more infor‐mation about sport tyres, ask a Service Partner ofthe manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.Before and after driving on a racing track, havethe vehicle checked at a Service Partner of themanufacturer or another qualified Service Partneror a specialist workshop.

Seite 294



Saving fuelVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Reducing fuel consumptionGeneralThe vehicle possesses wide-ranging technolo‐gies for reducing consumption and emission lev‐els.Fuel consumption depends on various factors.A number of measures, such as a moderate driv‐ing style and regular maintenance, can influencefuel consumption and reduce burden on environ‐ment.

Remove transported load that isnot requiredExtra weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove add-on parts after useIf no longer required, remove auxiliary mirrors,roof racks and rear-mounted racks after use.Add-on parts on the vehicle interfere with its aer‐odynamic performance and increase fuel con‐sumption.

Close windowsOpen windows increase drag and consequentlyfuel consumption.

TyresGeneralTyres can have differing effects on consumption.For example, consumption can be affected bytyre size.

Checking tyre inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if necessary, correct the tyre inflationpressures at least twice a month and before set‐ting off on a longer journey.Insufficient tyre inflation pressure increases roll‐ing resistance and consequently fuel consump‐tion and tyre wear.

Drive off immediatelyDo not warm up the engine with the vehicle at astandstill; it is preferable to set off straight away,driving at moderate engine speeds.This brings the cold engine to operating temper‐ature as quickly as possible.

Drive with foresightAnticipating the road situation and adopting asmooth driving style will reduce fuel consump‐tion.Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily.Keep an appropriate distance from the precedingvehicle.

Avoid high engine speedsDriving at low engine speeds reduces fuel con‐sumption and wear.

Seite 295

Saving fuel DRIVING HINTS


Pay attention to the shift point indicator, seepage 155, in the vehicle, if fitted.

Make use of overrun modeWhen approaching a red traffic light, take yourfoot off the accelerator and allow the vehicle toroll.On downward stretches, take your foot off theaccelerator and allow the vehicle to roll.The fuel supply is interrupted in overrun mode.

Switch off the engine if stoppingfor a relatively long timeStopping the engineWhen you stop the vehicle for longer periods, forexample at traffic lights, railway crossings or intraffic jams, switch off the engine.

Auto Start Stop functionThe Auto Start Stop function of the vehicle shutsoff the engine automatically during a stop.If the engine is switched off and then startedagain, the fuel consumption and emissions arereduced compared with a permanently runningengine. Savings can be made just by stoppingthe engine for a few seconds.Fuel consumption also depends on other factors,such as driving style, road condition, mainte‐nance or environmental factors, for example.

Switch off functions which arenot currently requiredFunctions such as seat heating or rear windowheating require a great deal of energy and in‐crease fuel consumption, especially in city trafficand stop-and-go traffic.Switch these functions off if they are not re‐quired.The ECO PRO drive mode supports energy-sav‐ing use of comfort functions. These functions areautomatically deactivated wholly or partially.

Have maintenance work carriedoutHave the vehicle serviced regularly to achieveoptimal economy and lifetime. BMW recom‐mends having maintenance work carried out by aBMW Service Partner.Please also see the BMW Maintenance System,see page 344.

ECO PROPrincipleECO PRO supports an efficient driving style. Todo this, the engine management and comfortfunctions, such as for example the air condition‐ing power, are adjusted.The engine is disconnected from the gearbox inselector lever position D under certain circum‐stances. The vehicle rolls when idling to optimiseconsumption. Selector lever position D remainsengaged.In addition, situation-dependent notes, ECOPRO tips, can be displayed which help you todrive with optimum consumption.In the instrument cluster, the extension of therange achieved as a result can be displayed as abonus range.

GeneralThe system comprises the followingEfficientDynamics functions andEfficientDynamics displays:▷ ECO PRO bonus range, see page 298.▷ ECO PRO air conditioning, see page 297.▷ Route-ahead assistant, see page 299.▷ Coasting driving state, see page 300.▷ Driving style analysis, see page 301.

Seite 296

DRIVING HINTS Saving fuel


Overview

Button

Activating ECO PROPress the button. ECO PRO is displayedin the instrument cluster.

Configuring ECO PROINDIVIDUALCalling up via the drive experienceswitch1. Activating ECO PRO.2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"

Calling up via iDrive1. "CAR"2. "Settings"3. "Driving mode"4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"5. Select the desired setting.The setting is saved for the currently used driverprofile.

Enabling/disabling ECO PROfunctionsThe following ECO PRO functions can be activa‐ted / deactivated:▷ "ECO PRO limit"▷ "Coasting"

▷ "ECO PRO climate control"▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"▷ "Damping"▷ "Steering"▷ "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"The settings are saved for the currently useddriver profile.

ECO PRO Limit▷ Activate ECO PRO Limit:

"ECO PRO limit"An ECO PRO tip is shown when the speed ofthe set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.

▷ Set the ECO PRO Limit speed:"Notification at:"Select the required speed.

CoastingThe coasting function enables the engine to beoperated at idle when decelerating in order tooptimise consumption.Deactivate the function to use the braking effectof the engine when driving downhill.

ECO PRO seat air conditioningThe output from the seat heating and, if appro‐priate, the seat ventilation is reduced when ECOPRO is activated.

ECO PRO air conditioningThe air conditioning is adjusted for efficient con‐sumption.To achieve this, the set temperature is adjustedslightly and the interior is heated or cooled moreslowly to reduce consumption.Mirror heating is available when the outside tem‐perature is low.

ECO PRO light and sightThe power output of the exterior mirror and therear window heating is reduced.

Seite 297



Depending on the equipment, the dynamic ECOlight function is activated additionally.

DampingThe following settings can be selected:▷ "COMFORT"▷ "SPORT"

SteeringThe following settings can be selected:▷ "COMFORT"▷ "SPORT"

Route-ahead assistantThe route-ahead assistant detects upcomingroute stages and alerts the driver.

Resetting settingsReset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default set‐ting:"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"

Display in the instrument clusterGeneralWhen activating the ECO PRO drive mode, thedisplay changes to a special display.The displays can sometimes differ from the dis‐plays in the instrument cluster.

ECO PRO bonus rangeAn extension of range can beachieved due to adjusted drivingstyle.The range extension can be dis‐played as bonus range in the in‐

strument cluster.The bonus range is contained in the display ofthe range.Depending on the equipment version, blue barsegments indicate the range gained in steps.

If the bonus range is shown in grey, the currentdriving style is inefficient.The display turns blue as soon as all the condi‐tions for driving with optimised consumption aremet.

The intervals for resetting the bonus range de‐pend on the journey data settings, see page 158.

Consumption display

A pointer in the consumption display provides in‐formation about the current driving style:▷ The current consumption in relation to the

average consumption is displayed.▷ Pointer in the area arrow 1: display of the en‐

ergy recuperation achieved when coasting orwhen braking.

▷ Pointer in area arrow 2: display when acceler‐ating.

If the acceleration is inefficient, the area betweenaverage consumption and current consumptionis coloured red.The following information is also displayed, de‐pending on the situation:▷ Depending on the equipment version: the

route covered in the coasting driving state,see page 301.

▷ The total time with the engine switched off,see page 130, during automatic enginestops.

▷ A shift point indicator, see page 155, as rec‐ommendation to engage a more efficientgear.

Seite 298



Display on the Control DisplayGeneralInformation about the current effectiveness ofthe ECO PRO functions can be displayed as anenergy flow.

Displaying energy flow informationVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driving information"3. "Energy flow"Following functions are displayed:▷ Auto Start Stop function.▷ Energy recuperation.▷ Coasting.

Route-ahead assistantPrincipleThe function helps to save fuel and supports ananticipatory driving style. Using the navigationdata, certain sections of the route ahead can bedetected early and information can be given.

GeneralThe recognised sections of the route, such asbuilt-up areas or bends ahead, for example, re‐quire a reduction in speed.The alert is also given if the section of the routeahead cannot yet be detected when driving.The alert is shown until the section of the routeis reached.If there is an instruction, the vehicle's speed andits consumption can be reduced by coming offthe gas and coasting until the route section isreached.Depending on the situation, the system also in‐dependently used the engine brake by interrupt‐ing the coasting function, see page 300.

Operating requirementsThe function is available in ECO PRO drivemode.The function depends on how up-to-date thenavigation data is and its quality.The navigation data can be updated.

DisplayDisplay in the instrument cluster

An alert regarding a section of the routeahead is given as a recommendation touse the coasting function.

An additional symbol shows the detected sectionof the route:

Symbol Section of the road in frontSpeed limit or town entrance.

Junction or turn, exit from a fastroad.

Corner.

Roundabout.

Display in the Head-Up DisplayThe advance notice alert can also beshown in the Head-Up Display.

Display on the Control DisplayAn alert is shown in the driving style analysis dis‐play on the Control Display if there is a corre‐sponding section of the route.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driving information"

Seite 299



3. "Driving style analysis"

Using route-ahead assistantA section of the route ahead is shown:

1. Remove your foot from the accelerator.2. Allow the vehicle to coast until you reach the

section of road displayed.3. Adjust the speed by braking as necessary.

System limitsThe function is not available in the following sit‐uations:▷ The speed is below 50 km/h, approximately

30 mph.▷ With a temporary and variable speed limit,

such as at road works.▷ With inadequate quality of the navigation

data.▷ With Active Cruise Control.

CoastingPrincipleThe engine is automatically disconnected fromthe gearbox in selector lever position D undercertain circumstances. The vehicle continues toroll in idle to reduce consumption. Selector leverposition D remains engaged.This vehicle condition is called coasting.As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal ispressed, the engine is automatically connectedagain.

GeneralCoasting is a component of the ECO PRO drivemode and the COMFORT drive mode.Coasting is automatically activated by calling upthe ECO PRO drive mode or COMFORT drivemode via the drive experience switch and cannotbe deactivated.

A precautionary driving style helps to use thefunction frequently and supports the consump‐tion-reducing effect of coasting.

Operating requirementsThe function is available in the speed range fromapprox. 15 km/h, 10 mph to 160 km/h, 100 mph.The function is active if the following conditionsare met:▷ System detects a calm and smooth driving

style.▷ Accelerator pedal not pressed.▷ Brake pedal not pressed or only pressed

lightly.▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D.▷ Engine and gearbox are at operating temper‐

ature.▷ System does not detect any vehicles ahead

of you.▷ With the route-ahead assistant: the system

does not detect any obstructive traffic situa‐tions or routes.

▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,ACC, not activated.

Operation via shift paddlesPrincipleThe coasting state can be controlled using theshift paddles.

Activating, deactivating coastingusing shift paddles1. Pull the right-hand shift paddle to shift to the

top gear.2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right-

hand shift paddle again.Actuate the left-hand shift paddle to deactivate.

Seite 300



DisplayDisplay in the instrument cluster

The route covered in coasting mode is dis‐played.

ECO PRO driving mode: Displays onthe Control DisplayIn EfficientDynamics, the coasting drive state isshown during the journey.The route covered in coasting mode is displayedin the journey data.

Blue colour: coasting drive state.

ECO PRO driving mode: Displayenergy flow informationVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driving information"3. "Energy flow"

System limitsThe function is not available, if one of thefollowing conditions is met:▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.▷ Driving in the handling limit range or on up‐

ward or downward gradients.▷ Battery charge state temporally too low or too

high power requirement in the on-board net‐work.

Driving style analysisPrincipleThe function helps you to develop a particularlyefficient driving style and to save fuel.To do this, the driving style is analysed. The eval‐uation is performed in various categories and isshown on the Control Display.Using this display, the individual driving style canbe adjusted to save fuel.

GeneralThe current trip is evaluated.To support an efficient driving style, ECO PROtips are shown during the journey.Adapting the driving style can increase the rangeof the vehicle.This gain in range is shown as a bonus range onthe instrument cluster and Control Display.

Operating requirementsThe function is available in ECO PRO drivemode.

Calling up ECO PRO driving styleanalysisVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Driving information"3. "Driving style analysis"

Display on the Control DisplayThe display of the ECO PRO driving style analy‐ser shows the efficiency of the driving style.The more efficient the driving style, the morebars are shown in colour and the faster the bo‐nus range increases.If the driving style is inefficient, on the otherhand, a reduced number of bars are shown incolour.

Seite 301



302


MOBILITYRefuelling .................................................................................................. 304Wheels and tyres ..................................................................................... 306Engine compartment .............................................................................. 330Service products ..................................................................................... 333Maintenance ............................................................................................. 344Replacing parts ........................................................................................ 347Breakdown Assist ................................................................................... 351General care ............................................................................................. 360


RefuellingVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Notes when refuellingGeneralBefore refuelling, observe the notes on fuel qual‐ity, see page 333.On vehicles with diesel engines, the fuel fillerneck is designed for refuelling at diesel pumps.When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully intothe filler neck. Lifting the filler nozzle during refu‐elling results in the following:▷ The fuel supply being cut off prematurely.▷ Fuel vapour and fumes being recovered less

effectively.The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts outfor the first time.Please comply with the safety regulations dis‐played at filling stations.

Safety note

NOTEIf the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, theengine may no longer be supplied with suffi‐cient fuel. Engine function is no longer ensured.There is a danger of damage to property. Re‐fuel in good time.

NOTEFuels are poisonous and aggressive. Overfillingthe fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Iffuel comes into contact with paintwork, it candamage them. This pollutes the environment.There is a danger of damage to property. Avoidoverfilling.

Fuel tank capOpening1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

Seite 304

MOBILITY Refuelling


2. Turn the fuel tank cap anticlockwise.

3. Place the fuel tank cap in the holder on thefuel filler flap.

Closing

WARNINGThe retaining strap of the fuel tank cap may be‐come trapped and crushed when turning thecap to close it. It will then not be possible toclose the cap properly. Fuel or fuel vapours canleak out. There is a danger of injury or damageto property. Make sure that the retaining strapdoes not get trapped and crushed when clos‐ing the cap.

1. Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it isclearly heard to click into place.

2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Unlocking the fuel filler flapmanuallyFor example, if there is an electrical fault.

Have the fuel filler flap unlocked by a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

Seite 305

Refuelling MOBILITY


Wheels and tyresVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Tyre inflation pressureGeneralA tyre's condition and inflation pressure influencethe following:▷ Lifetime of the tyre.▷ Driving safety.▷ Driving comfort.▷ Fuel consumption.

Safety note

WARNINGA tyre with too little or no tyre inflation pressurecan heat up significantly and sustain damage.Driving properties, for example steering andbraking, will be impaired as a result. There is adanger of accidents. Check the tyre inflationpressure regularly and adjust as necessary, forexample twice a month or before any long jour‐ney.

Tyre inflation pressureinformationOn the door pillar

The tyre inflation pressures are shown on thedoor pillar of the driver's door.The tyre inflation pressure data applies to thetyre sizes and recommended tyre makes whichhave been classified by the vehicle manufactureras suitable for the respective vehicle type.If the tyre's speed code cannot be found, thenthe tyre inflation pressure for the correspondingtyre size applies.The tyre inflation pressures stated for the re‐spective load conditions will apply, in accordancewith the vehicle's actual load condition. Example:for a partially loaded vehicle, the optimum tyre in‐flation pressure is the one stated for a partiallyloaded vehicle.When the vehicle is partially loaded, the lowestpossible fuel consumption can be achieved withthe ECO tyre inflation pressure.More information regarding wheels and tyres canbe obtained from a Service Partner of the manu‐facturer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

Seite 306

MOBILITY Wheels and tyres


For Australia/New Zealand

WARNINGThe inflation pressures on the tyre label are ap‐plicable only for tyres explicitly mentioned onthe label. Inflation pressures for tyres that maybe covered by the label – by size, speed cate‐gory and load rating/load index – but not explic‐itly mentioned on the label may be different.Please obtain adequate inflation pressures inaccordance with the tyre manufacturer's speci‐fications from your tyre dealer.

On the Control DisplayThe current tyre inflation pressure values and thespecified tyre inflation pressure values for themounted tyres can be displayed on the ControlDisplay.To ensure that they are displayed correctly, thetyre sizes must be stored in the system and musthave been set, see page 317, for the mountedtyres.The current tyre inflation pressure value is shownon each tyre.The specified tyre inflation pressure value is lo‐cated towards the bottom of the Control Display.

Checking the tyre inflationpressureGeneralTyres heat up while driving. The tyre inflationpressure increases with the temperature of thetyre.Tyres have a natural, uniform loss of tyre inflationpressure.Inflating devices can display a pressure that maybe up to 0.1 bar too low.

Checking using tyre inflationpressure inscriptions on the doorpillarThe tyre inflation pressure inscriptions on thetyre inflation pressure sign on the door pillar onlyrelate to cold tyres or tyres at the same tempera‐ture as the ambient temperature.Only check the tyre inflation pressures when thetyres are cold, i.e.:▷ A driving distance of max. 2 km, 1.25 miles

has not been exceeded.▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least

2 hours after a journey.1. Determine the specified tyre inflation pres‐

sures for the tyres when fitted to the vehicle,see page 306.

2. Check the tyre inflation pressure in all fourtyres, using a pressure gauge, for example.

3. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur‐rent tyre inflation pressure value deviatesfrom the specified value.

4. Check whether all valve caps are screwedonto the tyre valves.

Checking using the tyre inflationpressure inscriptions on the ControlDisplay1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"4. Check if the current tyre inflation pressures

match the specified tyre pressure value.5. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur‐

rent tyre inflation pressure value deviatesfrom the specified value.

After adjusting the tyre inflationpressureFor the runflat indicator RPA: reinitialise the run‐flat indicator RPA.For the Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM: for tyresthat cannot be found in the tyre inflation pressure

Seite 307

Wheels and tyres MOBILITY


inscriptions on the Control Display, reset theTyre Pressure Monitor TPM.

Speed codeQ = up to 160 km/h/100 mphR = up to 170 km/h/106 mphS = up to 180 km/h/112 mphT = up to 190 km/h/118 mphH = up to 210 km/h/131 mphV = up to 240 km/h/150 mphW = up to 270 km/h/167 mphY = up to 300 km/h/186 mph

Tyre treadSummer tyresThe tyre tread depth should not be less than3 mm, 0.12 in, otherwise there is a high risk ofaquaplaning.

Winter tyresThe tyre tread depth should not be less than4 mm, 0.16 in, otherwise the vehicle's suitabilityfor winter use is restricted.

Minimum tread depth

Wear displays are distributed across the tyre cir‐cumference and have the legally prescribed min‐imum height of 1.6 mm, approximately 0.06 in.

The positions of the wear displays are identifiedon the tyre's side wall by TWI, Tread Wear Indi‐cator.

Tyre damageGeneralInspect tyres regularly for damage, the presenceof foreign bodies and wear.Vehicle behaviour that may indicate tyre damageor other faults:▷ Unusual vibrations.▷ Unusual tyre or running noises.▷ Unusual vehicle response, such as pro‐

nounced pulling to the left or right.Damage can be caused by the following situa‐tions, for example:▷ Driving over kerbs.▷ Road damage.▷ Tyre inflation pressure insufficient.▷ Vehicle overloading.▷ Incorrect tyre storage.

Safety notes

WARNINGIf the tyres are damaged, the tyre inflation pres‐sure may be reduced, which in turn couldcause you to lose control of the vehicle. Thereis a danger of accidents. If you suspect tyredamage while you are driving, immediately re‐duce speed and bring the vehicle to a stop.Have the wheels and tyres checked. To do so,carefully drive to a Service Partner of the manu‐facturer or another qualified Service Partner ora specialist workshop. If necessary, have thevehicle towed or transported there. Do not re‐pair damaged tyres, but have them replaced in‐stead.

Seite 308



WARNINGTyres can become damaged by running overobstacles, for example kerbs or road damage,at high speed. Larger wheels have a smallertyre cross-section. The smaller the tyre cross-section, the higher the risk of tyre damage.There is a danger of accidents and damage toproperty. If possible, drive around obstacles ordrive over them slowly and carefully.

Age of tyresRecommendationIrrespective of the tyre tread depth, change thetyres after 6 years at the latest.

Date of manufactureThe date of manufacture of the tyre is indicatedon the tyre sidewall.

Designation Date of manufactureDOT … 2118 21st week of 2018

Replacement of wheels andtyresFitting and balancingHave the wheel fitted and balanced by a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

Wheel/tyre combinationGeneralInformation on the correct wheel/tyre combina‐tion and rim designs for the vehicle can be ob‐tained from a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

Safety notes

WARNINGWheels and tyres that are not suitable for yourvehicle can damage parts of the vehicle. For ex‐ample they could come into contact with thebodywork on account of their dimensional tol‐erances, despite having the same nominal size.There is a danger of accidents. The manufac‐turer of the vehicle recommends using wheelsand tyres that have been categorised as suita‐ble for the respective vehicle type.

WARNINGMounted steel wheels can lead to technicalproblems, for example wheel studs may workloose or brake discs may be damaged. There isa danger of accidents. Do not install steelwheels.

WARNINGIncorrect wheel/tyre combinations impair thevehicle's handling characteristics and interferewith the proper functioning of various systems,such as the Anti-lock Brake System or Dy‐namic Stability Control. There is a danger of ac‐cidents. To maintain good vehicle handling, al‐ways fit tyres of the same make and treadpattern to all wheels. The manufacturer of thevehicle recommends using wheels and tyresthat have been categorised as suitable for therespective vehicle type. After a tyre has beendamaged, refit the same wheel/tyre combina‐tion as the original.

Seite 309



Recommended makes of tyre

Certain makes of tyre are recommended by themanufacturer of the vehicle for each tyre size.The tyre brands can be identified by a star on theside wall of the tyre.

New tyresDue to the manufacturing process, new tyres donot provide maximum grip immediately.Drive moderately for the first 300 km, approxi‐mately 200 miles.

Retreaded tyres

WARNINGRetreaded tyres may have different tyre car‐casses. Their durability may be reduced withincreasing age. There is a danger of accidents.Do not use retreaded tyres.

The manufacturer of your vehicle advises againstthe use of retreaded tyres.

Winter tyresGeneralWinter tyres are recommended if driving in winterconditions.Although so-called all-season tyres with an M+Slabel have better winter characteristics than sum‐mer tyres, they do not normally match the per‐formance of winter tyres.

Maximum speed of winter tyresIf the vehicle is capable of maximum speedshigher than the speed permitted for the wintertyres, display an indicating label stating the maxi‐mum permitted speed in the driver's field of view.The indicating label is available from a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.If winter tyres are fitted, observe and do not ex‐ceed the respectively permitted maximumspeed.

Replacing run-flat tyresFor your own safety, only use run-flat tyres.There is no spare wheel available in the event ofa breakdown. Additional information is availablefrom a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Swapping over front and rearwheelsSwapping the front wheels with the rear wheelsor vice versa is not permitted on vehicles withdifferent tyre or rim dimensions on the front andrear axles.

Storing tyresAir pressureDo not exceed the maximum tyre inflation pres‐sure indicated on the tyre's side wall.

Tyre storageStore wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and darkplace when not in use.Protect the tyres against contamination from oil,grease and solvents.Do not leave the tyres in plastic bags.Remove dirt from the wheels or tyres.

Seite 310



Run-flat tyresPrincipleIn the event of a complete loss of tyre inflationpressure, run-flat tyres enable you to continuedriving, with certain restrictions.

GeneralThe wheels are fitted with tyres which are self-supporting to a limited degree. They may alsohave special rims.The reinforced side wall means that the tyrekeeps the vehicle mobile to a degree even if tyreinflation pressure has been lost.Observe the notes on continuing to drive with aflat tyre.

Safety notes

WARNINGA run-flat tyre which has low tyre inflation pres‐sure or no tyre inflation pressure at all willchange the vehicle's handling characteristics,for example there may be reduced directionalstability when braking, longer braking distancesand different self-steering characteristics.There is a danger of accidents. Drive with careand do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h,50 mph.

Label

The tyres are identified on the tyre's side wall byRSC Runflat System Component.

Remedying flat tyresSafety measures▷ Park the vehicle on a solid surface and as far

away from moving traffic as possible.▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐

cle rolling away.▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the

wheels in the straight-ahead position.▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐

hicle and guide them out of the danger area,for example behind the crash barrier.

▷ Set up the warning triangle an appropriatedistance away.

Mobility SystemPrincipleWith the Mobility System, minor tyre damagecan be quickly sealed, to allow you to drive on.For this purpose, liquid sealant is pumped intothe tyres which encloses the damage from theinside when it hardens.

Seite 311



General▷ Please observe the notes on the application

of the Mobility System which are on the com‐pressor and the sealant container.

▷ Applying the Mobility System can be ineffec‐tive for tyre damage larger than approximately4 mm.

▷ Contact a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop if you are unable to putthe tyre back in operation.

▷ If possible, foreign matter that has penetratedthe tyre should remain inside the tyre. Onlyremove foreign objects if they are visibly pro‐truding from the tyre.

▷ Remove the speed limit sticker from the seal‐ant container and attach to the steeringwheel.

▷ Using sealants can damage the TPM wheelelectronics. In this case, have the electronicsreplaced at the next opportunity.

▷ The compressor can be used to check thetyre inflation pressure.

OverviewStorage

The Mobility System is located in the left storagecompartment of the boot.

Sealant container

▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.▷ Filler hose, arrow 2.Note the use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

1 Unlocking sealant container2 Sealant container holder3 Tyre inflation pressure indicator4 Reduce tyre inflation pressure button5 On/Off button6 Compressor7 Plug/cable for socket8 Connecting hose

Safety measures▷ Park the vehicle on a solid surface and as far

away from moving traffic as possible.▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐

cle rolling away.

Seite 312



▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with thewheels in the straight-ahead position.

▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐hicle and guide them out of the danger area,for example behind the crash barrier.

▷ Set up the warning triangle an appropriatedistance away.

Filling with sealing compoundSafety notes

DANGERA blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to enterthe vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain pollu‐tants which are colourless and odourless. In en‐closed spaces, the exhaust fumes can alsobuild up outside the vehicle. There is a dangerof fatal injury. Keep the exhaust pipe clear andensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTEThe compressor can overheat if operated fortoo long. There is a danger of damage to prop‐erty. Do not let the compressor run for longerthan 10 minutes.

Filling1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filler hose completely from the cover ofthe sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

3. Push the sealant container into the bracketon the compressor housing, until it audiblyengages.

4. Screw the filler hose of the sealant containeronto the tyre valve of the faulty wheel.

Seite 313



5. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicleinterior while the compressor is switched off.

6. Switch on the compressor with standby stateswitched on or the engine running.

Let the compressor run for approximately 10 mi‐nutes to fill the sealing compound and achieve atyre inflation pressure of approximately 2.0 bar.The tyre inflation pressure may rise to approxi‐mately 5 bar during the filling process of thesealing compound. Do not switch off the com‐pressor during this step.

Checking and adjusting the tyreinflation pressureChecking1. Switch off compressor.2. Read off the tyre inflation pressure as shown

on the tyre pressure indicator.To be able to continue the journey, a tyre infla‐tion pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and storing the sealantcontainer1. Unscrew the filler hose of the sealant con‐

tainer from the tyre valve.2. Press the red unlocking device.3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐

pressor.4. Pack and store the sealant container to avoid

soiling the boot.

Minimum tyre inflation pressure isnot reached1. Unplug the connector from the socket in the

vehicle interior.2. Drive forwards and backwards by 10 m, ap‐

proximately 400 inches, to distribute the seal‐ant in the tyre.

3. Screw the connecting hose of the compres‐sor directly onto the tyre valve.

4. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicleinterior.

5. Switch on the compressor with standby stateswitched on or the engine running.

Seite 314



If the tyre inflation pressure of at least 2 bar isnot reached, contact a Service Partner of themanufacturer or a qualified Service Partner ora specialist workshop.If the tyre inflation pressure of at least 2 bar isreached, see Minimum inflation pressure isreached.

6. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐pressor from the tyre valve.

7. Unplug the connector from the socket in thevehicle interior.

8. Store Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tyre inflation pressure isreached1. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐

pressor from the tyre valve.2. Unplug the connector from the socket in the

vehicle interior.3. Store Mobility System in the vehicle.4. Immediately drive for approximately

10 km/5 mi to evenly distribute the sealingcompound in the tyre.Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h/50 mph.If possible, do not drive slower than20 km/h/12 mph.

Adjusting1. Stop in a suitable area.2. Screw the connecting hose of the compres‐

sor directly onto the tyre valve.

3. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicleinterior.

4. Correct tyre inflation pressure to at least2.0 bar.▷ To increase tyre inflation pressure: switch

on the compressor with standby stateswitched on or the engine running.

▷ To reduce tyre inflation pressure: pressthe button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐pressor from the tyre valve.

6. Unplug the connector from the socket in thevehicle interior.

7. Store Mobility System in the vehicle.

Resuming with journeyDo not exceed maximum permitted speed of80 km/h, approximately 50 mph.Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA, seepage 323.Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM, seepage 317.Have the punctured tyre and the sealant con‐tainer of the Mobility System replaced as soon aspossible.

Seite 315



Snow chainsSafety notes

WARNINGIf snow chains are fitted to unsuitable tyres, thesnow chains can come into contact with vehicleparts. There is a danger of accidents or dam‐age to property. Only fit the snow chains ontyres that the manufacturer has approved asbeing suitable for snow chains.

WARNINGInsufficiently tensioned snow chains can dam‐age tyres and vehicle components. There is adanger of accidents or damage to property. En‐sure that snow chains are always adequatelytensioned. Re-tension them if necessary in ac‐cordance with the snow chain manufacturer'sinstructions.

Fine-link snow chainsThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsusing fine-link snow chains. Certain fine-linksnow chains have been tested, found safe foruse in traffic and categorised as suitable by themanufacturer of the vehicle.Information regarding suitable snow chains isavailable from a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

UsingSnow chains may only be used in pairs on therear wheels with tyres of the following sizes:▷ 245/45 R18.▷ 245/40 R19.Observe the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐tions.

Do not initialise the runflat indicator RPA withsnow chains fitted, as it may give incorrect read‐ings.Do not reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor TPMwith snow chains fitted, as it may give incorrectreadings.When driving with snow chains fitted, activateDynamic Traction Control DTC briefly as re‐quired in order to optimise traction.

Maximum speed with snowchainsWhen snow chains are fitted, do not exceed50 km/h, 30 mph.

Rear-wheel steering with snowchainsGeneralTo ensure that the wheels can move as requiredwhen using snow chains, the rear-wheel steeringof the Integral Active Steering must be switchedoff when snow chains are installed.

Safety note

WARNINGIf the rear-wheel steering is activated whilesnow chains are fitted, contact between thesnow chains and bodywork can occur. There isa danger of accidents or damage to property.Switch the rear-wheel steering off when snowchains are fitted.

Switching off the rear-wheelsteeringThe rear-wheel steering is switched off by se‐lecting the 'snow chains fitted' setting.Via iDrive:


Seite 316



3. "General settings"4. "Snow chains"5. "Snow chains fitted"The rear-wheel steering is switched on again au‐tomatically when the permitted maximum speedfor snow chains of 50 km/h, 30 mph, is reached.

Tyre Pressure MonitorTPMPrincipleThe system monitors the tyre inflation pressurein the four fitted tyres. The system warns if thetyre inflation pressure in one or more tyres hasfallen.

GeneralSensors in the tyre valves measure the tyre infla‐tion pressure and tyre temperature.With the tyre settings in iDrive, the system candisplay the specified pressures automatically andcompare them with the current tyre inflationpressures.If tyres are fitted which are not listed on the tyreinflation pressure labels in the vehicle, seepage 306, for example tyres with special appro‐val, the system must be actively reset. The cur‐rent tyre inflation pressures are then accepted asthe specified values.To operate the system, also please comply withthe other information and notes in the chapterTyre inflation pressure, see page 306.

Safety note

WARNINGThe display showing the specified tyre inflationpressures does not replace the tyre inflationpressure information on the vehicle. If incorrectdata has been entered into the tyre settings,the specified tyre inflation pressures will also be

incorrect. As a result, reliable signalling of a lossof tyre inflation pressure can no longer be guar‐anteed. There is a danger of injury and damageto property. Make sure that the tyre sizes of thefitted tyres are entered correctly and that theymatch the specifications on the tyres and thetyre inflation pressure information.

Operating requirementsThe following requirements must be met for thesystem, otherwise reliable signalling of a loss oftyre inflation pressure is not ensured:▷ After every tyre or wheel change, the correct

specifications for the fitted tyres must be en‐tered in the tyre settings, see page 317.

▷ In the case of tyres with special approval:▷ After every tyre or wheel change, a reset

must be carried out with the correct tyreinflation pressure.

▷ A reset must be carried out after the tyreinflation pressure has been adjusted to anew value.

▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Tyre settingsGeneralThe tyre sizes of the fitted tyres can be found inthe tyre inflation pressure information, seepage 306, or directly on the tyres.The tyre specifications do not have to be re-en‐tered if the tyre inflation pressure is corrected.For summer and winter tyres, the last tyre speci‐fications entered in each case are saved. Thismeans that the settings of the sets of tyres lastused can be selected after a tyre or wheelchange.

Calling up the menuVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"

Seite 317



2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"

Adjusting the settingsVia iDrive:

1. "Tyre settings"2. Select tyres:

▷ "Summer tyres"▷ "Winter tyres/all-season tyres"

3. "current:"4. Select the type of tyre fitted on the rear axle:

▷ Tyre size, for example 245/45 R18 96 Y.▷ In the case of tyres with special approval:

"Other tyre"5. Select the load status of the vehicle if a tyre

size has been selected.6. "Save tyre settings"The measurement of the current tyre inflationpressure is started. The progress of the meas‐urement is shown.

Status displayCurrent statusThe status of the system, for example whetherthe system is active, can be shown on the Con‐trol Display.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"The current status is displayed.

Current tyre inflation pressureThe current tyre inflation pressure is displayedfor each tyre.The current tyre inflation pressures can changeas a result of vehicle operation or the outsidetemperature.

Current tyre temperatureDepending on the model, the current tyre tem‐peratures are shown.The current tyre temperatures can change as aresult of vehicle operation or the outside temper‐ature.

Specified pressureThe specified pressure for the tyres on the frontand rear axle is displayed.The specified pressures are values stored in thevehicle.The temperature effects of vehicle operation andambient conditions are taken into account in thecalculation for the specified pressure. Independ‐ently of the weather conditions, tyre tempera‐tures and driving times, the appropriate specifiedpressure is always displayed.The displayed specified pressure may vary anddiffer from the value stated in the tyre inflationpressure information on the door pillar of thedriver's door. The tyre inflation pressure can thusbe corrected to the value of the displayed speci‐fied pressures.The specified pressure is adjusted immediately ifthe load status is changed in the tyre settings.

Tyre statusesGeneralThe status of the system and tyres is indicatedby the wheel colour and message on the ControlDisplay.If applicable, existing messages are not deleted ifthe displayed specified pressure is not reachedon correction of the tyre inflation pressure.

All wheels green▷ The system is active and is using the dis‐

played specified pressures for the warning.▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: the

system is active and is using the tyre inflation

Seite 318



pressures saved during the last reset for thewarning.

One to four wheels yellowThere is a flat tyre or major loss of tyre inflationpressure in the tyres shown.

Wheels greyTyre pressure losses might not be detected.Possible causes:▷ Malfunction.▷ During measurement of the tyre inflation

pressure, after confirmation of the tyre set‐tings.

▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: asystem reset is performed.

Tyres with special approval:performing a resetVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"4. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive

off.5. Reset the tyre inflation pressure: "Perform

reset".6. Drive off.The wheels are shown grey and the following ap‐pears on the display: "Resetting Tyre PressureMonitor…".After driving for a short while at speeds above30 km/h, 19 mph, the set tyre pressures are ac‐cepted as target values. The reset is completedautomatically during the journey.If the reset was successful, the wheels areshown in green on the Control Display and thefollowing appears: "Tyre Pressure Monitor active.See label for recommended pressures.".

You can interrupt your journey at any time. Thereset resumes automatically when you continueyour journey.

Messages: for tyres withoutspecial approvalGeneralDynamic Stability Control DSC will be activated ifnecessary as soon as a message for low tyre in‐flation pressure appears.

Safety note

WARNINGA damaged normal tyre with too little or no tyreinflation pressure impairs driving characteris‐tics, for example steering and braking. Tyreswith run-flat properties allow a limited level ofstability to be maintained. There is a danger ofaccidents. Do not continue driving if the vehicleis fitted with normal tyres. Comply with thenotes on run-flat tyres and continuing to drivewith these tyres.

If a tyre inflation pressure test isrequired

MessageA symbol with a Check Control message isshown on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible causeThe tyre was not inflated properly,for example insufficient air added.The tyre settings have not been up‐dated.

Measure1. Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust

as necessary.2. Update the tyre settings.

Seite 319



If the tyre inflation pressure isinsufficient

MessageA yellow warning lamp is illuminated inthe instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐sage is shown on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible causeThere has been a loss of tyre infla‐tion pressure.

Measure1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of

130 km/h, 80 mph.2. At the next opportunity, for example at a filling

station, check the tyre inflation pressure in allfour tyres and correct if necessary.

If there is a significant loss of tyreinflation pressure


In addition, a symbol with the affected tyre isshown in a Check Control message on the Con‐trol Display.

Symbol Possible causeThere is a flat tyre or substantial lossof tyre inflation pressure.

Measure1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐

hicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking andsteering manoeuvres.

2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped withstandard tyres or run-flat tyres.

The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, seepage 311, is a circle with the letters RSC onthe tyre side wall.

Messages: in the case of tyreswith special approvalGeneralDynamic Stability Control DSC will be activated ifnecessary as soon as a message for low tyre in‐flation pressure appears.

Safety note


If a tyre inflation pressure test isrequired

MessageA symbol with a Check Control message isshown on the Control Display.

Seite 320



Sym‐bol

Possible cause

The tyre was not inflated properly, forexample insufficient air added.The system has detected a wheelchange, but no reset has been run.The tyre inflation pressure has drop‐ped compared to the last reset.No reset has been performed on thesystem. The system uses the tyre in‐flation pressures saved during thelast reset for the warning.

Measure1. Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust

as necessary.2. Perform a reset of the system.

If the tyre inflation pressure isinsufficient



Symbol Possible causeThere has been a loss of tyre infla‐tion pressure.No reset has been performed on thesystem. The system uses the tyre in‐flation pressures saved during thelast reset for the warning.

Measure1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of

130 km/h, 80 mph.2. At the next opportunity, for example at a filling

station, check the tyre inflation pressure in allfour tyres and correct if necessary.

3. Perform a reset of the system.

If there is a significant loss of tyreinflation pressure


In addition, a symbol with the affected tyre isshown in a Check Control message on the Con‐trol Display.

Symbol Possible causeThere is a flat tyre or substantial lossof tyre inflation pressure.No reset has been performed on thesystem. The system uses the tyre in‐flation pressures saved during thelast reset for the warning.



2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped withstandard tyres or run-flat tyres.The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, seepage 311, is a circle with the letters RSC onthe tyre side wall.

What to do in the event of a flattyreStandard tyres1. Identify the damaged tyre.

Check the tyre inflation pressure in all fourtyres, for example using the tyre pressure in‐dicator of a flat tyre kit.In the case of tyres with special approval: if allfour tyres are inflated to the correct tyre infla‐tion pressures, the TPM might not have beenreset. Perform a reset.

Seite 321



If no tyre damage can be identified, contact aService Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a flattyre kit or by changing the wheel.

The use of sealant, for example a flat tyre kit, candamage the TPM wheel electronics. Have theelectronics replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tyres

Safety notes


Maximum speedIf a tyre is damaged you can continue your jour‐ney, but do not exceed a maximum speed of80 km/h, 50 mph.

Continuing a journey with a flat tyreNote the following if you continue a journey witha flat tyre:

1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steeringmanoeuvres.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.3. As soon as there is an opportunity, check the

tyre inflation pressure in all four tyres.In the case of tyres with special approval: if allfour tyres are inflated to the correct tyre infla‐tion pressures, the Tyre Pressure Monitormight not have been reset. Perform a reset.

Possible driving distance with a deflatedtyreThe possible driving distance varies dependingon the load and stresses the vehicle is subjectedto, for example speed, road properties, outsidetemperature. The driving distance can be shorteror, if the driving style is more careful, longer.If the vehicle is moderately loaded and used un‐der favourable conditions, it is possible to travelup to 80 km, 50 miles.

Driving properties with damaged tyresOn a journey with damaged tyres, handling char‐acteristics change and may result in the followingsituations, for example:▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly.▷ Longer braking distances.▷ Changed self-steering characteristics.Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ordriving over obstacles, for example kerbs or pot‐holes.

Final tyre failureVibration or loud noises during the journey maybe an indication that the tyre has finally failed.Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts ofthe tyre could detach, which could lead to an ac‐cident.Do not continue driving, but contact a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

System limitsTemperatureThe tyre inflation pressure depends on the tem‐perature of the tyre.The tyre inflation pressure increases as the tyretemperature increases, for example during driv‐ing or due to exposure to sunlight.Tyre inflation pressure decreases if the tyre tem‐perature drops.

Seite 322



Through this behaviour, a warning may be trig‐gered if there are major temperature drops, dueto the given warning limits.After a temperature-related warning, the speci‐fied pressures are displayed again on the ControlDisplay after a short distance.

Sudden loss of tyre inflationpressureNo warning can be given by the system of ex‐treme, sudden tyre failure caused by externalfactors.

Reset not carried outTyres with special approval: the system will notfunction correctly if a reset has not been carriedout, for example, a flat tyre is reported in spite ofthe correct tyre pressure.

MalfunctionMessage

The yellow warning lamp flashes and isthen illuminated continuously. A CheckControl message is shown. Tyre pres‐

sure losses cannot be detected.

Measure▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is fit‐

ted: have the wheels checked if necessary.▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the

same radio frequency: the system is auto‐matically reactivated upon leaving the field ofinterference.

▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: thesystem was unable to complete the reset.Perform a system reset again.

Runflat indicator RPAPrincipleThe system identifies a loss of tyre inflation pres‐sure by comparing the rotational speeds of theindividual wheels during the journey.If a tyre loses inflation pressure, its diameterchanges. This in turn alters the rotational speedof the corresponding wheel. The difference willbe detected and reported as a flat tyre.The system does not measure the tyre inflationpressure as such.

Operating requirementsThe following requirements must be met for thesystem, otherwise reliable signalling of a loss oftyre inflation pressure is not ensured:▷ After every tyre or wheel change, an initialisa‐

tion must be carried out with the correct tyreinflation pressure.

▷ An initialisation must be carried out after thetyre inflation pressure has been adjusted to anew value.

Status displayIt is possible to display the current status of therunflat indicator, for example to check whetherthe RPA is active.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Flat Tyre Monitor"The status is displayed.

Initialisation requiredAn initialisation must be performed in thefollowing situations:▷ After adjusting the tyre inflation pressure.▷ After a tyre or wheel change.

Seite 323



Performing an initialisationOn initialisation, the current tyre pressures aresaved as a reference for detection of a flat tyre.Initialisation is started by confirming the correcttyre inflation pressures.When driving with snow chains fitted, do not initi‐alise the system.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Flat Tyre Monitor"4. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive

off.5. Start the initialisation: "Perform reset"6. Drive off.Initialisation completed during the journey; thisprocess can be interrupted at any time.Initialising resumes automatically when you con‐tinue your journey.

MessagesGeneralDynamic Stability Control DSC is activated ifnecessary as soon as the message for a flat tyreappears.

Safety note


Flat tyre messageA yellow warning lamp is illuminated inthe instrument cluster.


Symbol Possible causeThere is a flat tyre or substantial lossof tyre inflation pressure.



2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped withstandard tyres or run-flat tyres.The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, seepage 311, is a circle with the letters RSC onthe tyre side wall.

What to do in the event of a flattyreStandard tyres1. Identify the damaged tyre.

To do this, check the tyre inflation pressure inall four tyres, for example using the tyre pres‐sure indicator of a flat tyre kit.If all four tyres are inflated to the correct tyreinflation pressures, the runflat indicator mightnot have been initialised. In this case initialisethe system.If it is not possible to identify tyre damage,contact a Service Partner of the manufactureror another qualified Service Partner or a spe‐cialist workshop.

2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a flattyre kit or by changing the wheel.

Seite 324



Run-flat tyres

Safety notes


Maximum speedIf a tyre is damaged you can continue your jour‐ney, but do not exceed a maximum speed of80 km/h, 50 mph.

Continuing a journey with a flat tyreNote the following if you continue a journey witha flat tyre:

1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steeringmanoeuvres.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.3. As soon as there is an opportunity, check the

tyre inflation pressure in all four tyres.If all four tyres are inflated to the correct tyreinflation pressures, the runflat indicator mightnot have been initialised. In this case initialisethe system.

Possible driving distance with a deflatedtyreThe possible driving distance varies dependingon the load and stresses the vehicle is subjectedto, for example speed, road properties, outsidetemperature. The driving distance can be shorteror, if the driving style is more careful, longer.

If the vehicle is moderately loaded and used un‐der favourable conditions, it is possible to travelup to 80 km, 50 miles.

Driving properties with damaged tyresOn a journey with damaged tyres, handling char‐acteristics change and may result in the followingsituations, for example:▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly.▷ Longer braking distances.▷ Changed self-steering characteristics.Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ordriving over obstacles, for example kerbs or pot‐holes.

Final tyre failureVibration or loud noises during the journey maybe an indication that the tyre has finally failed.Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts ofthe tyre could detach, which could lead to an ac‐cident.Do not continue driving, but contact a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

System limitsIn the following situations, the system could beslow to respond or operate incorrectly:▷ A natural, even loss of tyre inflation pressure

in all four tyres that occurs over time is notdetected. Consequently, check the tyre infla‐tion pressure at regular intervals.

▷ No warning can be given in the event of sud‐den tyre failure caused by external factors.

▷ If the system has not been initialised.▷ When driving on snow-covered or slippery

surfaces.▷ Dynamic driving style: drive wheels slipping,

high lateral acceleration.▷ Driving with snow chains.

Seite 325



Wheel changeGeneralFor run-flat tyres or when using a flat tyre kit, it isnot always necessary to change a wheel immedi‐ately if tyre inflation pressure is lost due to a flattyre.If required, the tools for changing wheels areavailable as optional accessories from a ServicePartner of the manufacturer, another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

Safety notes

DANGERThe jack is only intended for raising the vehiclebriefly during a wheel change. Even if the safetymeasures are complied with, there is a risk ofthe raised vehicle falling over due to the jackslipping. There is a danger of injury or evendeath. If the vehicle is raised with the jack, donot lie underneath the vehicle and do not startthe engine.

DANGERSupports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐hicle jack can prevent it from achieving its loadcapacity due to the restricted height. The loadcapacity of the wooden blocks may be excee‐ded, causing the vehicle to tip over. There is adanger of injury or even death. Do not placesupports under the vehicle jack.

WARNINGThe jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, isprovided in order to perform a wheel change inthe event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐signed for frequent use; for example, changingfrom summer to winter tyres. Using the jackfrequently may cause it to become jammed ordamaged. There is a danger of injury and dam‐

age to property. Only use the jack to change anemergency wheel or a spare wheel in the eventof a flat tyre.

WARNINGOn soft, uneven or slippery ground, for exam‐ple, snow, ice, tiles or similar, the jack may slip.There is a danger of injury. Perform the wheelchange on a level, firm and non-slip surface if atall possible.

WARNINGThe jack is only optimised for raising the vehi‐cle and for use with the jacking points on thevehicle. There is a danger of injury. Do not liftanother vehicle or other items with the jack.

WARNINGIf the jack has not been guided into the jackingpoint provided, the vehicle might be damagedwhen the jack is extended, or the jack couldslip. There is a danger of injury or damage toproperty. When extending, make sure that thejack is guided into the jacking point adjacent tothe wheelhouse.

WARNINGA vehicle raised with a jack can fall from thejack if lateral forces are applied. There is a dan‐ger of injury and damage to property. If the ve‐hicle is raised, do not apply any lateral forces tothe vehicle or pull the vehicle with suddenmovements. Have any wheel that is jammed re‐moved by a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

Seite 326



Protecting the vehicle againstrollingGeneralThe vehicle manufacturer recommends that thevehicle should additionally be protected againstrolling away during a wheel change.

On a level surface

Place chocks or other suitable objects in front ofand behind the wheel directly opposite to theone being changed.

On a slight downhill slope

If it is necessary to change a wheel on a slightdownhill slope, place chocks and other suitableobjects, for example stones, under the wheels ofthe front and rear axles in the opposite directionto the direction of roll.

Thiefproof wheel studsPrincipleThe wheel locking bolts have a special coding.The blots can only be released with the adapterthat matches the coding.

OverviewThe adapter of the thiefproof wheel studs can befound in the on-board tool kit or in an oddmentstray in the on-board tool kit.

▷ Wheel stud, arrow 1.▷ Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing1. Place the adapter on the wheel stud.2. Unscrew the wheel stud.3. After unscrewing the wheel stud, remove the

adapter again.

Screwing on1. Place the adapter on the wheel stud. If nec‐

essary, turn the adapter until it fits on thewheel stud.

2. Screw on the wheel stud. The tightening tor‐que is 140 Nm.

3. After screwing on the wheel stud, remove theadapter again and stow it.

Preparing the vehicle▷ Park the vehicle on firm and non-slip ground

at a safe distance from traffic.

Seite 327



▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.▷ Apply the parking brake.▷ Engage a gear or select selector lever posi‐

tion P.▷ As soon as the traffic permits, have all vehicle

occupants get out of the vehicle and guidethem out of the danger area, for example be‐hind the crash barrier.

▷ Depending on the equipment, take the wheelchange tools and, if necessary, the emer‐gency wheel out of the vehicle.

▷ If applicable, set up warning triangle or flash‐ing light at the correct distance.

▷ Additionally protect the vehicle against rollingaway.

▷ Undo the wheel studs by half a turn.

Jacking points

The jacking points are located in the marked po‐sitions.

Raising vehicle

WARNINGYour hands or fingers could get trapped whenusing the jack. There is a danger of injury. Keepyour hands in the described position when us‐ing the jack, and do not change this position.

1. Hold the jack with one hand, arrow 1, andgrasp the jack crank or lever with your otherhand, arrow 2.

2. Guide the jack into the rectangular recess ofthe jacking point closest to the wheel to bechanged.

3. Turn the jack crank or lever clockwise to ex‐tend the jack.

Seite 328



4. Remove your hand from the jack as soon asthe jack is under load and continue to turnthe jack crank or lever with one hand.

5. Make sure that the base of the vehicle jack isextended perpendicular to and at right anglesunderneath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the base of the jack is exten‐ded perpendicular to and at right angles be‐low the jacking point.

7. Raise by cranking until the jack is supportedon the ground with its entire surface and thewheel in question is at most 3 cm, 1.2 inchesoff the ground.

Fitting a wheelOnly fit one emergency wheel at most, as re‐quired.

1. Unscrew the wheel studs.2. Remove the wheel.3. Put on the new wheel or emergency wheel

and tighten at least two wheel studs cross‐wise until finger-tight.If non-original light alloy wheels not from thevehicle manufacturer are fitted, the wheel

studs belonging to the wheels may also haveto be used.

4. Tighten the remaining wheel studs until fin‐ger-tight and then tighten all the wheel studscrosswise.

5. Turn the jack crank anticlockwise to retractthe jack and lower the vehicle.

6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.

After changing the wheel1. Tighten the wheel studs crosswise. The

tightening torque is 140 Nm, approximately101 lb ft.

2. Stow the faulty wheel in the boot, if neces‐sary.Due to its size, the faulty wheel cannot be ac‐commodated under the boot floor.

3. Check tyre inflation pressure at the next op‐portunity and correct as necessary.

4. Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA.Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check the tight fit of the wheel studs using acalibrated torque wrench.

6. Drive to the nearest Service Partner of themanufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop to have thedamaged tyre replaced.

Seite 329



Engine compartmentVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed in


Overview

For a petrol engine:

1 Filler neck for washing fluid2 Starting assistance, positive battery terminal3 Engine coolant tank4 Additional coolant tank cooling

5 Oil filler neck6 Starting assistance, negative battery terminal7 Vehicle identification number

With diesel engine:

Seite 330

MOBILITY Engine compartment


1 Filler neck for washing fluid2 Starting assistance, positive battery terminal3 Oil filler neck

4 Engine coolant tank5 Starting assistance, negative battery terminal6 Vehicle identification number

BonnetSafety notes

WARNINGIncorrectly performed work in the engine com‐partment can damage components and lead toa safety risk. There is a danger of accidents ordamage to property. Have work in the enginecompartment undertaken by a Service Partnerof the manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components in the en‐gine compartment can also move when the ve‐hicle is switched off, for example the radiator

fan. There is a danger of injury. Do not reachinto an area where there are moving parts.Keep articles of clothing and hair away frommoving parts.

WARNINGThe bonnet has protruding parts on the inside,for example locking hooks. There is a danger ofinjury. When the bonnet is open, watch out forprotruding parts and keep these areas clear.

WARNINGIf the bonnet is not correctly locked, it cancome open during the journey and impair visi‐bility. There is a danger of accidents. Stop im‐mediately and close the bonnet correctly.

Seite 331

Engine compartment MOBILITY


WARNINGParts of the body can become trapped whenopening and closing the bonnet. There is adanger of injury. When opening and closing,make sure that the area of movement of thebonnet is kept clear.

NOTEWhen wipers are folded away from the wind‐screen, they can be trapped when the bonnetis opened. There is a danger of damage toproperty. Before opening the bonnet, makesure that the wipers with wiper blades fitted arein contact with the windscreen.

NOTEWhen closing, the bonnet must lock into placeon both sides. Applying additional pressure candamage the bonnet. There is a danger of dam‐age to property. Open the bonnet again andclose it firmly. Avoid applying additional pres‐sure.

Opening1. Pull the lever, arrow 1.

The bonnet is released.

2. After releasing the lever, pull the lever again,arrow 2.The bonnet is opened.

3. Watch out for any protruding parts of thebonnet.

Closing

Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of ap‐proximately 50 cm, 20 in.The bonnet must engage on both sides.

Seite 332

MOBILITY Engine compartment


Service productsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Fuel qualityGeneralDepending on the region, many filling stationssell fuel that is adapted to winter or summer con‐ditions. Fuel that is sold in winter facilitates coldstarting, for example.

PetrolGeneralFor optimal fuel consumption, the petrol shouldbe sulphur-free or low in sulphur content.Fuels labelled on the pump as containing metalmust not be used.You can fill up with fuels with a maximum ethanolcontent of 10 %, in other words E10.The engine has knock control. This means thatdifferent petrol grades can be used.

Safety notes

NOTEEven small quantities of the wrong fuel orwrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐tem and engine. In addition, the catalytic con‐verter will be permanently damaged. There is adanger of damage to property. Do not use thefollowing fuel or additives with petrol engines:▷ Leaded petrol.▷ Metallic additives, for example manganese

or iron.After filling the wrong fuel, do not press thestart/stop button. Contact a Service Partner ofthe manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

NOTEIncorrect fuels can damage the fuel system andengine. There is a danger of damage to prop‐erty. Do not refuel with fuel with a higher etha‐nol content than recommended. Do not refuelwith fuel containing methanol, for example M5to M100.

NOTEFuel below the specified minimum quality canadversely affect engine function or lead to en‐gine damage. There is a danger of damage toproperty. Do not refuel with petrol below thespecified minimum quality.

Petrol gradeSuper, RON 95.

Seite 333

Service products MOBILITY


Minimum gradeUnleaded petrol, RON 91.

DieselSafety note

NOTEEven small quantities of the wrong fuel orwrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐tem and engine. There is a danger of damageto property.Note the following with diesel engines:▷ Do not fill up with pure methyl ester.▷ Only fill up with biodiesel with a maximum

of B7/7 % according to EN590.▷ Do not fill up with petrol.▷ The vehicle manufacturer recommends

only using diesel additives that have beenclassified as suitable.

After filling the wrong fuel, do not press thestart/stop button. Contact a Service Partner ofthe manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

Diesel qualityThe engine is designed to run on diesel fuel toDIN EN 590 and ASTM D975.Only refuel with diesel with a sulphur content ofless than 10 ppm.

BMW Diesel withBluePerformancePrincipleBMW Diesel with BluePerformance reduces ni‐trous oxides in the diesel exhaust by injecting thereduction agent AdBlue into the exhaust stream.In the catalytic converter, this produces a chemi‐cal reaction that minimises the nitrous oxides.

GeneralThe vehicle has a tank which has to be toppedup.To be able to establish drive-ready state in theusual way, sufficient reduction agent must bepresent.Reduction agent can be topped up at any time.AdBlue reduction agents is a registered trade‐mark of the Verband der Automobilindustrie e. V.(VDA).Reduction agent is available at many service sta‐tions.Preferably add reduction agent at a pump dis‐penser, see page 336.

AdBlue at low temperaturesDue to its physical properties, it is possible thatreduction agent has to be topped up more fre‐quently at temperatures below -5 ℃/+23 ℉.At temperatures below -11 ℃/+12 ℉, it mightonly be possible to measure and display the filllevel after a short journey.At low temperatures, only top up with reductionagent directly before starting the trip.

Display on the Control DisplayThe range up to the latest possible top-up timeand the accurate top-up quantity are shown onthe Control Display.

Seite 334

MOBILITY Service products


Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "AdBlue"

Displays in the instrumentclusterReserve level indicatorThe reserve level indicator in the instrumentcluster informs you of the remaining distancewhich can be travelled with the current level.Do not use up all of the displayed distance, oth‐erwise it might not be possible to re-establishdrive-ready state after parking.

▷ White light: top up reductionagent at next opportunity.

▷ Yellow light: not enough re‐duction agent available. Re‐maining range is shown in in‐strument cluster. Immediatelytop up reduction agent, seepage 335.

AdBlue on the minimum levelRemaining range is shown in in‐strument cluster. Replenish withat least 10 litres of reductionagent. Engine continues to run, aslong as it is not stopped and all

other operating conditions are met, for example,enough fuel.

System faultIf there is a system fault, a Check Control mes‐sage is displayed.Visit the nearest Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

AdBlue topping upBMW recommends having the reduction agentreplenished by a Service Partner as part of a reg‐ular maintenance schedule.If you keep to this maintenance schedule, a sin‐gle top-up is generally required between themaintenance appointments.Under certain circumstances – for example, dueto a particularly dynamic driving style – toppingup between maintenance appointments morethan once may be necessary.As soon as the reserve level indicator is shown inthe instrument cluster, have the reduction agenttopped up, to prevent drive-ready state from nolonger being able to be established.

Topping up AdBlue yourselfSafety notes

WARNINGWhen the reduction agent container is opened,small quantities of ammonia vapours canemerge. Ammonia vapours have a pungentsmell and irritate the skin, mucous membranesand eyes. There is a danger of injury. Do not in‐hale ammonia vapours. Do not allow reductionagent to come into contact with clothing, skinor eyes, and do not swallow it. Keep childrenaway from reduction agents.

WARNINGService products, for example oils, greases,coolants and fuels, can contain substances thatare harmful to health. There is a danger of in‐jury or even death. Please comply with the in‐structions on the containers. Do not allow serv‐ice products to come into contact with clothing,skin or eyes. Do not pour service products intoother bottles. Keep service products out of thereach of children.

Seite 335



NOTEThe constituents of reduction agent are highlyaggressive. There is a danger of damage toproperty. Avoid contact of reduction agent withsurfaces of the vehicle.

Suitable AdBlueAdBlue of standard ISO 22241-1At many service stations, reduction agent isavailable at a special pump dispenser. Preferablyadd reduction agent at a pump dispenser.If no pump dispenser is available, reductionagent can be replenished from a container. Re‐duction agent is available in various containers.Preferably use the special bottle recommendedby BMW. With this bottle and its special adapter,reduction agent can be topped up conveniently.

Top up quantityWhen the reserve level indicator starts, top up atleast 5 litres, approx. 1.3 gal.

Indicating top-up quantityPrecise top-up quantity is shown on Control Dis‐play.Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "AdBlue"

Reduction agent tank

The fuel tank cap for the reduction agent is loca‐ted next to the fuel tank cap for the fuel tank.

Replenishing reduction agent at thepump dispenser

GeneralWhen refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully intothe filler neck. Lifting the filler nozzle during refu‐elling results in the following:▷ The fuel supply being cut off prematurely.▷ Overflow of reducing agent.The tank for the reducing agent is full when thefiller nozzle cuts out for the first time.Depending on the filler nozzle, the tank for thereducing agent may not be filled completely.Please comply with the safety regulations dis‐played at filling stations.

Adding reducing agent1. Open fuel filler flap, see page 304.2. Turn the reduction agent tank cap anticlock‐

wise and remove.

Seite 336




4. Use the pump nozzle to replenish at least therecommended top-up quantity, seepage 336.The tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts outfor the first time.

5. Put fuel tank cap back on and turn clockwise.6. Close the fuel filler flap.

Replenishing reduction agent with abottle1. Open fuel filler flap, see page 304.2. Turn the reduction agent tank cap anticlock‐

wise and remove.


4. Attach the bottle and turn clockwise until itstops.

5. Push the bottle down.The tank in the vehicle is filled.The tank in the vehicle is filled when the levelin the bottle does not change any more. It isnot possible to overfill.

Seite 337



6. Pull back bottle and unscrew.

7. Put fuel tank cap back on and turn clockwise.8. Close the fuel filler flap.

Filling with an incorrect fluid

GeneralA Check Control message is displayed if the tankhas been filled with the wrong fluid.If the wrong type of liquid has been added, con‐tact a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Safety note

WARNINGAfter filling with an incorrect liquid, the systemmay heat up and catch fire. There is a danger offire and injury. Only fill with liquids that are in‐tended for the tank. Do not start the engine af‐ter filling with an incorrect liquid.

After filling reduction agent

Reserve level indicatorAfter topping up, the reserve levelindicator continues to be shownwith remaining range.Drive-ready state can be estab‐lished.

After a journey of several minutes, the reservelevel indicator goes out.

AdBlue on the minimum levelAfter filling up, the display contin‐ues to be shown.Drive-ready state can only be es‐tablished when the display is nolonger illuminated.

1. Press the start/stop button three times.Display is no longer illuminated after approxi‐mately 1 minute.

2. Press the start/stop button and establishdrive-ready state.

Disposing of bottlesDispose of bottles for AdBlue at a Serv‐ice Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a spe‐

cialist workshop or hand them into an authorisedcollecting point.Only dispose of bottles with normal waste if thelocal regulations permit this.

Engine oilGeneralThe engine oil consumption depends on thedriving style and operating conditions.Therefore check the engine oil level regularlyeach time you fill up with fuel by taking a detailedmeasurement.Engine oil consumption can be increased, for ex‐ample, in the following situations:▷ Dynamic driving style.▷ Running in the engine.▷ Engine idling.▷ Use of engine oil grades categorised as un‐

suitable.Different Check Control messages are shown onthe Control Display, depending on the engine oillevel.

Seite 338



Safety notes

NOTEToo little engine oil causes engine damage.There is a danger of damage to property. Topup with engine oil immediately.

NOTEToo much engine oil can damage the engine orthe catalytic converter. There is a danger ofdamage to property. Do not top up with toomuch engine oil. If there is too much engine oil,have the engine oil level corrected by a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

Electronic oil measurementGeneralElectronic oil measurement has two measure‐ment principles:▷ Monitoring.▷ Detailed measurement.When frequently making short trips or using adynamic driving style, for example taking cornersat high speed, regularly perform a detailed meas‐urement.

Monitoring

PrincipleThe engine oil level is electronically monitoredduring the journey and can be shown on theControl Display.If the engine oil level is outside its permissibleoperating range, a Check Control message isshown.

Operating requirementsA current measurement is available after approxi‐mately 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil levelVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Engine oil level"The engine oil level is displayed.

System limitsWhen frequently making short trips or using adynamic driving style, it may not be possible tocalculate a measurement. In this case, the meas‐urement for the last, sufficiently long journey isdisplayed.

Detailed measurement

PrincipleThe engine oil level is checked when the vehicleis stationary and is shown on a scale.If the engine oil level is outside its permissibleoperating range, a Check Control message isshown.

GeneralDuring the measurement, the idle speed isslightly raised.

Operating requirements▷ Vehicle is standing horizontally.▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or P

and accelerator pedal not pressed.▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐

ature.

Carrying out a detailed measurementVia iDrive:

1. "CAR"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Engine oil level"4. "Engine oil level measurement"5. "Start measurement"

Seite 339



The engine oil level is checked and shown on ascale.

Adding engine oilGeneralDo not top up engine oil unless a message is dis‐played in the instrument cluster. The top-upamount is specified in the message on the Con‐trol Display.Only replenish with suitable types of engine oil,see page 341.Safely stop the vehicle and switch off drive-readystate before topping up with engine oil.Do not top up with too much engine oil.

Safety notes

WARNINGService products, for example oils, greases,coolants and fuels, can contain substances thatare harmful to health. There is a danger of in‐jury or even death. Please comply with the in‐structions on the containers. Do not allow serv‐ice products to come into contact with clothing,skin or eyes. Do not pour service products intoother bottles. Keep service products out of thereach of children.

NOTEToo little engine oil causes engine damage.There is a danger of damage to property. Topup with engine oil immediately.

NOTEToo much engine oil can damage the engine orthe catalytic converter. There is a danger ofdamage to property. Do not top up with toomuch engine oil. If there is too much engine oil,have the engine oil level corrected by a Service

Partner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

OverviewThe oil filler neck is in the engine compartment,see page 330.

Adding engine oil1. Open the bonnet, see page 332.2. Turn the cap anticlockwise to open.

3. Add engine oil.4. Tighten cap.

Engine oil grades for topping upGeneralThe engine oil quality is a crucial factor determin‐ing the lifetime of the engine.Only replenish with the types of engine oil thatare listed.Some engine oil grades may not be available inall countries.

Safety notes

NOTEOil additives can damage the engine. There is adanger of damage to property. Do not use oiladditives.

Seite 340



NOTEUsing the wrong engine oil can result in enginemalfunctions and damage. There is a danger ofdamage to property. When selecting the en‐gine oil, make sure that the engine oil corre‐sponds to the oil specification.

Suitable engine oil gradesReplenish with engine oils with the following oilspecifications.

Petrol engineBMW Longlife-04.

BMW Longlife-12 FE.

Diesel engineBMW Longlife-04.

BMW Longlife-12 FE.

The oil specification BMW Longlife-12 FE is notsuitable for 25d, 35d, 40d or 50d diesel engines.

Alternative engine oil gradesIf suitable engine oils are not available, up to 1 li‐tre, approximately 2 pints, of an engine oil withthe following oil specification can be used fortopping up:

Petrol engineACEA C2.

ACEA C3.

Diesel engineACEA C2.

ACEA C3.

Viscosity classesWhen selecting an engine oil, make sure that theengine oil belongs to one of the following viscos‐ity classes:

Viscosity classesSAE 0W-20.

SAE 5W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

SAE 5W-30.

SAE 0W-40.

SAE 5W-40.

Information on suitable oil specifications and vis‐cosities of engine oils can be obtained from aService Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Oil change

NOTEEngine oil not changed in time can lead to in‐creased engine wear and thus engine damage.There is a danger of damage to property. Donot exceed the service date indicated in the ve‐hicle.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendshaving the engine oil changed by a Service Part‐ner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

Seite 341



CoolantGeneralCoolant is a mixture of water and an additive.Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ble for the vehicle. Information regarding suitableadditives is available from a Service Partner ofthe manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

Safety notes

WARNINGIf the cooling system is opened when the en‐gine is hot, coolant can escape and causescalding. There is a danger of injury. Only openthe cooling system when the engine hascooled down.

WARNINGAdditives are harmful to health and incorrectadditives can damage the engine. There is adanger of injury and damage to property. Donot allow additives to come into contact withclothing, skin or eyes, and do not swallow them.Only use suitable additives.

Coolant levelGeneralVehicles with a petrol engine have two coolingcircuits. Always check the coolant levels of bothcoolant tanks and top up if necessary.The coolant level is shown by Min and Maxmarks. The Min and Max marks are located indifferent positions depending on the coolanttank.Depending on the engine version, the coolanttank is located on the right or left of the enginecompartment, see page 330.

Checking the coolant level at theside marks1. Allow the engine to cool down.2. The coolant level is correct if it is between

the Min. and Max. marks on the coolant tank.

Symbol Meaning Maximum.

Minimum.

Checking the coolant level in thefiller neck1. Allow the engine to cool down.2. Turn cap on coolant tank slightly anticlock‐

wise, then allow the pressure to escape.3. Open cap on coolant tank.4. The coolant level is correct if it is between

the Min. and Max. marks in the filler neck.

Topping up1. Allow the engine to cool down.2. Turn cap on coolant tank slightly anticlock‐

wise, then allow the pressure to escape.3. Open cap on coolant tank.4. If necessary, slowly top up to the correct

level; do not overfill.5. Tighten cap.6. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as

soon as possible.

Seite 342



DisposalWhen disposing of coolant and coolantadditives, comply with the relevant envi‐ronmental protection regulations.

Washer fluidGeneralAll washer jets are supplied from one tank.Use a mixture of tap water and screenwash con‐centrate for the windscreen washer system, ifnecessary with the addition of antifreeze.Recommended minimum fill level: 1 litre, approx‐imately 1.7 Imp. pints.

Safety notes

WARNINGSome antifreezes can contain toxic substances,and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and fa‐tal injury. Please comply with the instructionson the containers. Keep antifreezes away fromsources of combustion. Do not pour serviceproducts into other bottles. Keep service prod‐ucts out of the reach of children.

WARNINGWasher fluid can ignite on contact with hotparts of the engine and catch fire. There is adanger of injury or damage to property. Onlytop up washer fluid when the engine hascooled down. Then fully close the cap of thewasher fluid reservoir.

NOTEAdditives containing silicone added to thewasher fluid for their water beading effect onthe windows may damage the washer system.There is a danger of damage to property. Do

not add any additives containing silicone to thewasher fluid.

NOTEMixing different screenwash concentrates orantifreezes can result in damage to the washersystem. There is a danger of damage to prop‐erty. Do not mix different screenwash concen‐trates or antifreezes. Please comply with the in‐structions and mixing ratios stated on thecontainers.

Overview

The reservoir for the washer fluid is located inthe engine compartment.

MalfunctionUsing undiluted screenwash concentrate or anti‐freeze made of alcohol may result in false indica‐tions at low temperatures below -15 ℃/+5 ℉.

Seite 343



MaintenanceVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

BMW Maintenance SystemThe maintenance system indicates what mainte‐nance measures are required and thereby assistsin maintaining the road safety and operationalsafety of the vehicle.The exact work required and the maintenance in‐tervals may vary depending on the country spec‐ifications. Replacement work, spare parts, oper‐ating materials and wear materials are calculatedseparately. Additional information is availablefrom a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Condition Based Service,CBSPrincipleSensors and special algorithms monitor the con‐ditions in which the vehicle is used. CBS usesthis information to determine the maintenancerequirement.The system thus enables the scope of the main‐tenance work to be adapted to the individual us‐age profile.

GeneralInformation on service requirements, seepage 153, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play.

Service data in the remotecontrolInformation about the maintenance requirementis continuously stored in the remote control. TheService Partner can read out this data and sug‐gest a maintenance scope for your vehicle.It is important, therefore, that you hand the serv‐ice advisor the remote control that was last usedfor driving the vehicle.

Periods out of usePeriods when the vehicle is out of use with itsbattery disconnected are not taken into account.In such cases, have any time-dependent mainte‐nance procedures, for example for the brake fluidand, where applicable, the engine oil and micro‐filter/activated charcoal filter, updated by a Serv‐ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

Service historyMaintenance and repairsHave maintenance and repairs carried out by aService Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

EntriesThe maintenance work carried out is entered inthe maintenance records and the vehicle data.As with a service booklet, the entries provide evi‐dence of regular maintenance.

Seite 344

MOBILITY Maintenance


If an entry is made in the electronic service his‐tory of the vehicle, service-relevant data is savedboth in the vehicle and on the central IT systemsof BMW AG, Munich.The data entered in the electronic service historycan also be viewed by the new vehicle owner af‐ter a change of vehicle owner. A Service Partnerof the manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop can view thedata entered in the electronic service history.

ObjectionThe vehicle owner can contact a Service Partnerof the manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop to object to anyentries being made in the electronic service his‐tory, and to the associated storage in the vehicleand transfer to the vehicle manufacturer of anydata relating to his/her time as the vehicle owner.In that case, no entry is made in the electronicservice history of the vehicle.

DisplaysMaintenance entered is shown on the ControlDisplay, see page 154.

For Australia/New Zealand:maintenanceNo maintenance work other than normal mainte‐nance is required to keep the emission levels ofyour vehicle within the design limits.

Socket for on-boarddiagnosis, OBDGeneralDevices connected to the OBD socket triggerthe alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐move any devices connected to the OBD socketbefore locking the vehicle.

Safety note

NOTEIncorrect use of the OBD on-board diagnosissocket can result in malfunctions in the vehicle.There is a danger of damage to property. Onlyhave service and maintenance work involvingthe OBD on-board diagnosis socket carried outby a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop or other authorised persons. Onlyconnect devices that have been tested andfound to be safe for use with the OBD on-board diagnosis socket.

Position

The OBD socket for checking emissions-rele‐vant components is located on the driver's side.

Emissions▷ The warning lamp flashes:

There is an engine malfunction thatcould damage the catalytic converter.Have the vehicle checked as soon aspossible.

▷ The warning lamp is illuminated:Deterioration of exhaust emissions. Have thevehicle checked as soon as possible.

Seite 345

Maintenance MOBILITY


RecyclingThe manufacturer of the vehicle recommendshanding the vehicle in at a take-back point nomi‐nated by the manufacturer at the end of its lifecycle. The regulations concerning the returningof end-of-life vehicles may vary from country tocountry. Additional information is available from aService Partner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐shop.

Seite 346

MOBILITY Maintenance


Replacing partsVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

On-board tool kit

The on-board tool kit is located in the left storagecompartment of the boot.

Wiper bladesSafety notes

NOTEThe windscreen may sustain damage if a wiperfalls onto it without the wiper blade fitted. Thereis a danger of damage to property. Hold thewiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Donot fold in or switch on the wiper without awiper blade installed.

NOTEWhen wipers are folded away from the wind‐screen, they can be trapped when the bonnetis opened. There is a danger of damage toproperty. Before opening the bonnet, makesure that the wipers with wiper blades fitted arein contact with the windscreen.

Replacing the front wiper blades1. To replace the wiper blades, move the wipers

to the fold-out position, see page 138.2. Lift the wipers completely away from the

windscreen.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out wiperblade, arrow 2.

4. Insert the new wiper blade and press into theholder until it engages.

5. Fold in the wipers.

Seite 347

Replacing parts MOBILITY


Bulbs and lightsGeneralLights and bulbs are an important aspect of driv‐ing safety.All headlights and other lights use LED or lasertechnology.Some equipment versions have light-emitting di‐odes behind a cover as a light source. Theselight-emitting diodes are similar to conventionallasers and are classified by legislation as Class 1light-emitting diodes.In the case of a defect, the manufacturer of thevehicle recommends having respective work car‐ried out by a Service Partner of the manufactureror another qualified Service Partner or a special‐ist workshop.

Safety notes

WARNINGConcentrated laser light can cause irritation orlasting damage to the retina of the eye. Thereis a danger of injury. The manufacturer of yourvehicle recommends having work on the light‐ing system, including bulb replacement, per‐formed by a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

WARNINGIntense brightness can irritate or harm the ret‐ina of the eye. There is a danger of injury. Donot look directly into the headlights or otherlight sources. Do not remove covers fromLEDs.

Headlight glassDuring cool or humid weather, the headlightglass can mist over on the inside. When drivingwith the lights switched on, the condensation

disappears after a short time. There is no need toreplace the headlight glass.If moisture increasingly forms, for example ifthere are water droplets in the lamp despite theheadlights being switched on, have the head‐lights checked.

Car batteryGeneralThe battery is maintenance-free.The contained quantity of acid is sufficient forthe lifetime of the battery.More information regarding the battery can beobtained from a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.The manufacturer of your vehicle recommendshaving a Service Partner of the manufacturer oranother qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop register the vehicle battery to the vehi‐cle after the battery has been replaced. Once thebattery has been registered again, all comfortfunctions will be available without restriction andany Check Control messages relating to thecomfort functions will no longer be displayed.

Safety note

NOTEVehicle batteries that are classified as unsuita‐ble may damage systems or result in functionsno longer being carried out. There is a dangerof damage to property. Only use vehicle batter‐ies that have been classified as suitable by thevehicle manufacturer.

Seite 348

MOBILITY Replacing parts


Charging the batteryGeneralEnsure the battery is sufficiently charged toguarantee the entire lifetime of the battery.The battery may need to be charged in thefollowing cases:▷ When making frequent short journeys.▷ If the vehicle is not used for periods of longer

than one month.

Safety note

NOTEBattery chargers for the vehicle battery mayoperate with high voltages and high currentswhich can overload or damage the 12-volt on-board network. There is a danger of damage toproperty. Only connect battery chargers for thevehicle battery to the jump-starting connec‐tions in the engine compartment.

Jump-starting connectionsOnly charge the battery via the jump-startingconnections, see page 356, in the engine com‐partment and with the engine switched off.

Battery chargerBattery chargers developed especially for the ve‐hicle and suitable for the on-board network canbe obtained from a Service Partner of the manu‐facturer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

Power failureFollowing an electrical power failure, someequipment will have to be reinitialised or individ‐ual settings will need to be updated, for example:▷ Memory function: save positions again.▷ Time: update.▷ Date: update.

Disposing of the old batteryDispose of old batteries at a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or anotherqualified Service Partner or a specialist

workshop or hand them into an authorised col‐lecting point.Batteries filled with acid should be transportedand stored upright. Protect batteries against fall‐ing over when in transit.

FusesSafety note

WARNINGIncorrect or repaired fuses can overload electri‐cal cables and components. There is a risk offire. Do not repair blown fuses or replace themwith fuses with a different colour or amp rating.

Accessing the fusesThe fuses are located behind a cover on theright-hand side in the boot.

Remove the cover.

Fuse assignment information and details on thepositions of any other fuse boxes can be found ina separate leaflet in the fuse box.

Replacing fusesThe manufacturer of the vehicle recommendshaving fuses changed by a Service Partner of the

Seite 349

Replacing parts MOBILITY


manufacturer or another qualified Service Partneror a specialist workshop.

Seite 350

MOBILITY Replacing parts


Breakdown AssistVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Hazard warning lights

The button is located in the centre console.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is in the boot.To remove, undo the Velcro fastener.

First-aid kitGeneralSome items in the kit have a limited shelf life.Check the use-by dates of the contents regularlyand replace any items that have expired in goodtime.

Storage

The first-aid kit is located in the left storage com‐partment of the boot.

BMW breakdownassistancePrincipleBMW Group breakdown assistance can be con‐tacted if you require help in the event of a break‐down.

GeneralIn the case of a breakdown, data on the vehiclecondition can be transferred to the BMW break‐down assistance. It is possible that malfunctionscan be remedied directly.Contact with BMW breakdown assistance canalso be made via a Check Control message, seepage 148.

Seite 351

Breakdown Assist MOBILITY


Operating requirements▷ Activated ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐

ment with intelligent emergency call or BMWConnectedDrive services.

▷ Mobile reception.▷ Standby state is switched on.

Starting breakdown assistanceWhen equipped with Teleservice, support is pro‐vided first through Teleservice Diagnosis andthen by Teleservice Assistance.Via iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "BMW Assistance"3. If applicable, "BMW Roadside Assist."

A voice connection is established.

Teleservice DiagnosisTeleservice Diagnosis enables the detailed vehi‐cle data required for diagnosis to be transferredvia mobile telephony. This data is transferred au‐tomatically.

Starting Teleservice AssistanceTeleservice Assistance is a country-specific fea‐ture that allows BMW breakdown assistance tocarry out a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehi‐cle via mobile communications.Teleservice Assistance can be started after aprompt by BMW breakdown assistance.

1. Park the vehicle safely.2. Apply the parking brake.3. Control Display is switched on.4. "Start Teleservice Call"

BMW Accident AssistancePrincipleBMW Group Accident Assistance can be contac‐ted if help is required in the event of an accident.

GeneralIf the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐ately severe accident, which did not trigger anyairbags, a Check Control message is displayed inthe instrument cluster. A corresponding textmessage also appears on the Control Display.When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,data on the vehicle condition is transferred toBMW.

Operating requirements▷ Activated ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐

ment with intelligent emergency call or BMWConnectedDrive services.

▷ Mobile reception.▷ Standby state is switched on.

Starting BMW AccidentAssistanceIf an accident is detectedautomaticallyA text message prompting the driver to callBMW Accident Assistance is shown on the Con‐trol Display.The connection can be established directly:"Call BMW Accident Assistance"The Check Control message for BMW AccidentAssistance can also be called up from the savedCheck Control messages, see page 148, for acertain length of time.

Starting manuallyBMW Accident Assistance can also be contac‐ted independently of the automatic accident de‐tection function.

Seite 352

MOBILITY Breakdown Assist


Via iDrive:

1. "COM"2. "BMW Assistance"3. "Call BMW Accident Assistance"

Follow the displays on the Control Display. Avoice connection is established.

Emergency callStatutory emergency callPrincipleThe system can be used to trigger an emer‐gency call automatically or manually in emer‐gency situations.

GeneralPress the SOS button in an emergency only.The emergency call establishes a connection toa public emergency call number.This depends on factors such as the specificmobile telephone network and the national regu‐lations.The emergency call is placed using the SIM cardintegrated in the vehicle and cannot be switchedoff.For technical reasons, it might not be possible tomake an emergency call in highly adverse condi‐tions.

Overview

SOS button in the roof lining.

Operating requirements▷ Standby state is switched on.▷ Emergency call system is functional.▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent

emergency call: the SIM card integrated intothe vehicle is activated.

Automatic triggeringIn certain circumstances, for example deploy‐ment of the airbags, an emergency call may beplaced automatically immediately after an acci‐dent of corresponding severity. An automaticemergency call is not influenced by pressing theSOS button.

Manual triggering1. Tap on cover flap.2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED

in the button area is illuminated green.▷ The LED is illuminated green when the emer‐

gency call has been activated.If a cancellation request is displayed on theControl Display, the emergency call can becancelled.If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle un‐til voice contact has been established.

▷ The LED flashes green when the connectionto the emergency number has been estab‐lished.In the case of an emergency call, data is sentto the public rescue coordination centre in or‐der to decide what rescue measures are re‐quired. The data may include, for example,the current position of the vehicle, if this canbe determined.Information about data transfer and saving,see page 14.

Seite 353



Even if you can no longer hear the rescue co‐ordination centre through the loudspeakers,the rescue coordination centre may still beable to hear you speak.

The rescue coordination centre ends the emer‐gency call.

MalfunctionThe emergency call function may be impaired.The LED in the emergency call button area illu‐minates for approx. 30 seconds. A Check Controlmessage is shown.Have a check performed by a Service Partner ofthe manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.

Intelligent emergency callPrincipleThe system can be used to trigger an emer‐gency call automatically or manually in emer‐gency situations.

GeneralPress the SOS button in an emergency only.Even if no emergency call through BMW is pos‐sible, in some cases an emergency call may stillbe established to a public emergency call num‐ber. This depends on factors such as the specificmobile telephone network and the national regu‐lations.The emergency call is set up using the SIM cardintegrated in the vehicle.For technical reasons, it might not be possible tomake an emergency call in highly adverse condi‐tions.

Overview

SOS button in the roof lining.

Operating requirements▷ Standby state is switched on.▷ Emergency call system is functional.▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent

emergency call: the SIM card integrated intothe vehicle is activated.

Automatic triggeringIn certain circumstances, for example deploy‐ment of the airbags, an emergency call may beplaced automatically immediately after an acci‐dent of corresponding severity. An automaticemergency call is not influenced by pressing theSOS button.

Manual triggering1. Tap on cover flap.2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED

in the button area is illuminated green.▷ The LED is illuminated green when the emer‐

gency call has been activated.If a cancellation request is displayed on theControl Display, the emergency call can becancelled.If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle un‐til voice contact has been established.

Seite 354



▷ The LED flashes green when the connectionto the emergency number has been estab‐lished.When an emergency call is sent via BMW,data is sent to the emergency call centre inorder to decide what rescue measures are re‐quired. The data may include, for example,the current position of the vehicle, if this canbe determined.If questions posed by the emergency callcentre remain unanswered, rescue measuresare automatically initiated.Even if you can no longer hear the emer‐gency call centre through the loudspeakers,the emergency call centre may still be able tohear you speak.

The emergency call centre ends the emergencycall.

Fire extinguisherPrincipleThe fire extinguisher can be used to put out vehi‐cle fires.

OverviewThe fire extinguisher is located at the front of thefront passenger seat.

Safety note

WARNINGUsing the fire extinguisher improperly cancause injury. There is a danger of injury. Ob‐serve the information below when using the fireextinguisher:▷ Do not inhale the extinguishing agent. If

the extinguishing agent is inhaled, movethe casualty out into the fresh air. If thecasualty experiences breathing difficulties,contact a doctor immediately.

▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent tocome into contact with the skin. Pro‐longed contact with the extinguishingagent can cause the skin to dry out.

▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent tocome into contact with the eyes. If it doescome into contact with the eyes, rinsethem immediately with plenty of water. Incase of prolonged discomfort, contact adoctor.

Taking out the fire extinguisherOpen the tensioning buckles on the retainingstrap.

Using the fire extinguisherTo use the fire extinguisher, follow the manufac‐turer's instructions displayed on the fire extin‐guisher and the information supplied with it.

Stowing the fire extinguisher1. Insert the fire extinguisher into the holder.2. Hook in and close the tensioning buckles.

Maintenance and refillingHave the fire extinguisher checked every 2 yearsby a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐other qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.Take note of the next maintenance date for thefire extinguisher.Replace the fire extinguisher after use or have itrefilled.

Starting assistanceGeneralIf the vehicle battery is discharged, the enginecan be started from another vehicle's battery us‐ing two jump leads. Use only jump leads withfully insulated terminal clamps.

Seite 355



Safety notes

DANGERTouching live components can result in anelectric shock. There is a danger of injury oreven death. Do not touch any components thatcould be live.

WARNINGConnecting the jump leads in the wrong se‐quence can cause sparks. There is a danger ofinjury. Please comply with the correct se‐quence when connecting up.

NOTEContact between the bodywork of the two ve‐hicles can result in a short circuit during startingassistance. There is a danger of damage toproperty. Make sure there is no contact be‐tween the bodywork.

Preparations1. Check whether the battery in the other vehi‐

cle shows 12 volts. Information about thevoltage is provided on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle.3. Switch off any electrical systems in both vehi‐

cles.

Jump-starting connections

The jump-starting connection in the enginecompartment serves as the positive battery ter‐minal.Open the cover of the jump-starting connection.

A special connection on the body serves as bat‐tery negative terminal.

Connecting the cablesBefore starting, switch off all unnecessary powerconsumers, such as the radio, on both the donorand receiver vehicles.

1. Open the cover of the jump-starting connec‐tion.

2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+jump lead to the positive terminal of the bat‐tery or the corresponding jump-starting con‐nection on the donor vehicle.

3. Connect the other terminal clamp to the bat‐tery's positive terminal or to the correspond‐ing jump-starting connection on the vehicleto be started.

4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/–jump lead to the negative terminal of the bat‐

Seite 356



tery or the corresponding engine or bodyearth connection on the donor vehicle.

5. Connect the second terminal clamp to thenegative terminal of the battery or to a corre‐sponding engine or body earth connection onthe vehicle to be started.

Starting the engineDo not use spray products sold as starting aids.

1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and al‐low it to run for a few minutes at a slightly in‐creased idle speed.If starting a diesel vehicle: allow the engine ofthe donor vehicle to run for approximately10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle to be startedas normal.If an initial attempt to start the engine fails,wait several minutes until the discharged bat‐tery has been recharged to a slightly greaterdegree.

3. Allow both engines to run for a few minutes.4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite or‐

der from that in which they were originally at‐tached.

Check the battery if necessary and have it re‐charged.

Tow-starting and towingawaySafety note


Transporting the vehicleGeneralDo not attempt to have the vehicle towed.

Safety notes

NOTEIf the vehicle is towed with one axle raised, thevehicle can be damaged. There is a danger ofdamage to property. Only have the vehicletransported on a truck bed.

NOTEThe vehicle may be damaged when raising andsecuring it.There is a danger of damage to property.▷ Raise the vehicle with suitable equipment.▷ Do not raise or secure the vehicle by its

towing eye, body parts or suspensionparts.

Pushing the vehicleTo remove a broken-down vehicle from a dan‐gerous area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐tance.Roll or push, see page 140, the vehicle.

Towing truck

Only have the vehicle transported on a truck bed.

Seite 357



Towing other vehiclesGeneralSwitch on the hazard warning lights, dependingon local regulations.If the electrical system of the vehicle beingtowed has failed, the vehicle must be made iden‐tifiable to other road users, for instance by plac‐ing an indicating label or the warning triangle inthe rear window.

Safety notes

WARNINGIf the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicleis less than that of the vehicle to be towed, thetowing eye can be pulled off, or the vehicle mayno longer be controllable. There is a danger ofaccidents. Make sure that the gross vehicleweight of the towing vehicle is greater than theweight of the vehicle to be towed.

NOTEIf the tow bar or the towing rope is not attachedcorrectly, other vehicle parts can be damaged.There is a danger of damage to property. At‐tach the tow bar or towing rope to the towingeye correctly.

Tow barThe towing eyes of both vehicles should be onthe same side.If it is impossible to avoid attaching the tow bar atan angle, note the following:▷ Tow bar clearance may be limited when cor‐

nering.▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is

attached offset.

Towing ropeEnsure that the towing rope is taut when thetowing vehicle drives off.Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable thevehicle to be towed without jerking.

Towing eyeGeneral

Always keep the screw-on towing eye on boardthe vehicle.The towing eye can be screwed into the front orrear end of the vehicle.The towing eye is located in the on-board toolkit, see page 347.▷ Only use the towing eye supplied with the ve‐

hicle and make sure that it is screwed in fullyand is tight.

▷ Only use the towing eye for towing on pavedroads.

▷ Avoid cross-loads on the towing eye, for ex‐ample do not raise the vehicle by the towingeye.

Safety note

NOTEIf the towing eye is not used as intended, thevehicle or towing eye may be damaged. Thereis a danger of damage to property. Observe thenotes on using the towing eye.

Seite 358



Thread for towing eye

Press the marking on the edge of the cover topush it out.For covers which have an opening instead of amarking, pull the cover out by the opening.

Tow-startingDo not attempt to tow-start the vehicle.If necessary, start the engine using starting as‐sistance, see page 355.Have the cause of the starting difficulties recti‐fied by a Service Partner of the manufacturer oranother qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Seite 359



General careVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed inyour vehicle, for example on account of the op‐tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐tions and systems. Please comply with therelevant laws and regulations when using thecorresponding functions and systems.

Washing the vehicleGeneralRegularly remove foreign bodies, for exampleleaves, from the area below the windscreen withthe bonnet raised.Wash the vehicle frequently especially in winter.Very high levels of dirt and road salt can causedamage to the vehicle.

Steam-jet cleaners and high-pressure cleanersSafety note

NOTEWhen cleaning with high-pressure cleaners, ex‐cessive pressure or excessive temperaturescan damage various components. There is adanger of damage to property. Ensure a suffi‐cient distance and do not spray for an extendedperiod of time. Comply with the instructions forthe high-pressure cleaner.

Distances and temperature▷ Maximum temperature: 60 ℃/140 ℉.▷ Minimum distance to sensors, cameras,

seals: 30 cm, approximately 12 in.

Automatic car washesSafety note

NOTEThe vehicle can be damaged if automaticwashing bays or car washes are used incor‐rectly. There is a danger of damage to property.Observe the following notes:▷ Textile car washes or systems using soft

brushes are preferable, to avoid damageto the paintwork.

▷ Avoid washing bays or car washes withguide rails higher than 10 cm, approx. 4 in,to avoid damage to the body.

▷ Note the maximum tyre width of the guiderail to avoid damage to tyres and rims.

▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid dam‐aging them.

▷ Deactivate the wipers and the rain sensor(if fitted) to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐tem.

Seite 360

MOBILITY General care


Entering a car wash with aSteptronic transmission

Safety note

NOTESelector lever position P is automatically en‐gaged when standby state is switched off.There is a danger of damage to property. Donot switch off standby state in car washes.

GeneralIn a car wash, the vehicle must be able to rollfreely.Roll or push the vehicle, see page 140.Some car washes require you to get out of thevehicle. It is not possible to lock the vehicle fromthe outside in selector lever position N. If an at‐tempt is made to lock the vehicle, a signalsounds.

Exiting from a car washEnsure that the remote control is located in thevehicle.Switch on drive-ready state, see page 48.

HeadlightsDo not rub wet headlights dry and do not useabrasive or corrosive cleaning agents.Soak impurities such as insect residues withshampoo and wash off with water.Remove ice with a de-icer spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter the vehicle has been washed, briefly applythe brakes to dry them otherwise braking effec‐tiveness may be temporarily reduced. The heatgenerated by braking dries the brake discs andbrake pads, and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove residues on the windscreensto avoid affecting visibility due to smearing, andto reduce wiping noise and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle careCare productsGeneralBMW recommends using care and cleaningproducts from BMW. Suitable care products areavailable from a Service Partner of the manufac‐turer or another qualified Service Partner or aspecialist workshop.

Safety note

WARNINGCleaning agents can contain hazardous sub‐stances or constitute a health risk. There is adanger of injury. When cleaning the interior,open the doors or windows. Use only productsthat are intended for cleaning the vehicle's inte‐rior. Observe the notes on the packaging.

Vehicle paintworkGeneralRegular care promotes driving safety and pre‐serves your vehicle's value. Environmental ef‐fects in areas with higher air pollution or naturalcontaminants, for example tree resin or leaf dust,may have an effect on the vehicle paintwork.Base the frequency and extent of vehicle care onsuch factors.Immediately remove aggressive substances, forexample spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppingsso as to prevent alterations and discolourationsof the paintwork.

Seite 361

General care MOBILITY


Safety note

WARNINGWork performed incorrectly on the vehiclepaintwork can cause the radar sensors to fail ormalfunction, resulting in a safety risk. There is adanger of accidents or damage to property. Forvehicles with radar sensors, only have paint‐work or paint repairs on the bumpers carriedout by a Service Partner of the manufacturer oranother qualified Service Partner or a specialistworkshop.

Matt paintworkOnly use cleaning and care products that aresuitable for vehicles with matt paintwork.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather at regular intervalswith a cloth or vacuum cleaner.Dust and road dirt will otherwise become workedinto pores and folds, causing considerable abra‐sion and causing the leather surface to becomeprematurely brittle.In order to protect against discolouration, for ex‐ample from clothing, clean and care for theleather approximately every two months.Clean light-coloured leather more frequently as ithas the tendency to soil faster.Use leather cleaner, otherwise dirt and greasewill attack the protective coating of the leather.

Care of upholstery fabricsGeneralRegularly clean the upholstery with a vacuumcleaner.In the event of heavy soiling, for example stainscaused by drinks, use a soft sponge or a lint-freemicrofibre cloth with suitable interior cleaningagents.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams usingwide wiping actions. Avoid rubbing vigorously.

Safety note

NOTEOpen Velcro fasteners on articles of clothingcan damage the seat covers. There is a dangerof damage to property. Make sure that any Vel‐cro fasteners on your clothing are closed.

Care of special partsLight alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the wheels while they are instal‐led on the vehicle, only use neutral rim cleanerwith a pH value of between 5 and 9. Do not useany abrasive cleaners or steam cleaners above60 ℃/140 ℉. Observe the manufacturer's in‐structions.Corrosive, acidic or alkaline cleaners may destroythe protective layer of neighbouring parts, suchas brake discs, for example.After cleaning, briefly apply the brakes to drythem. The heat generated by braking dries thebrake discs and brake pads, and protects themagainst corrosion.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean parts such as the radiator grilleand door handles with plenty of water to which ashampoo may be added, particularly if exposedto road salt.

Rubber partsThe surfaces of rubber parts can be contamina‐ted or lose their shine due to environmental influ‐ences. Only use water and suitable care prod‐ucts for cleaning.Rubber parts subjected to high wear and tearshould be treated regularly with rubber careproducts. Do not use any silicone-based careproducts for treating rubber seals, otherwise

Seite 362



these could be damaged and become a sourceof noise.

Fine wood partsClean fine wood trims and fine wood parts with adamp cloth only. Then dry them with a soft cloth.

Plastic parts

NOTECleaning agents containing alcohol or solvents,such as nitro thinners, cold cleaners, fuel orsimilar can damage plastic parts. There is adanger of damage to property. Clean with a mi‐crofibre cloth. Lightly moisten the cloth withwater, if necessary.

Plastic parts include, for example:▷ Imitation leather surfaces.▷ Roof lining.▷ Lamp lenses.▷ Parts sprayed matt black.▷ Painted parts in the interior.Clean with a microfibre cloth.Lightly moisten the cloth with water, if necessary.Do not soak the roof lining.

Seat belts

WARNINGChemical cleaners can cause irreparable dam‐age to the fabric of the seat belts. The protec‐tive function of the seat belts will be lost. Thereis a danger of injury or even death. Only use amild soap and water solution for cleaning theseat belts.

Dirt on the seat belt straps can interfere with theaction of the reel and represents a safety hazard.Only clean the belt straps with a mild soap solu‐tion while still fitted to the vehicle.

Never allow seat belts to retract unless they aredry.

Carpets and foot mats

WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or block a pedal that has beenpressed. There is a danger of accidents. Stowitems in the vehicle so that they are secure andcannot get into the driver's footwell. Only usefloor mats that are suitable for the vehicle andcan be securely fastened to the floor. Do notuse loose floor mats, and do not place severalfloor mats on top of one another. Make surethat there is sufficient space for the pedals. En‐sure that floor mats are securely reattached af‐ter having been removed, for example forcleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle toenable the interior to be cleaned more thor‐oughly.In the event of heavy soiling, clean floor carpetsusing a microfibre cloth and water or textilecleaner. Rub back and forth in the direction oftravel to prevent matting.

Sensors/camera lensesClean sensors or camera lenses using a clothmoistened with a small amount of a glasscleaner.

Displays, screens and protectiveglass of the Head-Up Display

NOTEChemical cleaners, moisture or fluids of allkinds can damage the surface of displays andscreens. There is a danger of damage to prop‐erty. Clean with a clean, anti-static microfibrecloth.

Seite 363



NOTEThe surfaces of displays can be damaged dueto improper cleaning. There is a danger ofdamage to property. Avoid applying excessivepressure and do not use abrasive materials.

Clean with a clean, anti-static microfibre cloth.Clean the protective glass of the Head-Up Dis‐play, see page 160, with a microfibre cloth andcommercially available dishwashing liquid.

Laying up the vehicleSpecial measures need to be taken if putting thevehicle out of use for longer than three months.Additional information is available from a ServicePartner of the manufacturer or another qualifiedService Partner or a specialist workshop.

Seite 364



Seite 365



366


REFERENCETechnical data .......................................................................................... 368Appendix ................................................................................................... 370Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 374


Technical dataVehicle equipmentThis chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐cific and special equipment available for themodel series. It may therefore describe equip‐ment and functions which are not installed in


GeneralThe technical data and specifications in theOwner's Handbook are reference figures. Thevehicle-specific data can deviate from this, forexample, due to selected special equipment,country variant or country-specific measurementmethod. Detailed values can be found in the per‐mit documents, on information plates on the ve‐

hicle or can be requested from a Service Partnerof the manufacturer or another qualified ServicePartner or a specialist workshop.The information in the vehicle papers alwaystakes precedence over the information in thisOwner's Handbook.

DimensionsThe dimensions can vary depending on themodel version, equipment or country-specificmeasurement method.The heights specified do not take into accountadd-on parts such as a roof aerial, roof railing or

spoiler. The heights can deviate, for example,due to selected special equipment, tyres, loadsand suspension design.

BMW 8 Series CoupéWidth with mirrors mm 2137

Width without mirrors mm 1902

Height mm 1341-1346

Length mm 4843-4851

Wheelbase mm 2822

Smallest turning circle dia. m (ft) 11.9 (39.1)

Seite 368

REFERENCE Technical data


Weights

M850i xDrive powered by BMW MKerb weight ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load,tank 90 % full, no optional extras

kg (lb) 1965 (4332)

Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2395 (5280)

Load kg (lb) 505 (1113)

Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1235 (2723)

Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1250 (2756)

Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)

840d xDriveKerb weight ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load,tank 90 % full, no optional extras

kg (lb) 1905 (4200)

Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2370 (5225)

Load kg (lb) 540 (1190)

Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1175 (2590)

Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1290 (2844)

Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)

Filling capacities

BMW 8 Series Coupé Litres/Imp. gal NoteFuel tank, approximately. 66.0-68.0 (14.5-14.9) Fuel quality, see

page 333.

Seite 369

Technical data REFERENCE


AppendixGeneralHere is where any updates to the Owner'sHandbook for the vehicle are listed.

Updates after going to pressUpdates have been made to these chapters ofthe printed Owner's Handbook following thecopy deadline.▷ Notes: data memory, see page 11.▷ Remote control: general, see page 79.▷ Driving, parking brake, applying while driving,

see page 133.▷ Driving, Steptronic transmission, shift pad‐

dles, see page 141.

▷ Safety: emergency stop assistant, seepage 211.

▷ Air conditioning: standing air conditioning viaRemote Engine Start, see page 272.

▷ Breakdown Assist: emergency call: statutoryemergency call, see page 353.

Suitable seatsGeneralInformation about which child restraint systemscan be used on the seats in question in accord‐ance with the ECE-R 16 standard.

Left-hand drive vehicles: which child restraint systems can be used on thevehicle seats

Seat positionSeat position number. 1 3 – a) 4 – b) 5 6 – b)

Seat position suitable foruniversal fastening with abelt.

No Yes Yes No Yes

i-Size seat position. No No Yes No Yes

Seat position suitable forside fastening: – L1/L2.

No No No No No

Seite 370

REFERENCE Appendix


Seat positionLargest rear-facing fasten‐ing: – R1/R2X/R2/R3.

No No R2 No R2

Largest front-facing fasten‐ing: – F1/F2X/F2/F3.

No No F2 No F2

Largest suitable boostermount: – B2/B3.

No No B2 No B2

a) Adapt the front/back position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the highestposition to achieve the best possible routing of the belt.b) When using child seats on the rear seats, adapt the front/back position of the front seat if neces‐sary, and also adjust the head restraint of the rear seat or remove it.Not compatible with i-Size seat position with a support stand: cannot be used.Seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but without Top Tether: cannot be used.Seat belt locks for adults are located on the side between the two lower ISOFIX anchors: cannot beused.

Seat number Position in the vehicle1 Front left

2 Front centre

3 Front right

4 2nd seat row left

5 2nd seat row centre

Seat number Position in the vehicle6 2nd seat row right

7 3rd seat row left

8 3rd seat row centre

9 3rd seat row right

Right-hand drive vehicles: which child restraint systems can be used on thevehicle seats

Seat positionSeat position number. 1 – a) 3 4 – b) 5 6 – b)

Seat position suitable foruniversal fastening with abelt.

Yes No Yes No Yes

i-Size seat position. No No Yes No Yes

Seat position suitable forside fastening: – L1/L2.

No No No No No

Seite 371

Appendix REFERENCE


Seat positionLargest rear-facing fasten‐ing: – R1/R2X/R2/R3.

No No R2X No R2X

Largest front-facing fasten‐ing: – F1/F2X/F2/F3.

No No F2X No F2X

Largest suitable boostermount: – B2/B3.

No No B2 No B2

a) Adapt the front/back position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the highestposition to achieve the best possible routing of the belt.b) When using child seats on the rear seats, adapt the front/back position of the front seat if neces‐sary, and also adjust the head restraint of the rear seat or remove it.Not compatible with i-Size seat position with a support stand: cannot be used.Seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but without Top Tether: cannot be used.Seat belt locks for adults are located on the side between the two lower ISOFIX anchors: cannot beused.

Seat number Position in the vehicle1 Front left

2 Front centre

3 Front right

4 2nd seat row left

5 2nd seat row centre

6 2nd seat row right

7 3rd seat row left

8 3rd seat row centre

9 3rd seat row right

Seite 372

REFERENCE Appendix


Seite 373

Appendix REFERENCE


Everything from A to ZIndexAABS, anti-lock braking system 215 Acceleration assistant, see Launch Control 143 Accessories and parts 11 Accident Assistance 352 ACC, see Active Cruise Control 223 Acknowledgement signals of the vehicle 104 Activated carbon filter 269 Activation, airbags 174 Active bonnet, see Active pedestrian protec‐

tion 175 Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function

ACC 223 Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 176 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 176 Active M Sport differential 218 Active PDC, see Emergency braking func‐

tion 241 Active pedestrian protection 175 Active Roll Stabilisation 262 Active seat ventilation 118 Active shock absorber adjustment, see Adaptive

suspension 262 Active sport suspension, see M Dynamic Profes‐

sional 262 Active steering, integral 218 Adaptive brake assist 215 Adaptive brake light, see Dynamic brake

lights 212 Adaptive Headlights 165 ADAPTIVE, see Drive experience switch 143 Adaptive suspension 262 AdBlue at low temperatures 334 AdBlue on the minimum level 335 AdBlue, see BMW diesel with BluePerform‐

ance 334 AdBlue, topping up 335 Additives, engine oil grades 340

Adjustable speed limit, see Manual Speed Lim‐iter 219

Adjusting the headlights 169 Age of tyres 309 Airbags 172 Airbags, indicator/warning lamp 173 Airbag switch, see Key switch for front passen‐

ger airbags 174 Air conditioning 264 Air distribution, manual 268 Air flow, automatic air conditioning 268 Air outlets, see Ventilation 269 Air pressure, tyres 306 Alarm, false 106 Alarm system 105 All-season tyres, see Winter tyres 310 Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 277 Ambient lighting 170 Angle, backrest 109 Animal recognition, see Night Vision 191 Antifreeze protection, see Washer fluid 343 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 343 Anti-lock braking system, ABS 215 Anti-theft alarm system, see Alarm system 105 Anti-theft system, locking 80 Anti-theft system, see Thiefproof wheel

studs 327 Anti-theft, wheel studs 327 Anti-trap mechanism, windows 107 Apple CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 75 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐

tertainment, Communication 8 Aquaplaning 292 Armrest heating 117 Ashtray 279 Ashtray, front 279 ASSIST button, see Active Cruise Control 223 ASSIST button, see Cruise Control 221 Attention camera for driver, see Driver Attention

Camera 69

Seite 374

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z


Attentiveness assistant 213 AUC automatic air recirculation control AUC 267 Audio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 AUTO H button, see Parking brake 132 Automatic air conditioning 264 Automatic air recirculation control AUC 267 Automatic anti-glare control, see High-beam as‐

sistance 167 Automatic Cruise Control, see Active Cruise

Control 223 Automatic driving lights control 163 Automatic gearbox, see Steptronic transmis‐

sion 138 Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 132 Automatic locking 104 Automatic parking function, exterior mirror 115 Automatic start-stop function 129 Automatic unlocking 104 AUTO program, automatic air conditioning 266 AUTO programme, intensity 267 Auto Start Stop function 129 Avoidance assistant 181 Avoiding false alarms 106 Axle load limit 369 Axle loads, weight 369

BBackrest angle 109 Backrest contour, see Lumbar support 110 Backrest, seats 108 Backrest width 110 Bar for tow-starting/towing 358 Battery, vehicle 348 Belts, see Seat belts 111 Black ice, see Outside temperature warning 152 Blower, see Air flow 268 Bluetooth connection 72 Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 BMW diesel with BluePerformance 334 BMW Digital Key 93 BMW display key 83 BMW display key, malfunction 87 BMW Gesture Control 61

BMW Maintenance System 344 BMW Services, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐

gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Bonnet 331 Bonus range, ECO PRO 298 Boot 285 Boot lid 96 Boot lid contactless opening and closing 91 Boot lid, emergency release 98 Boot lid via remote control 81 Boot, storage compartments 286 Bottle holder, see Cupholder 283 Brake assist 215 Brake assist, adaptive 215 Brake lights, adaptive, see Dynamic brake

lights 212 Brake lights, dynamic 212 Brake system 290 Braking, notes 292 Braking safely 292 Breakdown Assist 351 Breakdown assistance 351 Breakdown, help 351 Brightness, Control Display 70 Bulbs and lights 348 Button AUTO H, see Parking brake 132 Buttons on the steering wheel 42 Button SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 354 Button, start/stop 129

CCalendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐

gent Safety 176 Camera-based Cruise Control, see Active Cruise

Control 223 Camera lenses, care 363 Camera, rear-view camera, without Surround

View 243 Camera, see Surround View 246 Can holder, see Cupholder 283 Car battery 348 Care, Head-Up Display 363 Care of displays, screens 363

Seite 375

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE


Care of upholstery fabrics 362 Care products 361 Care, see Vehicle wash 360 Care, vehicle 361 Car key, see Remote control 79 Carpet, care 363 CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 75 Carrying children 120 Carrying children safely 120 Car wash 360 Car washes 360 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust system 291 CBS Condition Based Service 344 Central key, see Remote control 79 Central locking system 89 Central screen, see Control Display 53 Centre armrest 283 Centre armrest, front 283 Centre console 44 Changes, technical, see Your own safety 10 Changing bulbs, see Bulbs and lights 348 Changing gear, Steptronic transmission 138 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐

ber 18 Check Control 148 Checking the oil level electronically 339 Child restraint systems, i-Size 126 Child restraint systems, see Carrying children

safely 120 Child seat classes, ISOFIX, see Suitable ISOFIX

child restraint systems 125 Child seat mounting 122 Child seat mountings, ISOFIX 123 Child seats, see Carrying children safely 120 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 362 Chrome surfaces, care 362 Cigarette lighter 279 Cleaning, Head-Up Display 363 Cleaning of displays, screens 363 Climate comfort windscreen 292 Coasting 300 Coasting in idle 300 Coat hooks 284 Cold start, see Engine start 48 Comfort Access 89 Comfort closing with the remote control 81

Comfort opening using the remote control 80 COMFORT, see Drive experience switch 143 Communication, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Compartments in the doors 283 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 72 Compressor 312 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Condensation on windows 269 Condensation when vehicle is parked 293 Condition Based Service, CBS 344 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Connecting a device 71 Connecting a mobile telephone 71 Connecting a smartphone 71 Connecting a telephone 71 Connecting, mobile devices 71 Connection point, starting assistance 356 Connections, Screen Mirroring 76 Consumption display, ECO PRO 298 Consumption, see Journey data 158 Contactless opening and closing of the boot

lid 91 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 Continuing a journey with a flat tyre 322, 325 Control Display 53 Control Display, settings 66 Controller 53 Control systems, driving stability 215 Coolant 342 Coolant level 342 Coolant temperature 152 Cooling effect, maximum 266 Cooling function 266 Cooling system 342 Cornering light 166 Corrosion of brake discs 293 Crossing traffic warning 259 Cruise Control, active with Stop&Go func‐

tion 223 Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 223 Cruise Control, see Cruise Control 221

Seite 376



Cruise Control with distance control, see ActiveCruise Control 223

Cruise Control without distance control, seeCruise Control 221

Cupholder 283 Cupholder, front 283

DDamage, tyres 308 Data memory 11 Data protection, settings 70 Data, see Deleting personal data 70 Data, technical 368 Date 67 Daytime driving lights 165 DCC, see Cruise Control 221 Deactivation, airbags 174 Defrosting, see Defrosting windows 269 Defrosting the windows 269 Defrosting windows and removing condensa‐

tion 269 Defrost, see Defrosting windows 269 Deleting personal data 70 Deletion of personal data 70 Departure time, auxiliary heating 272 Departure time, independent ventila‐

tion 272, 274 Desired speed, see Active Cruise Control 223 Destination input, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Devices, managing 77 Diagnosis connection 345 Diesel fuel 334 Diesel particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle fil‐

ter 291 Differential lock 218 Digital Key 93 Dimensions 368 Dimmable exterior mirrors 115 Dimming rear-view mirror 115 Dipping headlights, see High-beam assis‐

tance 167 Direction indicators, see Turn indicators 135 Direct selection buttons, see Favourites but‐

tons 52

Displaying the device list 77 Display in windscreen, see Head-Up Dis‐

play 160 Display key, malfunction 87 Display key, see BMW display key 83 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 169 Displays 146 Displays and symbols 9 Displays, ECO PRO 298 Displays, screens 363 Disposal, coolant 343 Disposal, vehicle battery 349 Disposing of the battery 349 Disposing of the old battery 349 Distance warning, see PDC 239 Door key, see Remote control 79 Downhill gradients 293 Drive experience switch 143 Drive mode, see Drive experience switch 143 Drive-off assistant 215 Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 69 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 176 Driver Attention Camera 69 Drive-ready state, engine start 48 Drive-ready state, idle state and standby

state 47 Driver profiles 98 Driver profiles, welcome screen 99 Driving 129 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 176 Driving comfort 262 Driving hints 291 Driving information, general 291 Driving information, running in 290 Driving lights control, automatic 163 Driving on racing tracks 294 Driving path lines, rear-view camera 245, 249 Driving Stability Control Systems 215 Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 301 Drying air, see Cooling function 266 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 215 DTC, Dynamic Traction Control 217 DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Dynamic brake lights 212

Seite 377



Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen‐sion 262

Dynamic ECO lighting function 165 Dynamic Marker Light 194 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 215 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 217

EECO lighting function, dynamic 165 ECO PRO 296 ECO PRO bonus range 298 ECO PRO displays 298 ECO PRO drive mode 296 ECO PRO driving style analysis 301 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Drive experience

switch 143 ECO PRO mode 296 ECO PRO, route-ahead assistant 299 ECO PRO, see Drive experience switch 143 Efficient4x4, see xDrive 217 Electrical power window switches 106 Electronic oil measurement 339 Electronic Stability Program, ESP, see DSC 215 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 Emergency assistance, see Accident Assis‐

tance 352 Emergency assistance, see Breakdown assis‐

tance 351 Emergency boot release 98 Emergency brake 211 Emergency braking function when parking, Ac‐

tive PDC 241 Emergency call 353 Emergency release, boot lid 98 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 305 Emergency running properties, tyres 311 Emergency service, see Accident Assis‐

tance 352 Emergency services, see Breakdown assis‐

tance 351 Emergency stop assistant 211 Emergency unlocking, transmission lockout 142 Engine, automatic start-stop function 129 Engine compartment 330

Engine coolant 342 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 300 Engine oil change 341 Engine oil filler neck 340 Engine oil grades for topping up 340 Engine oil level, checking electronically 339 Engine oil temperature 152 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 48 Engine start, starting assistance 355 Engine stop, see Drive-ready state 48 Engine temperature 152 Entering an address, Navigation, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐munication 8

Entering letters and numbers 55 Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐

gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Entry comparison, navigation 51 Equipment, interior 276 ESP, Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 215 Exhaust gas particle filter 291 Exhaust, see Exhaust system 291 Exhaust system 291 Extending the boot 286 Exterior lights when unlocking 80 Exterior lights with the vehicle locked 81 Exterior mirror, automatically dimming 115 Exterior mirror, automatic parking function 115 Exterior mirrors 114 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 114 External start, see Starting assistance 355 Eye for towing 358 Eyes, see Lashing eye in the boot 286

FFactory settings 78 Failure message, see Check Control 148 False alarm, see Avoiding false alarms 106 Fan run-on, see Exhaust gas particle filter 291 Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 111 Fatigue alerter 213 Fault displays, see Check Control 148 Favourites buttons, iDrive 52 Filler neck for engine oil 340

Seite 378



Finding charging stations, see Charging stationsand Points of Interest, see Owner's Handbookfor Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐tion 8

Fine wood parts, care 363 First-aid kit 351 First-aid set, see First-aid kit 351 Flank protection without Surround View 242 Flank protection with Surround View 250 Flat tyre, continuing a journey 322, 325 Flat tyre message, RPA 324 Flat tyre message, TPM 320 Flat tyre, runflat indicator RPA 323 Flat tyre, see Tyre Pressure Monitor 317 Flat tyre warning lamp, RPA 324 Flat tyre warning lamp, TPM 320 Flat tyre, wheel change 326 Flooding 292 Floor carpet, care 363 Fold-out position of windscreen wipers 138 Foot brake 292 Foot mats, care 363 Four-wheel drive, see xDrive 217 Front airbags 172 Front-end collision warning with City braking

function 178 Front-end collision warning with light braking

function 178 Front head restraints 113 Front neck supports, see Head restraints 113 Front passenger's mirror, tilting down, see Auto‐

matic parking function 115 Front passenger airbags, deactivating/activat‐

ing 174 Front passenger airbags, indicator lamp 175 Front seats 108 Fuel 333 Fuel filler flap 304 Fuel gauge 151 Fuel quality 333 Fuel recommendation 333 Fuel tank cap 304 Fuel, tank capacity 369 Fuses 349

GGarage door opener, see Integrated universal re‐

mote control 276 Gearbox, see Steptronic transmission 138 General driving information 291 General settings 66 Gesture Control 61 Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 61 Give way warning 206 Glare protection, see Sun visor 278 Glove box 282 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 GPS positioning, vehicle position 69 Green diesel 334

HHandbrake, see Parking brake 132 Hand-held transmitter, alternating-code 277 Hands-free system, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Hazard warning lights 351 Head airbags 172 Head Light, adaptive 165 Headlight cleaning system, see Wiper sys‐

tem 136 Headlight courtesy delay feature 165 Headlight flasher 135 Headlight glass 348 Headlights, care 361 Head restraints and seats 108 Head-Up Display 160 Head-Up Display, care 363 Head-Up Display, see Memory function 116 Head-Up Display, standard view 160 Heating, see Auxiliary heating 270 Heating, see Standing air conditioning 272 Help in driving off, see Drive-off assistant 215 High-beam assistance 167 High-beam headlights 135 Hill Start Assist, see Drive-off assistant 215 Holder for beverages 283 HomeLink, see Integrated universal remote con‐

trol 276

Seite 379



Home page 8 Horn 42 Hot exhaust system 291 Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8

IiBrake – PostCrash 212 Ice warning, see Outside temperature warn‐

ing 152 Identification number, see Vehicle identification

number 18 Idle state, standby state and drive-ready

state 47 iDrive 50 iDrive operating principle 50 Ignition key, see Remote control 79 Important considerations 120 Indicator and warning lamps 149 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbags 175 Individual air distribution 268 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 98 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless

charging dock, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐igation, Entertainment, Communication 8

Inflation pressure check, see Tyre PressureMonitor 317

Inflation pressure, tyres 306 Inflation pressure warning RPA, tyres 323 Information on no passing 155 Information window, Control Display 69 Initialising, runflat indicator RPA 324 Initialising, Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM 319 Instrument cluster 146 Instrument cluster switch, see Turn indica‐

tors 135 Instrument cluster switch, see Wiper sys‐

tem 136 Instrument lighting 169 Integral Active Steering 218 Integrated key 87 Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle 19 Integrated universal remote control 276 Intelligent Auto Start Stop function 131 Intelligent emergency call 354

Intelligent Safety 176 Intended use 10 Intensity, AUTO programme 267 Interior camera, see Driver Attention Camera 69 Interior equipment 276 Interior light 169 Interior light when unlocking 80 Interior light with the vehicle locked 81 Interior movement detector 106 Internet connection 75 Internet hotspot 75 Internet site 8 Interval Display, see Service requirements 153 i-Size child restraint systems 126 ISOFIX, child seat mountings 123

JJacking points 328 Journey data 158 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 138 Jump-starting connections 356 Jump starting, see Starting assistance 355 Junction warning with City braking function 184

KKeyless Go, see Comfort Access 89 Key, mechanical 87 Key, see BMW display key 83 Key switch for front passenger airbags 174 Kick-down, Steptronic transmission 138 Knee airbag 173

LLabelling of recommended tyres 310 Labelling of run-flat tyres 311 Lane boundary, warning 195 Lane Change Warning 198 Lane control assistant, see Steering and lane

control assistant 233 Lane control assistant with active side collision

protection, see Side collision warning 202 Lane Departure Warning 195 Language, set on the Control Display 68

Seite 380



Laser high-beam headlights 168 Lashing eyes in the boot 286 Lashing straps, see Lashing eyes in the

boot 286 Launch Control 143 Laying up the vehicle 364 Laying up, vehicle 364 Leather care 362 LEDs, replacing light-emitting diodes, see Bulbs

and lights 348 Left-hand traffic, light setting 169 Light alloy wheels, care 362 Light-emitting diodes, replacing LEDs, see Bulbs

and lights 348 Lighter 279 Lighter, front 279 Light in exterior mirror, see Crossing traffic warn‐

ing 259 Lighting 163 Lighting, loudspeaker 170 Light in the exterior mirror, see Lane Change

Warning 198 Lights 163 Light switch 163 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 219 List of all messages 66 Loading 285 Loading the boot, see Stowing and securing a

transported load 285 Locking, automatic 104 Locking settings 103 Locking with the remote control 80 Logging on, mobile devices, see Connec‐

tions 71 Loudspeaker lighting 170 Low-beam headlights 164 Luggage compartment lid, see Boot lid 96 Luggage rack, see Roof rack 294 Lumbar support 110

MMaintenance 344 Maintenance requirement, see CBS Condition

Based Service 344 Maintenance, see Service requirements 153

Maintenance System, BMW 344 Make-up mirror 278 Malfunction, BMW display key 87 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 148 Malfunction, remote control 83 Manual air distribution 268 Manual air flow 268 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 305 Manual operation, Steptronic transmission 138 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Marker light 194 Matt paintwork 362 Maximum cooling effect 266 Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit

Info 155 Maximum speed of winter tyres 310 M Dynamic Professional 262 Media of the Owner's Handbook 19 Memory function 116 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection

lists 158 Messages 66 Messages, see Check Control 148 Microfilter 269 Minimum tread depth, tyres 308 Mirrors 114 Mirror, see Memory function 116 Mirror, vanity 278 Mobile communication in the vehicle 292 Mobile devices, managing 77 Mobile phone, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐

gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Mobile Service, see Accident Assistance 352 Mobile Service, see Breakdown assistance 351 Mobile telephone, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Mobility System 311 MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 223 MODE button, see Cruise Control 221 Moisture in the headlights, see Headlight

glass 348 Monitor, see Control Display 53 Mounting child restraints 122

Seite 381



MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbookfor Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐tion 8

M Sport differential, active 218 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 42 Multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Music hard disc, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐

igation, Entertainment, Communication 8

NNavigation, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Net, boot 286 Neutral cleaner, light alloy wheels 362 New wheels and tyres 309 Night-vision device, see Night Vision 191 Night Vision with person and animal recogni‐

tion 191 No Passing Information 155 Notes 8 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 358

OOBD on-board diagnosis 345 Object recognition, see Night Vision 191 Obstacle marking, rear-view camera 245, 249 Octane number, see Petrol grade 333 Oil change 341 Oil change interval, see Service require‐

ments 153 Oil filler neck 340 Oil grades for topping up, engine 340 On-board computer, see Journey data 158 On-board diagnosis OBD 345 On-board literature, printed 19 On-board monitor, see Control Display 53 On-board tool kit 347 Online entertainment, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Opening and closing 79 Operating a smartphone via voice control 60

Operating menus, see iDrive 50 Outlets, see Ventilation 269 Outside air, see AUC 267 Outside temperature 152 Overheating of the engine, see Coolant tempera‐

ture 152 Owner's Handbook, printed 19

PPaintwork, vehicle 361 Panorama View, see Surround View 246 Park Assistant 253 Park Assistant Plus, see Surround View 246 Park Distance Control PDC 239 Parking aid, see PDC 239 Parking Assistant Plus, see Surround View 246 Parking Assistant, see Park Assistant 253 Parking brake 132 Parking lights 164 Parking with Automatic Hold, see Parking

brake 132 Particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle filter 291 Part replacement 347 Parts and accessories 11 PDC Park Distance Control 239 Pedestrian protection, active 175 Performance Control 263 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 98 Person recognition, see Night Vision 191 Person warning with braking function 188 Petrol 333 Petrol grade 333 Petrol particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle fil‐

ter 291 Place for children 120 Plasters, see First-aid kit 351 Plastic parts, care 363 Positioning, vehicle position 69 PostCrash – iBrake 212 Power display, see Sport displays 159 Power failure 349 Power window switches 106 Pressure Monitor, see Tyre Pressure Moni‐

tor 317 Pressure, tyres 306

Seite 382



Pressure warning RPA, tyres 323 Prevention of rear collision 205 Printed on-board literature 19 Profiles, see Driver profiles 98 Protection function, windows, see Anti-trap

mechanism 107

RRacing track driving 294 Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particle filter 291 Radio key, see Remote control 79 Radio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 Radio signals 292 Rain sensor 136 Range 153 Rape seed methyl ester, RME 334 Rear backrests, folding down 286 Rear collision warning, see Prevention of rear

collision 205 Rear fog light 168 Rear-view camera, see Surround View 246 Rear-view camera, without Surround View 243 Rear-view mirror, automatic-dim 115 Rear-wheel steering, see Integral Active Steer‐

ing 218 Rear window heating 269 Recirculated-air mode 267 Recirculating air filter, see Microfilter / Activated

carbon filter 269 Recirculation, see Recirculated-air mode 267 Recommended makes of tyre 310 Recycling 346 Reduction agent, see BMW diesel with BluePer‐

formance 334 Refuelling 304 Remedying flat tyres 311 Remote 3D View 252 Remote control 79 Remote control, additional 82 Remote control for audio, see Owner's


Remote control, integrated key 87 Remote control, loss 82

Remote control, malfunction 83 Remote control of the vehicle, replacing the bat‐

tery 82 Remote control, universal 276 Remote control with display, malfunction 87 Remote control with display, see BMW display

key 83 Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐tion 8

Remote Software Upgrade 63 Replacement of parts 347 Replacement of wheels/tyres 309 Replacing bulbs, see Bulbs and lights 348 Replacing fog lights, see Bulbs and lights 348 Replacing front lights, see Bulbs and lights 348 Replacing headlights, see Bulbs and lights 348 Replacing laser headlights, see Bulbs and

lights 348 Replacing LED headlights, see Bulbs and

lights 348 Replacing lights, see Bulbs and lights 348 Replacing parts 347 Replacing rear fog light, see Bulbs and

lights 348 Replacing rear light, see Bulbs and lights 348 Replacing tail lights, see Bulbs and lights 348 Replacing the battery, remote control of the vehi‐

cle 82 Replacing the wiper blades 347 RES CNCL button, see Active Cruise Con‐

trol 223 RES CNCL button, see Cruise Control 221 Reserve warning, see Range 153 Reservoir for washer fluid 343 Resetting settings 78 Resetting the vehicle configuration 78 Reset, Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM 319 Restraint systems for children, see Carrying chil‐

dren safely 120 Retreaded tyres 310 Reuse, recycling 346 Reversing assistant, see Park Assistant 253 Revolution counter 151 Right-hand traffic, light setting 169 Rim cleaner, light alloy wheels 362

Seite 383



RME, rape seed methyl ester 334 Road priority warning 206 Rolling away in idle, see Coasting 300 RON, petrol grade 333 Roof lining 45 Roof load 369 Roof rack 294 Rope for tow-starting/towing 358 Roundabout light 167 Route-ahead assistant 299 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 RPA runflat indicator 323 RSC Runflat System Component, see Run-flat

tyres 311 RSU, see Remote Software Upgrade 63 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐

tertainment, Communication 8 Rubber parts, care 362 Runflat indicator RPA 323 Run-flat tyres 311 Run Flat tyres, see Run-flat tyres 311 Running in 290 Running in brake discs, see Brake system 290 Running in brake pads, see Brake system 290 Run-on of fan, see Exhaust gas particle filter 291

SSafe seating position 108 Safety systems, see Airbags 172 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 176 Saving energy, see Shift point indicator 155 Saving fuel 295 Screen Mirroring, connection 76 Screen, see Control Display 53 Screwdriver, see On-board tool kit 347 Sealant, see Mobility System 311 Seat and armrest heating 117 Seat belt reminder for driver and front passenger

seat 113 Seat belts 111 Seat belts, care 363 Seats and head restraints 108 Seat, see Memory function 116 Seats, front 108

Seat ventilation, active 118 Securing a transported load 285 Selection list in the instrument cluster 158 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 138 Sensors, care 363 Service history 154 Service requirements 153 Service requirement, see CBS Condition Based

Service 344 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's


Service, see Accident Assistance 352 Service, see Breakdown assistance 351 SET button, see Active Cruise Control 223 SET button, see Cruise Control 221 Settings, locking/unlocking 103 Settings on the Control Display 66 Settings, seats and head restraints 108 Setting up a driver profile 99 Setup assistant 99 Shift Lights, revolution counter 151 Shift point indicator 155 Shock absorber adjustment, active, see Adaptive

suspension 262 Side airbag 172 Side collision warning 202 Side lights 164 Side nozzles, see Ventilation 269 Signal horn, horn 42 Signals on unlocking, see Acknowledgement

signals 104 Sizes 368 Smartphone, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Smokers package 279 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's


Snow chains 316 Socket for on-board diagnosis, OBD 345 Sockets, connecting electrical appliances, see

Sockets 280 Soft Close Automatic 98 Software upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐

grade 63

Seite 384



Soot particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle fil‐ter 291

SOS button 353 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 354 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐

gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Sound, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 Spanner, see On-board tool kit 347 Special equipment, see Vehicle equipment 9 Speed Limit Assist 231 Speed Limit Device, see Manual Speed Lim‐

iter 219 Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 155 Speed Limiter, manual 219 Speed Limit Info 155 Speed warning 68 Sport displays 159 SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Drive experience

switch 143 SPORT PLUS, see Drive experience switch 143 Sport programme, Steptronic transmission 138 SPORT, see Drive experience switch 143 Sport suspension, active, see M Dynamic Pro‐

fessional 262 Stability control systems 215 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 9 Standard view, Head-Up Display 160 Standby state, idle state and drive-ready

state 47 Standing air conditioning 272 Start/stop button 129 Starting assistance 355 Starting assistance, see DSC 215 Starting, see Drive-ready state 48 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 48 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Status Control Display, tyres 318 Status information, iDrive 51 Status of the Owner's Handbook 9 Status, vehicle 159 Steering and lane control assistant including traf‐

fic-queue assistant 233 Steering, see Integral Active Steering 218 Steering wheel, adjusting 115

Steering wheel, buttons 42 Steering wheel heating 116 Steering wheel, see Memory function 116 Steptronic sport transmission, see Steptronic

transmission 138 Steptronic transmission 138 Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 48 Storage compartment in the centre console 283 Storage compartments 282 Storage compartments in the boot 286 Storage facilities 282 Storage, see Laying up the vehicle 364 Storage, tyres 310 Stowing and securing a transported load 285 Stowing heavy transported loads 285 Suitable devices 72 Suitable mobile telephones 72 Summer tyres, tread 308 Sun visor 278 Supplementary handbook 19 Supplementary text message 148 Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat‐

ing 117 Surround View 246 Suspension settings, see Drive experience

switch 143 Switches, see Driving area 42 Switch for driving dynamics, see Drive experi‐

ence switch 143 Switching on the headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture 82 Symbols and displays 9 SYNC programme, automatic air condition‐

ing 268

TTailgate, see Boot lid 96 Tank display 151 Technical changes, see Your own safety 10 Technical data 368 Telephone, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8

Seite 385



Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐gation, Entertainment, Communication 8

Temperature, automatic air conditioning 265 Temperature display, see Outside tempera‐

ture 152 Temperature, engine oil 152 Tension belt, see Lashing eyes in the boot 286 Text message, supplementary 148 Thermal camera, see Night Vision 191 Thiefproof wheel studs 327 Thigh support 109 Tilt alarm sensor 106 Tilting down front passenger's mirror, see Auto‐

matic parking function 115 Time 67 Tool 347 Topping up engine oil 340 Torque display, see Sport displays 159 Total weight 369 Total weight, permitted 369 Tourist function, see Left-hand/right-hand traf‐

fic 169 Tow bar 358 Tow fitting, see Towing eye 358 Towing away 357 Towing eye 358 Towing rope 358 Towing, see Tow-starting and towing 357 Tow-starting 357 TPM Tyre Pressure Monitor 317 Traction control 217 TRACTION, driving dynamics 217 Traffic information, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Traffic jam assistant, see Steering and lane con‐

trol assistant 233 Traffic-queue assistant, see Steering and lane

control assistant 233 Transmission lockout, unlocking electroni‐

cally 142 Tread, tyres 308 Triple turn signal 135 Turn indicator, indicator lamp 151 Turn indicators, high-beam headlights, headlight

flasher 135

Turn indicators, replacing bulbs, see Bulbs andlights 348

Turning circle lines, rear-view camera 245, 249 TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐

tertainment, Communication 8 Tyre damage 308 Tyre inflation pressure 306 Tyre makes, recommendation 310 Tyre pressure 306 Tyre pressure monitor, see RPA 323 Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM 317 Tyre repair kit, see Mobility System 311 Tyre replacement 309 Tyres and wheels 306 Tyre sealant, see Mobility System 311 Tyre settings 317 Tyres with emergency running properties 311 Tyre tread 308

UUnits of measure 68 Universal remote control 276 Unloaded weight 369 Unlock-button, Steptronic transmission 138 Unlocking, automatic 104 Unlocking, settings 103 Unlocking the fuel filler flap manually 305 Unlocking with the remote control 80 Updates after going to press 9 Update, see Remote Software Upgrade 63 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 63 USB connection 74 USB interface, position in the vehicle 281 Use, intended 10

VVanity mirror 278 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer‐

ing 218 Vehicle battery 348 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown Assist 351 Vehicle care 361 Vehicle equipment 9 Vehicle identification number 18

Seite 386



Vehicle paintwork 361 Vehicle position, vehicle positioning 69 Vehicle, running in 290 Vehicle settings reset 78 Vehicle status 159 Vehicle wash 360 Ventilation 269 Ventilation, see Standing air conditioning 272 Version, see Remote Software Upgrade 63 Video, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 8 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 18 Voice control, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐

gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Voice control system 58

WWading 292 Warning and indicator lamps 149 Warning lamp in exterior mirror, see Crossing

traffic warning 259 Warning lamp in the exterior mirror, see Lane

Change Warning 198 Warning messages, see Check Control 148 Warning of crossing traffic 259 Warning triangle 351 Warranty 10 Washer fluid 343 Washer jets, windows 137 Washing fluid, see Washer fluid 343 Washing, vehicle 360 Wash system 360 Water on roads 292 Water, see Condensation when vehicle is

parked 293 Website 8 Weights 369 Welcome lights 165 Welcome light when unlocking 80 Welcome screen, driver profiles 99 Wheel change 326 Wheel replacement 309 Wheels and tyres 306 Wheels, see Runflat indicator RPA 323 WiFi connection 75

Windscreen, climate comfort 292 Windscreen washer jets 137 Windscreen washing system, see Wiper sys‐

tem 136 Windscreen wipers, see Wiper system 136 Winter storage, see Laying up the vehicle 364 Winter tyres 310 Winter tyres, tread 308 Wipers, fold-out position 138 Wipers, see Wiper system 136 Wiper system 136 Wiping fluid, see Washer fluid 343 Wireless charging dock, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐tion 8

Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wirelesscharging dock, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐igation, Entertainment, Communication 8

Wood parts, care 363 Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 51 Working in the engine compartment 331 Wrong-way driving warning 209

XxDrive 217

YYour own safety 10

Seite 387



*BL00I*xxx en

The UltimateDriving Machine

BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.Your customised vehicle information in an app.Optimised for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

*BL00I*xxx en


OWNER'S HANDBOOK. - BMW… · out by a BMW Service Partner. If you choose to use another specialist...

Documents

Transcript of OWNER'S HANDBOOK. - BMW… · out by a BMW Service Partner. If you choose to use another specialist...